Attechment / Appendix - Nava Raipur Atal Nagar

Request For Proposal for Selection of a Facility Management Service Provider for Mantralya Mahanadi Bhawan and its campus at Naya Raipur

1

Attechment / Appendix

FOR SELECTION OF A FACILITY MANAGEMENT SERVICE PROVIDER FOR MANTRALYA MAHANADI BHAWAN AND ITS

CAMPUS AT NAYA RAIPUR

RFP No.::50 / FMS / Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16, Naya Raipur Dated 22 / 12/ 2015

NAYA RAIPUR DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY Utility-Block, Capitol Complex Sector-19, Naya Raipur-492002, Chhattisgarh PH.NO.0771-2511500, FAX 0771-2511400, e-mail. [email protected]


2

: Technical INDEX

Sl. No. Description Pages

1 Interior Decoration work For State Secretariat Building at Naya Raipur (Chhattisgarh).

2 Zonal Contract for Additional/Special Repair & Furniture work for Mantralaya Mahanadi

Bhawan Naya Raipur.

3 Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of modular

workstation (Modular office Furniture) for Section Block of State Secretariat Building at

Naya Raipur (Chhattisgarh).- MOD-1

4 Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of modular

workstation (Modular office Furniture) for Ancillary A&B, Ministry & Secretary blocks of

State Secretariat Building at Naya Raipur.- MOD-2

5 Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of

COMPACTORS, LIBRARY RACKS, TABLE, MODULAR STORAGE CABINETS &

SLOTED ANGLE ADJUSTABLE STORAGE RACKS FOR State Secretariat Building at

Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur..- MOD-3

6 Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing & commissioning of office chairs

and sofas for State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur.- MOD-4 & 05

[Office Chair, Sofa, (PART- 2 BOQ-3 ONLY FOR BALANCE CHAIRS)

7 PROVIDING & FIXING OF SIGNAGES AND NAME PLATES FOR STATE SECRETARIAT

BUILDING AT CAPITOL COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR.

8 Providing & Fixing Nameplates & Signage under Annual Operation & Maintenance of

Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur.

9 DESIGNING, SUPPLYING, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF

AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM OF STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING AT CAPITOL

COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR, (CHHATTISGARH)

10 SITC of PA System, Annual Operation, Repairing & Maintenance of Audio-Visual System

for Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan Naya Raipur

11 Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Multimedia Data/Video Projector in

Mantralaya, MahanadiBhawan, Naya Raipur.

12 Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 55 Inch LED TV (Monitor) at Mantralaya,

Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur.

13 Designing, Providing & Fixing Balcony / Terrace / Garden Landscaping including One

year maintenance in Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur

14 Annual Maintenance Contract of Landscaping & Irrigation in Mantralaya Mahanadi

Bhawan, Naya Raipur.

15 Supply of Plumbing & Sanitary fittings, Paints and WTP materials for Maintenance of

Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur

16 Supply of Electrical Light Fixtures Fan & Desert Water cooler under Maintenance in


17 Supply of Electrical Light Fixtures, Fan & Accessories under Maintenance in


18 Supplying, Installation, Testing and Commissioning (SITC) of Cooling Tower Fills With

Drift Eliminator in HVAC System of Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan Naya Raipur.

19 Name of Work: Repairing & Annual Maintenance of WATER COOLER, WTP, RO &

FILTRATION SYSTEM 5/10/12.5/15 HP Pumps & Pumping system of Mantralaya

Mahanadi Bhawan and Rajdhani Sarovar at Naya Raipur .


3

Name of Work:- Interior Decoration work For State Secretariat Building at Naya Raipur (Chhattisgarh).

Work Order No: 1423 /SSB/Int. & Fur./Deco. Work/4-4 /NRDA/09 Raipur, dated: 05 /10/2011 Contract Agreement

No.28/ SSB/ Int.Deco. work/ES/4-4/NRDA/11-12, Raipur, dated: 29 /9/2011.

I N D E X

SR. NO. PARTICULARS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION – I GENERAL NOTES/INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION – II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: RELATED CIVIL

SECTION – III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: RELATED

SECTION – IV GENERAL SPECIFICATION: FURNISHING WORKS

SECTION – V TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: FURNISHING

SECTION – VI LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIAL/AGENCIES

SECTION I

GENERAL NOTES/INSTRUCTIONS 1.0 General Note: The work contemplated under this contract includes interior decoration, the aforesaid project, all as detailed in the Bill of Quantities, Technical Specifications, drawings and tender documents and to complete the said work in every respect in accordance with this contract and with the directions, approvals and to the satisfaction of NRDA. All materials and items in this technical specification are for complete supply and installation as directed and approved by NRDA unless otherwise specified. Such other works which are not included in the aforesaid Bill of quantities are generally intended to be executed through a separate agency. Notwithstanding the above, the NRDA reserves the right to order additional works under the same Contract. NRDA also reserves the right to omit any item of work included in the aforesaid Bill of quantities and award the same to any other contractor or not perform it at all at his -discretion and the Contractor shall not have any claim because of the same. The Contractor for this work shall be required to work in co-operation and coordination with other agencies on site and give them all reasonable assistance and help for the execution of the work in an efficient manner all as directed. The words "approved" or "as directed" shall be deemed to convey approval or the discretion of NRDA. 1.1. Indian Standard Specifications: The particular Specifications for the work are as detailed hereinafter. These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The obtainable local practice as detailed in various regional handbooks of practice may be used subject to specific approval from NRDA. Where the specifications in any of the standards are at variance with the specifications detailed herein, the specifications herein shall govern. 1.2. Quality of Materials & General Standards of work: The Contractor under this contract commits himself to use materials conforming to relevant Indian Standards/Codes and assumes full responsibility for the quality of all materials incorporated or brought for incorporation in the work. The work shall be executed in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and as per direction of NRDA.


4

1.3. Scaffolding: All scaffolding and ladders required for the proper execution of the work shall be provided by the contractor. The scaffolding should be stout and strong to prevent any collapse or displacement. Proper measures for safety of workmen working on scaffolding are to be taken by the contractor. All Scaffolding shall be padded with rubber base to avoid any scratch by scaffolding base on installed/existing flooring stone, tiles, wood, etc.. The Contractor shall bear all the cost of rework of flooring in case of any damage due to use of unpadded scaffolding base. 1.4. Measurements: The mode of measurements, wherever possible is specifically mentioned in these documents. Where it has not been mentioned, it shall be as per provision of the relevant Indian Standards. All the measuring tapes and other accessories necessary, shall be provided by the contractor. The dimensions shown in the drawings shall have to be verified by the contractor at site before execution of the items and necessary allowance's, have to be made as per the actual dimensions available at site. 1.5. Tools and Plant: The tenderer shall furnish a list of tools, plant and machinery which he intends to use on the works. The list should indicate the exact type of machine, its capacity, year of manufacture, kind and capacity of propelling force, spare parts readily available and all other pertinent information. The contractor is obliged to use the machinery mentioned in his list if NRDA considers it necessary. 1.6. Surveying and Staking: It is the express responsibility of the contractor to bring to site all surveying instruments necessary for the marking out, fixation of levels, etc. and conduct these survey operations himself with utmost accuracy. The contractor shall put up stable bench marks etc. as necessary for the work. NRDA /his representative will be present when this work is being carried out and will inspect all these operations with the contractor's assistance. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for accurate setting out the work and he shall at his own expense make good any defects arising from errors in line and levels. 1.7. Samples: When demanded by NRDA, the contractor shall produce samples of materials I carryout samples of work. All materials used as also works carried out shall confirm to the quality of approved samples. Production of these samples shall be at contractors cost. 1.8 Providing house-keeping support for the entire site inclusive of all dedicated labour and supervisory personnel at all times of work, across the entire facility. Cost to include all equipment, consumables, protective and safety measures, etc. complete. The site shall be kept clean to the complete satisfaction and based on instructions from the Project Managers. 1.9. The description of an item shall be deemed to include all preambles, headings, sub-headings and references to other documents. The detailed description of work and materials, given in the Specification are not necessarily repeated in the Bill of Quantities. 1.10. The Preamble to the Bills of Quantities must be read with the Drawings, Conditions of Contract and the Specification and the tenderer shall be deemed to have examined the Drawings, Specifications, Conditions of Contract and to have acquainted himself with the Works to be done and the way in which they are to be carried out. This preamble to the Bills of Quantities shall form part of the Contract. 1.11 Providing and maintaining Field Laboratory in a satisfactory manner till the completion of work to ensure site control on quality of materials and the works and shall strictly comply with provision of Indian International Standards at no extra cost. All other regular tests including requisite materials shall be carried out as directed either at approved laboratory or at site at no extra cost. 1.12. The Tenderers are requested to inspect the site and obtain for themselves at their own expense all necessary information and particulars to enable them to submit the tender.


5

1.13. The dimensions shown in the drawings shall have to be verified by the contractor at site before execution of the items and necessary allowance's have to be made as per the actual dimensions available at site. 1.14. For the items of works having Basic rate of material, price adjustment will be made only on the actual quantity measured. Wastage shall be to Contractors account. Basic rate indicates landed cost at site including transportation charges, loading-unloading and all other levies/taxes as applicable. 1.15. The contractor should refer to the detailed drawings for details. All the rates so quoted should be inclusive of all hardware. 1.16. All pre-fabrication works wherever possible shall be carried outside the client's premises, only assembling and finishing work will be allowed within the Site. 1.17. Items of work provided in the BOQ but not covered in the technical specifications and drawings shall be executed strictly as per instructions of the engineer-in-charge/PMC. 1.18. Unless specifically mentioned otherwise in the contract, the tenderer shall quote for the finished items and shall provide for the complete cost towards labour, materials, plant and machinery, operational costs, levies, taxes, transport, repairs, rectification, maintenance till handing over, revenue expenses, contingencies, overheads, profits and all incidental items not specifically mentioned but reasonably implied and necessary to complete the works according to the contract. 1.19. The quantities of the various items mentioned in the BOQ, drawings and technical specification are approximate and may vary up to any extent or be deleted altogether. The quoted rates of each item shall remain firm for all works. The contractor, in his own interest, should get an indication of the probable extent of the work to be executed under any particular item in this schedule, before undertaking any preliminary and enabling work or purchasing bought out components related to the work. 1.20. Rates shall be quoted both in figures and in words in clear legible writing. No overwriting is allowed. All scoring and cancellations should be countersigned by the tenderer. In case of illegibility, the interpretation of the engineer shall be final. All entries shall be in English language. 1.21. Engineer-in-charge's decision shall be final and binding on the contractor regarding clarifications of items in the technical specification, BOQ and drawings with respect to the other sections of the Contract. 1.22. The rates quoted shall be inclusive of all mock-ups, associated samples prior to any mass production or procurement as per complete satisfaction of NRDA and Architect, inclusive of dismantling, demolishing and carting the material and making good of the surface. 1.23. Any debris generated out of the said work may please be cleared on priority basis from the Site. 1.24. The rate to include treating all woodwork, ply with anti-termite treatment. 1.25. The contractor should refer to the detailed drawings for details. All the rates so quoted should be inclusive of all hardware.

1.26 Access to Site, approach roads and roads within the premises: The contractor shall at his own cost provide all approach roads required for the purpose of carrying out the work in the most expeditious and efficient manner and shall remove the temporary roads on completion. He shall acquaint himself thoroughly regarding condition and suitability of public roads leading upto the limits of the premises and will provide vehicles for transportation of materials which meet the requirements of these road conditions. It shall also be responsibility of the contractor to maintain at his own cost these roads till the construction is completed. The tenderer is also to acquaint himself with local laws and bylaws and complying with all police and highway authority requirements. 1.27. Protection of Finished Work The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining any boxing or other temporary coverings required for the protection of dressed or finished work that might be damaged during the progress of the work if left unprotected. He is to clean out all shavings, cut ends and other waste from all parts of the Works before coverings or infillings are constructed.


6

1.28 Rejection/ wastage All rejections and wastage in process and in the final stages, for various materials used for the fabrication of a furniture item shall be borne by the Contractor.

SECTION II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: RELATED CIVIL WORKS 2.1. CONTROLLED CONCRETE: PLAIN & REINFORCED: General: Concrete and reinforced concrete work shall be carried generally in conformity with the latest Indian Standards IS :456 and for provisions indicated here in below. All work is to be carried out with utmost precision and up to date scientific know-how and the contractor shall employ thoroughly competent staff to achieve acceptable standards conforming to technical specifications. Cement: Cement to be used for the work shall be mainly Portland Pozzolana cement/Portland Slag cement. If directed, the contractor shall purchase cement as fresh as possible after manufacture and where there is reason to believe the cement has been long stored, the Engineer-in-charge may demand a Laboratory Test Certificate regarding the character of cement and the contractor shall furnish the same at no extra cost. The engineer-in-charge shall reject any cement which in his opinion does not meet the required standards. The contractor should furnish the manufacturer's certificate for every consignment of cement received by him. All bags and containers in which cement is packed shall be stored in a dry, weather-tight, properly ventilated structure with adequate provision for prevention and absorption of moisture. The contractor shall at all times maintain for the inspection of the Engineer-in-charge, a log book indicating the receipt of cement, brand and agent from whom obtained and the age of cement. Cement which has caked or perished by being wet or otherwise shall on no account be used on the work. Cement shall be consumed on the works in the same sequence as that of their receipt at site. Cement reclaimed from cleaning of bags or from spillage from containers or otherwise shall on no account be used. Sand: Fine aggregate shall conform to latest Indian standards (IS :383). Sand shall be natural sand, crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand but it must be well graded sand conforming to IS grading and its FM be 2.4 to 3.2. Use of sea sand is prohibited. It shall be composed of hard siliceous material and shall be clean and of sharp angular grit type. Sand shall be properly graded minimizing all voids. Allowance for bulking of wet sand shall be made. Bulkage limit is to be restricted to less than 20%. Silt content in sand should not be more than 5%. Laboratory equipment such as measuring jars etc. are to be kept at site for time to time checking of bulkage and silt content. Sand shall be free from any harmful organic impurities. Quick colour test should be made at site for the consignment of sand received. Colour test details are given below: Colour Test of Sand: The sand shall be tested with 3% solution of caustic soda (Sodium Hydroxide) which is called "Colour Test". This is a reliable indicator of the presence or otherwise of any organic matter in sand as under:

1. A colour less liquid indicates clean sand free from organic matter,

2. A straw coloured liquid indicates some organic matter but not enough to be seriously objectionable; and

3. A dark colour means that the sand contains injurious amount of organic matter and should not be used unless it is used and a retest shows that it is satisfactory.


7

Water: Water for all concrete work shall be clean, free from deleterious matter such as oils, acids, alkalies, sugar and vegetable matter. Permissible limits for solids shall conform to IS 4561978. Every attempt shall be made to use water which is fit for drinking purposes. Water storage facilities provided by the contractor shall be maintained properly to preclude contamination of water by any of the harmful substances. The quantity of water to be added to concrete for mixing shall be such as to afford workability consistent with strength requirements. Water/cement ratio shall be maintained constant as specified (0.45 for RCC) and recorded in every batch of concrete. P.H. of water shall be in the range 6-9. Arrangement for slump cone test shall be kept at site to arrive workability whenever the Engineer-in-charge wants to check at site. 2.3. MASONRY 2.3.1. Brick Work Bricks The bricks shall be first class kiln burnt bricks of regular and uniform size, shape and colour, uniformly well burnt throughout but not over burnt. They shall have frog of 20 mm depth on one of their flat faces. They shall give a clear metallic ringing sound when struck together. They shall show a fine grained, uniform, homogeneous and dens texture on fracture and be free from lumps of lime, laminations, cracks, air-holes, soluble salts causing efflorescence or other defects which may in any way impair their strength, durability, appearance or usefulness for the purpose intended. They shall not have any part under burnt. They shall not break when thrown on the ground on their flat face in a saturated condition from a height of n60 cm (about 2’). The size of brick shall be 250 mm x 75 mm x 125 mm. Only bricks of one standard size shall be used on one work unless specially permitted by the PMC/Employer. The following tolerance are permitted in the standard conventional size adopted on a particular work:- Length – plus or minus 1/8” (about 3.0 mm) Breadth – plus or minus 1/16” (about 1.5 mm) Depth – plus or minus 1/16” (about 1.5 mm) After immersion in water, absorption by weight shall not exceed 20% of the dry weight of the brick when tested according to I.S.S. No. 1077-1970. Unless otherwise specified the load to crush the brick when tested according to I.S.S. No. 1077-1970 shall not be less than 75 kg/sq.cm. The brick to be used for the entire work shall be approved by the Architect / Employer before hand from time to time. Morter Unless otherwise specified, mortar for brick work shall be composed for 1 part of cement to 6 parts of approved sand, for walls of one brick thick (25 cm) and over, and one part of cement to 4 parts of approved sand for half brick thick and brick on edge walls. Other specification for mortar in brick work shall be as per I.S.S. No. 2116-1965. Construction Detail All bricks shall be immersed in water for 24 hours before being put into work so that they will be saturated and will not absorb water from the mortar. Bats No bats or cut bricks shall be used in the work unless absolutely necessary around irregular openings or for closures, in which case, full bricks shall be laid at corners, the bats being placed on the middle of the courses. Laying The bricks shall be laid in mortar to line, level and shapes shown on the plans, slightly pressed and thoroughly bedded in mortar and all joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that they will be completely filled with mortar and no hollows left anywhere. Bricks shall be handled carefully so as not to damage their edges. They should not be thrown from any height to the ground but should be put down gently. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints made truly vertical. Vertical joints on one course and the next below should not come over one another and shall not normally be nearer than quarter of a brick length.


8

For battered faces beading shall be at right angles to the face. Fixtures, plugs, frames etc. if any laying the courses only and not later by removal of bricks already laid. Care shall be taken during construction to see that edges of bricks at quoins, sills, head etc. are not damaged. The vertically of the walls and horizontality of the courses shall be checked quite often with plumb bob and spirit level respectively. Bond Unless otherwise specified, brick work shall be done in English Bond. All walls, coming in contact with reinforced concrete columns, beams etc. should be properly bonded by inserting reinforcements and extra labour shall be included in the rates (reinforcement will be measured and paid separately). Joints Joints shall not exceed 100 mm (about 3/8”) in thickness and this thickness shall be uniform throughout. The joints shall be raked out not less than 10 mm (about 3/8”) deep when the mortar is sill green, where pointing is to be done. When the brick surface are to be plastered, the joints shall be raked to a depth of 5 mm when the mortar is green, so as to provide good key to plaster. Uniform Raising Brick work shall be carried up regularly in all cases where the nature of work will admit, not leaving any part 60 mm. lower than another. But where building at different levels are necessary, the bricks shall be stepped so as to give later as uniform level and effective bond. Horizontal courses should be in line and level, and face plumb or to later as shown on the plan. The rate of laying masonry may be upto a height of 80 cm (about 32”) per day if cement mortar is used and 45 cm (about 18”) if the mortar is used. Scafolding The scaffolding must be strong and rigid, stiffened with necessary cross braces and always decked and beard on the sills with closed board ceilings and swings to prevent any injury to persons or materials. The Contractor shall have to allow other trades to make reasonable use of his scaffolding as directed by the Architect / Employer for the interest of work the Contractor has to erect scaffolding in other’s properties, including Laval bodies or corporation, the arrangement for the same including the cost of licensing fees, etc. shall have to be borne by the Contractor and the Employer should be kept free from any liability on this account. Put log holes shall be made good by bricks to match the face work when put logs are removed after ensuring that the holes behind are slightly filled in with 1:4:8 cement concrete. Curing All brick work shall be kept well watered for 14 days after laying. Where pozzalana cement is used for mortar the curing shall be extended by one week at Contractors expenses. Exposed Brick Work Where exposed brick work is specified, the usual specification for ‘Brick work’ as mentioned above will be applicable for ‘Exposed Brick work’, but in addition a special selected brick shall be used for facing, ensuring regular and clean faces of uniform colour. No bricks which are broken, chipped, wrinkled or which have irregular edges or comers shall be used. Depending on the quality of bricks and if instructed by the Architect / Employer exposed faces of every brick shall be rubbed before laying with extra charge. Wooden fillets 10 mm thick and 10 mm wide shall be placed at the edge of joints so that the mortar comes on the surface of the bricks and regular thickness of joint is maintained. The surface shall be rubbed down brushed if necessary, and thoroughly washed. No mortar shall be allowed to stick to the surface, which shall be left clean to the Architect / Employer’s satisfaction with all joints even and true to straight line. Double scaffolding shall be used for exposed brick work. Half Brick Work Half brick thick and brick on edge walls, shall be provided with 20 swg. wire netting reinforcement. For half brick thick wall and brick on edge wall, wire netting shall be provided in every third course and in alternate course, respectively, according to standard practice, with galvanized staples. Wire netting for the purpose shall be 40 mm mesh made of 20 swg. black soft iron wire. Rates to Include Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the rates for items of brick work shall be include for the following :-

a) All labour, materials, use of tools, equipment and other items incidental to the satisfactory completion of brick masonry at all heights and levels with all leads and lifts.

b) Erecting and removing of all scaffolding, ladders and plant required for the execution of the work to the height and depth and shapes as shown on the plan Architect / Employer and maintaining the scaffolding till the surface finishing work are completed, including the extra labour and materials for using cut bricks in the construction of


9

wall of varying thickness other than one brick, one and half bricks, half brick and brick on edge walls, as per drawings and inclusive of all necessary bye work.

c) Constructing brick work through to lines, levels, batters, pillars, curve projection, cutting, tooting, etc. in strict conformity with the drawings and to any potion or shape, to any heights or levels, including racking out joints and housing frames, fixtures, etc. and of all materials.

d) Curing brick work at all heights, depths and levels. e) Extra labour, materials and bye work for bending brick work to R.C. work as specified. f) Removing of all stains and adhering mortar lumps on the brick work surface. g) Cost of reinforcement in half brick walls and brick on edge walls. h) Raking out joints for receiving plaster as specified. i) Providing forming and or cutting grooves, chases, channel holes / openings for Electrical, Air-conditioning,

plumbing and drainage work wherever required, even though they may not be shown in the drawing, including mending the damages to the required finish of the adjoining surface after completion of the above mentioned work including scaffolding, additional shuttering, providing additional reinforcement/fixtures welding in position plastering, curing etc. as directed and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect / Employer.

Measurements

a) Hall brick thick and brick on edge walls shall be measured in sqm. Unless otherwise mentioned. b) One brick wall and thicker walls shall be measured cum brick walls upto and including 3 brick in thickness should

be measured in multiples of half bricks which shall be deemed to be inclusive of mortar joints. Width more than three bricks in walls will be measured actually and limited to the width specified.

c) No deduction of addition shall be made on any account for :- i) Ends of dissimilar materials (i.e. joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders, rafters purloins, trusses, corbels, steps, etc.) upto 500 sq.m. in section.

d) For details of measurements not mentioned elsewhere in the contact, the method of measurement should be as per relevant I.S. code.

2.3.2. PLASTERING (Internal & External) Preparation of surface The walls to be plastered shall have all joints raked out to a depth of 10 mm. If not already done, R.C.C. surface shall be properly backed to get good key to the plaster. All dust and oily and extraneous matter, if any, shall be wire brushed and cleaned and the surface to be plastered shall be kept wet for 6 hours before plastering is commenced. Proportion of Mortar Unless otherwise mentioned, the proportion for walls, lintels and column plaster shall be done with cement mortar consisting of one part cement and six parts of sand by volume. In the case of ceiling, ceiling beams, projected slabs, sills, chajja, marquise domes etc. the mortar should be mixed in the proportion 1:4 ( 1 part cement and 4 parts sand) and shall be as per I.S. 1542-1960 as applicable to wall and ceiling plastering. Rough cast plaster shall consist of two coats – under layer of 1:5. Cement plaster and top layer of 1:3 no more cement mortar shall be prepared than can be used within half an hours. Application of Plaster The mortar shall be applied evenly with force on the surface to be plastered. The cement plaster finished rough with sponge mortar surface shall be finished at once by being rubbed over with a trowel till the cement appears on the surface. All comers, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical and horizontal as the case may be and carefully and neatly finished. Rounding off comers and junctions, where required shall be done without extra charge. The mortar shall adhere to the surface intimately when set and there should be no hollow sound when struck. The thickness of plaster shall be minimum of 12 mm. Over the proudest part of the surface, of interior brick wall and R.C.C. surface and 19 mm over stone walls and for external brick walls, plaster for ceiling, project slab, walls, chajja, marquis, domes, exposed surface of beam, etc. it shall be 6 mm thick.

a) When neat cement finish is specified over the plaster surface, a coat of pure Portland cement slurry, 13 mm thick shall be applied and well rubbed to the plastered surface while the plaster surface is till fresh. Top layer for rough cast plaster shall be of 6 mm thickness and of cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) finished rough with sponge.

b) When no finish is specified, the plastered surface shall rub in well to an even plain with a wooded float for external surface and finished smooth with a steel trowel for internal surface.


10

c) When thickness of the plaster is more than 12 mm thick the surface will be plastered in two operation. For rough cast plaster, 18 mm thick shall consist of two coats under layer 12 mm thick and top layer 6 mm thick and finished rough.

Scaffolding Scaffolding shall be rigidly tied and strong and stout to cater the safety requirements and shall be double or single according to requirements. Rates to include Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in the contact rates for the item of plaster shall include for the following :

i) Erecting, strong and stout, double or single scaffolding including maintaining the same, dismantling and removing the scaffolding.

ii) Preparing the surface to receive the plaster. iii) Providing cement plaster with screened sand, of the specified average thickness to the required finish,

line and level, at all heights, with all lead and lift and adopting all safety measures. iv) All labour, materials, use of tools, consumables and equipment required to complete the plastering as

per specification. v) Curing for seven days. vi) Any moulding work if shown on the drawing or as specified unless separately provided in the tender. vii) Labour for plastering the surface in two operations when thickness of plaster is more than 12 mm thick. viii) Plaster work in bends, jambs, sills, crises, rounded angles, fair edges, narrow returns, quarks, ‘V’ joints

splays, drip mouldings, making good to metal frame, junctions with skirting or dados, narrow openings, holes, conduits, timber, sills, holes, sill brackets, railings, etc. and making good all damages after all the sub-contractors or nominated sub-contractors have done their work.

ix) Neat cement finish when specified in the item. Mode of Measurement Plaster shall be measured in square meter. 2.4. STONE WORKS: This item relates to the requirements of furnishing materials and installation of Stone Tile work. The types of work that are mainly intended under this head are Marble / Granite stone flooring, Skirting, Counter top, wall facing etc. Reference to Standard specifications IS: 1805 - Glossary of terms relating to stone, quarrying and dressing. IS: 1129 - Dressing of Natural Building Stone IS: 1143 - Laying and finishing of natural Building stones. IS: 113 0 - Marble (Blocks, slabs and tiles) 2.4.1. General 1. Stone shall be in the colors, types, sizes, finishes, and thickness and the Manufacturers as shown by the drawings and

specified herein, or an approved 2. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specifications stone shall have a polished finish, on all exposed surfaces; concealed

surfaces may be sawn. 3. Visual : All examinations, selections and approvals shall be for the purpose of achieving a final appearance of Stone with

greatest possible uniformity and will be based upon the following criteria. 4. All Stone shall be of sound stock and uniform texture and shall be free from holes, seams, shakes, clay pockets, spills, stains,

starts and other defects which would impair the strength, durability and appearance of the work, as determined by the Designer. 5. Inherent variations characteristic of the Stone and the quarry from which the Stone is to be obtained shall be brought to the

attention of the Designer at the time the samples are submitted for approval and shall be subject to approval of the Designer. Stone provided at time of installation shall be of same quarry, colour, veining and other characteristics as that approved by Designer.

6. All Stone shall be selected for background colour, veining, marking and matching shall run in even shades and shall be set accordingly.

7. All engineering calculations and design shall be based on the mechanical and physical properties of the selected Stone.


11

Accessory Materials for Stonework 1. Mortar materials shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer for each Stone type, size and application. Mortar colour shall be

as selected by Designer. 2. For colour pointing mortar, furnish matching Stone ground down to meet grading requirements for sand. Stone Support 1. Manufacturer and General : Where required, Stone support systems, anchors and accessories shall be manufactured by a company specializing in the design and fabrication of Stone approved by the Designer. Provide all fastening devices, support angles, relieving angles, anchors, coping anchors, dowels, cramps, bolts, nut, shims, expansion shields, flashing etc., necessary to properly secure Stone to the structure as required. 2. Fabrication: Stone shall be accurately cut to sizes, shapes, profiles and dimensions. There shall be no deviation from jointing. Exposed surfaces and edges of Stone units shall be free from cracks, broken corners, chipped arises, scratches or other defects affecting appearance. Patching or filling not permitted. Cut Stone units full and true on faces, reveals, beds, joint and top, to the full dimensions required by drawings. All edges shall be straight and true with sharp and true arises. All Stone shall fit together accurately. Make faces of Stone Units in same plane flush at joints. All finished surfaces shall be true in line and face. Sawn surfaces and edges shall be cleaned of all rust stains and iron particles. No patching or use of Stone with chipped edges or faces shall be permitted. Provide holes and sinkages required for anchors, dowels, other devices required to support and/or suspend Stone, and to accommodate other items which connect to or penetrate the Stone. Include all cutting, drilling and fitting of Stonework required to accommodate the work of other trades. In cutting and fitting carefully cut and grind edges to a neat tight fit. Do cutting in such a manner so as not to in pair strength or appearance of Stone. Use physical templates for all cutting and drilling; obtain required templates from proper trades. Inspection: 1. Contractor to advise requirements relating to his placement of any inserts which are to be used for anchoring and supporting

stonework. Installation: Laying and polishing The tiles shall be machine cut to specified sizes and shall be of approved colour and quality. They shall be of specified thickness and laid to patterns as directed. The floor surface to be tiled shall be thoroughly brushed and scrubbed and profusely watered and cleaned. Mortar for bedding shall be as specified and shall be no less than -3/4" (20 mm) thick. Immediately each stones is laid it shall be tapped with a wooden mallet and set joints shall be not more than 1mm thick. The floor shall be perfectly even with no depressions or mounds as per levels indicated and joints shall be in line. Joints shall be grouted with cement mortar of matching colour with the tiles. The tiled surface shall be kept wet and allowed to set: for. 14 days No movement of personnel be allowed over newly set tiles for at least 3 days.


12

After the work has set, the surface shall be machine polished to be satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge/consultant’s representative. The final polish shall be with Oxalic Acid. All skirting shall have be 100mm ht. with champhered edge of 8mm x 8mm Erection Tolerances: The work shall be designed to accommodate all permitted tolerances and anticipated dead and live load movement, creep, sway and torsion of the structure without any harmful effects. Patching or hiding defects in Stone will not be permitted. Clean Stone before setting as recommended by Stone Manufacturer. Follow all Manufacturer directions during installation. Connections: a) Anti-galvanized Action: Isolate dissimilar metal surfaces to prevent galvanic action. b) Metal-to-metal contact: Separate metal surfaces in such a manner that metal does not move on metal. Materials used for

this purpose shall be low friction components, sealants or gaskets Setting Stone: i) Mortar and grout shall be as recommended by Stone Manufacturer for size, weight, location and use of Stone Colour as

selected by Designer. ii) Mixing : a) Mix mortar for setting Stone on anchor plates and for spotting back of Stone. Mix approved non-shrinking cement for filing

of anchor holes in accordance with Manufacturer’s directions. b) Mix mortar in small batches to make a stiff plastic mass; mix until thoroughly homogenous; retempering with water is

prohibited. iii) Set Stone in accordance with drawings and final shop drawings for Stonework. Provide anchors, supports, fasteners and

other attachments shown or necessary to secure stonework in place. Shim and adjust accessories as required for proper setting of Stone. Completely fill holes, slots and other sinkages for anchors, dowels, fasteners and supports with non-shrink grout during setting of Stones.

iv) Maintain even joints between units, 1mm maximum unless noted otherwise on drawings. v) Grout joints full and flush with face of Stone. Where metal inset strips are indicated, butt Stone flush and tight against strips

with no gaps exceeding 0.8mm. vi) Cleaning: After final cleaning of Stone, repoint any open joints with grout. Repair and Cleaning (After Erection): i) Remove and replace Stone units which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged. Where directed, remove and

replace units which do not match adjoining stonework. Patching or hiding defects in stonework will not be permitted. Provide new matching units, install as specified and reseal joints to eliminate evidence of replacement. Reseal defective and unsatisfactory joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance.

ii) Clean vertical stonework after completion of work, using clean water and stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers.

Material : Size, shade and colour of marble slabs/tiles shall be approved by bank / consultants before starting of the work. Workmanship : Marble slab / tiles shall be laid on a bed of cement mortar.The proportion of cement mortar shall be one part of white cement,and 6 parts of sand thickness of mortar bedding shall not be less than12 mm and shall not be more than 25 mm.Marble slabs / tiles shall be covered with white cement / snowcem paint and placed over mortar bed and tapped gently till it is firmly and properly bedded.There


13

should be no hollows left.The edges of tile shall be cut to have “V” shape groove at the joint.the cut edges shall be ground smooth.The joint shall not be more than 2 mm. The joints should run true and parallel.The floor should be cured for one week. Slabs / tiles laid adjoining the wall shall project 12 mm under the plaster/dado/skirting. Skirting: The masonry surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted. Thereafter it shall be evenly and uniformly covered with 12-mmthick 1:2 cement mortar. The back of each tiles shall be covered with tile adhesive cement and then the tile shall be fixed as per manufacture instructions. The joint shall be fixed with tile joint filling coloured cement specially manufactured for the purpose. Workmanship and Measurement: Workmanship and method of measurement shall be same,as that of marble except gray cement shall be used in place of white cement. The joints shall be filled with coloured joint filling cement compound specially manufactured for the purpose. 2.4.2. Marble/Granite Flooring Providing and laying Flooring with machine cut machine polished Italian Marble slabs (19mm thick) of approved sample, of size as per drawings, in approved pattern, as per the Drawings provided by the Architect, on an average bed of 35mm thick cement mortar 1:6, with neat white cement float, grouting joints with white cement paste with pigmented additives matching the shade of the stone, inclusive of surface preparation, machine mirror polishing, protecting the floor with POP as mentioned in the notes above, chemical treatment AQUA SEALANT on marble surface etc. complete. Cost of Italian Marble to be Rs. 4500/- per Sqm with all taxes, loading unloading & landed cost at site. Providing and cladding in proper line and level, 19mm thick machine cut machine pre-polished Italian Marble for Skirting of approved sample in pattern as per the drawing on white cement paste with a backing coat of cement mortar 1:3, not less than 12mm thick, grouting joints with neat white cement paste with pigmented additives to match shade of the marble, hand buffing, cleaning, skirting to be fixed flush with finished surface of wall in line and level and 6mm wide groove to be made in wall at the junction of Marble and finished surface of wall. Cost of Italian Marble Rs.4500/Sqm with all taxes, loading unloading & landed cost at site. Providing and laying Flooring with machine cut machine pre-polished Granite stone slabs (19mm thick) of approved sample, of size as per drawings, in approved pattern, as per the Drawings provided by the Architect, on an average bed of 35mm thick cement mortar 1:4, with neat cement float, grouting joints with cement paste with pigmented additives matching the shade of the stone, inclusive of surface preparation, protecting the floor with POP as mentioned in the notes above etc. complete. Cost of Pre Polished Granite stone to be Rs. 1250/- per Sqm with all taxes, loading unloading & landed cost at site. 2.4.3. Wall panel: Providing and cladding on walls machine cut and machine pre-polished Italian Marble slab 19mm thick of size as per drawings set on 6mm thick bed of White Star (polymer modified cementitious adhesive) as manufactured by BAL industries or equivalent, including pointing with matching Epoxy grouts from BAL/Latecrete or equivalent make to match the shade of the slab. The rate should also be inclusive of applying temporary supports to the cladded stone as directed by the Architect at site. Cost to be inclusive of hand buffing/cleaning on surface, chemical treatment AQUA SEALANT on marble surface etc complete as per directions. Cost of Italian Marble Rs. 9000/Sqm with all taxes, loading unloading & landed cost at site. Providing and cladding on walls in proper line and level machine cut machine pre-polished Granite 19mm thick using Gold Star (polymer modified cementations adhesive) as manufactured by BAL Industries. The rate should be inclusive of grouting the joints with approved Epoxy additives from BAL Industries to match shade of the marble, curing, cleaning, surface preparation. The stone shall be free from any cracks / deformities / damages. The rate should also be inclusive of applying temporary supports to the cladded stone as directed by the Architect at site. Cost to be inclusive of hand buffing/cleaning on surface etc complete as per directions. Cost of Granite Rs.1250/Sqm with all taxes, loading unloading & landed cost at site. 2.5. ARTIFICIAL STONE FLOORING Preparation of Sub-grade


14

The surface of the structural slab shall be struck of reasonably true and at level 40 mm or as specified below the level of finished floor. All water, latencies or dirt on the surface of the structural slab shall be removed before the base course is laid. The slope required should be provided in the concrete of the structural slab as far as possible or the base course in order to obtain uniform thickness of artificial stone towards the predetermined positions of outlets. Unless otherwise mentioned in the drawing slopes to the extent of 1 in 120 for office space and 1 in 60 to 80 for toilets and bathroom ,verandah and kitchen shall be provided. Base course The mix for the base of the artificial stone shall be 1 part of Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and 4 parts of coarse aggregate by volume. The stone ships for the base course should be 6 mm and down and should be properly screened and washed before use. This nominal mix may be slightly varied, depending upon local conditions and mark of concrete as the Architect / Employer may direct. No more than 27, ½ litres (5.1/2 gallons) of mixing water, including the moisture in the aggregate, shall be used for each bag of Portland cement in the mixture. The concrete shall be of the driest constancy possible to work with sowing motion of the strike-off board or straight edge. Changes in consistency shall be obtained by adjusting the proportions of aggregate and cement. In case should the specified amount of water exceed, the base course shall have a maximum thickness of 16 mm and 28 mm for 25 mm and 40 mm finished flooring, respectively. The base course shall be laid as per I.S. 2571-1970. Sectors Artificial stone flooring shall be laid in sections not exceeding 4 sqm with a maximum length of 2.5 M, in squares of rectangles, flooring of the panels dying diagonally shall be completed first. The edges of the 50 mm wide oiled wooden batten of the finished floor thickness. Immediately before the placing of the concrete the sub-base will be given a coat of neat cement grouting. Top Layer After striking off the base course to the required slopes, it shall be compacted with a wooden float. The surface shall be tested with straight edges to detect high and low spots which shall be rectified before the concrete of the base course has hardened. Top layer having sufficient skin thickness for polishing (Not less than finished thickness of 6 mm) shall be laid when the base course is still green but firm enough to receive the top layer. The mix for this course shall be 1 part of Portland cement and 2 parts of 3 mm and down, cleaned and washed, fine stone chips. The concrete shall be of dry consistency as possible. The top layer shall be laid as per I.S. 2571-1970. This top coat of the wearing coat should then be thoroughly worked so that slurry water just comes to the surface. This should then be allowed to dry out. No dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be sprinkled directly on the surface to absorb moisture or hasten the hardening. When the water dries the whole surface should be rubbed smooth using English trowel with neat cement punning of sufficient thickness (not below 3 mm) using not less than 2.2 kg of cement per square meter area of flooring for allowing of being cut down with polishing stone and then rubbed with fine cloth (polishing cloth preferable) and the whole think left undisturbed for 10 to 12 hours. After this period a minimum period of 14 days. When working on alternate day principle, the pounding of flooring should be deferred till the whole floor is complete. But the portions already completed should be occasionally damped with water, moist sand spread over the surface, till the whole floor is complete. After this the whole floor will be flooded with water, etc. For coloured finish a suitable colour admixture shall be added on top of cement finishing coat. The quality of colouring matter to be added to cement should be in the proportion of one part of pigment to 3 parts of Portland cement mixed thoroughly and screened before making a paste. The pigment shall be of approved manufactured and tints shall be uniform. Any cracks, rust disfiguration or discolouring of surface shall have to be made good without any extra charges, to the satisfaction of the Architect / Employer. In every case of artificial stone flooring and skirting the Contractor should quote the rates considering for allowances in the top layer being cut down with polishing stone (after polishing to the specified thickness as in thew schedule of quantities, have been reached) no matter whether polishing is done by the Contractor of not. The polishing shall be done by expert trained labourers only. When desired, all internal angles are to be covered without any extra cost. The polishing shall not be done before proper maturing, which takes about 2 months. Polishing shall be done by wet rubbing down with three approved grades of carborandum and pumic stone. When the floor is perfectly smooth, even and dry it will be rubbed with fine lines or chamois leather after applying wax polish on the surface. Rate to include


15

Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract the rates quoted for ‘Artificial stone flooring’ shall include the following:

• Preparing/treating the sub-base course of bearing structural slab surface to the required

• line, level and slopes.

• All labour, materials and equipment, consumables, cleaning the sub-grade, laying base

• course and top layer to have finished 40 mm thick flooring or specified thickness and

• configuration (after the high polishing) as per above specifications and all dye work for

• achieving the required surface finish.

• Curing

• High polishing

• Cleaning the floor from all stains etc.

• Forming curves at junctions of walls and rounding or noising at the edges including cutting and or making holes or openings, wherever required and neatly finishing with adjoining surface finish.

• Work at all positions, heights, depths, line and level with all lead and lift. Mode of Measurement The measurement shall be in square meters for the actual flooring provided. 2.6. DISTEMPERING: PROVIDING DRY DISTEMPER: a) Material: The powered dry distemper shall be approved colour shade manufacture by M/s. Blundel Eomite or other equivalent & approved manufacturers. b) Scaffolding: This shall strong & stout rigidly tied catering to the safety needs & shall be double or single as required and / or directed. c) Preparing the surface: The surface to be distempered shall be cleaned & all cracks, holes & surface defects shall be repaired with gypsum & allowed to set hard. All irregularities shall be sand papered smooth & wipped clean. The surface so prepared must completely dry & free from dust before distempering is commenced. In the case of walls newly plastered surface special care shall be taken to see that it is completely dry before any treatment is attempted. For the old surface which had earlier been distempered, the surface shall be cleaned of grease, dust etc. The flakings of previous coating, if any, shall be taken off. All cracks holes & surface defects shall be taken off. All cracks, holes & surface defects shall be repaired with gypsum & allowed to set hard & then sand prepared & wipped clean. But in case the surface are coloured or white washed the wash must be removed thoroughly first d) Priming Coat: The priming coat shall be applied over the complete dry surface in the manner recommended by the makers in the case of patent distemper. When no priming coat is specified by the manufacturer, a finely powdered chalk mixed with a thin solution of glue shall be applied to prepare a good hard background the coating when dry being sand papered as close & smooth as possible. e) Application of Distemper: The instruction of the makers shall be followed regarding the preparation of the surface & application of priming & finishing coats. Distemper shall not be mixed in a larger quantity than is actually required for a day’s work. Hot water should be used to prepare the mixture. Distempers shall be applied in dry weather with broad stiff brush in long parallel strokes & to be finished with spongy roller. The treated surface shall be allowed to dry & harden. Second or succeeding coats shall not be applied until the preceding coat has been passed by the Employer/Architect. Two more coats of distemper shall be given in exactly the same manner as the first one but only after the earlier coat laid has thoroughly dried. The meaning of one coat shall be as described for white washing. f) Rates to be included: The rates include all labourer, materials equipment & tools for carrying out the following operations:

i) Providing the primer & distemper & mixing the distemper. ii) Scaffolding. iii) Preparing the surface to receive the priming & finishing coats. iv) Applying the priming coats.


16

v) Applying the distemper in 3 coats minimum to the required finish, line & level at all heights with all lead & lift adopting all safety measures. If a proper even surface is not obtained to the satisfaction of the Employer/Architect in 3 coats, contractor shall carry out additional coats of distemper to approval, at contractor’s expense.

vi) Cleaning the floor, doors & windows of droppings & splashes. g) Mode of Measurements: Similar to that for whiter washing. OIL BOUND DISTEMPERS / ACRYLIC DISTEMPER (INTERIOR) The specifications & conditions for this shall be the same as that applicable for dry distemper, above, except that oil bound distemper of approved make, shade & colour shall be used after applying priming coat of petrifying liquid/water based liquid as per manufacturer’s specifications or other primer as may be recommended by the manufacturers of distemper or as directed. 2.7. PAINTING a) Materials: Synthetic enamel paints & primers, in general shall be of approved quality, colour & of approved manufacturer. These materials shall be in sealed tins & shall be opened in the presence of the Employer/Architect at site. b) Preparation of Surface:

i) Iron and Steel works: Surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, sand prepared &/or rubbed with emery cloth, if necessary, to remove grease, mortar or any other foreign materials. In case of rusted surface, it shall be first cleaned with wire brushes till the corroded rust is removed. The prepared surface shall be shinny & free from brush marks, patches, blisters & other irregularities. The surface thus finished shall be got approved for painting.

ii) Wood work: All surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned sand papered & removed of all foreign materials. The knotting materials shall consist of pure shellac dissolved in methylated spirit. Stopping materials shall consist of putty. The surface thus treated shall be allowed to dry & then sand papered smooth (For veneered surface a surface film of French chalk/primer and whiting shall be provided to give a smooth surface prior to application of primer.

c) Application: After preparing the surface, a primer coat shall be applied. The primer coat shall be ready mixed of approved make & manufacturer. After the primer coat is applied & perfectly dried, all holes, Cracks, etc. is still remains, shall be filled in with putty & the surface sand papered smooth with putty as described above. Then a second coat of paint of approved shade & manufacturer shall be evenly applied & allowed to dry. The third coat shall be carefully applied to achieve smooth & even surface after the previous coat has dried up. Minimum 3 coats of paint shall be applied inclusive of a primer coat. If a proper & even surface is not obtained to the satisfaction of the Employer/Architect in 3 coats, contractor shall carry out additional coats of painting to approval, at contractor’s expenses. Care shall be taken that dust or other foreign materials do not settle or disfigure the various coats. d) Rates to include: Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract the rates for the item of painting shall include for the following :

i) All labour, materials, consumables & equipment necessary to carry out the work. ii) Supplying the approved paint for priming & finishing coats. iii) Preparing the surface including knotting & stopping for receiving the priming & finishing coats. iv) Providing strong & stout, catering to safety needs (wherever required), single or doubt scaffolding including is erection

& dismantling. v) Application of one primer coat & two coats of finishing, minimum to the required finish line & level at all heights with all

lead & lift & adopting all safety measure. If a proper & even surface is not obtained to the satisfaction of the Employer/Consultants in 3 coats, the contractor shall carry out additional coats of painting to approval at contractor’s expenses.

vi) Protection ot painted surface till dried & handed over. Before French polish is applied, the surface of wood works shall be prepared in the same manner as for painting. The wood to be polished should be first painted with a filter composed of 1 part of whiting mixed with 0.58 part of methylated spirit. After drying, it should be finely send papered.


17

On the woodwork thus treated a thin coat of French polish shall be applied & allowed to dry. After drying the surface shall be lightly rubbed with a fine sand paper prior to the second & the third coats. The French polishing should be finished in such a way, so that the natural grain lines of wood are visible. The surface hall show an even polished surfaced & be approved by the Employer/Architect.

i) Rates to Include: Similar to that of painting. ii) Mode of Measurement: Similar to that of painting.

POLYMERISED TEXTURED PAINTING: Protective and decorative texture d exterior high class matt finish, composed of special Thermoplastic resin containing fine crystalline additives derived from Granite as per direction of Employer/Consultant to be applied over a coat of cement based paint. The rate includes cost of cement based paint required for new cement plastered surface. Note: Texture to be as specified by Employer/Architect. The rate is inclusive of all materials, chemicals and labours for all above item of specified work but exclusive cost of the plastered work if any. EXTERIOR GRADE ACRYLIC EMULSION: Surface shall be prepared as per specification for cement paint. Primer shall be one coat of approved primer or cement based paint as specified. Finishing shall be in two coats of exterior grade acrylic emulsion as per the manufacturer’s specification (shade and brand to be specified by Employer/Architect). Application of finish coats shall be one dry surface. Rates to include all items as same as for cement paint. Mode of measurement shall also be the same. 2.8. POP punning: Rendering plastered surface of walls and ceilings with plaster of paris. Approved quality of plaster of paris shall be mixed with clean salt-free water to prepare a consistent paste. The paste shall be applied on wet surface with a trowel on steel plate and smoothened. Coat shall not be less than 12mm-13mm thick with additional thickness as required togive an even surface. After drying the surface shall be rubbed down with rough cloth.


18

SECTION III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: RELATED ELECTRICAL WORKS

3.1. SCOPE This specification covers supply of materials, fabrication, and erection, testing and commissioning of Electrical Switch boards, wiring system, light fittings and other associated items required for successful completion of the work. Any equipment, device, component or work not specifically mentioned in this specification but considered essential for proper design and operation shall be included by the tenderer in his offer. Applicable provisions and conditions of contract shall govern the work under the Section. 3.2. GENERAL The power supply system in the building & retail outlet stations shall be made available at 415/240 Volts, 50 Hz., A.C. 3 phase 4 wire, earthed neutral from local Electric Supply Authority. All supply and installation work shall be carried out as per specification and in accordance with the construction drawings and shall conform to requirements called for in the Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with its latest amendment, Indian Electricity Acts and all relevant codes and practices issued by the Bureau of Indian Standard as amended up-to-date. The work shall also comply with the provisions of the general or local set of legislatures and regulations of any local or other statutory authority which may be applicable. The Contractor for electrical work must possess valid Electrical contractor's License endorsed by the Licensing Board, Directorate of Electricity of concerned State Government for the type of work he shall execute. The work to be provided for by the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall include but not limited to the following :

i: Furnish all labour, supervision, services, materials, supports, scaffolds, construction equipment, tools, plants and transportation etc required for the proper execution of the job as per drawings, specification and schedule of items and get all necessary tests on materials and work conducted at their cost.

ii: Not withstanding the electrical layout shown in the drawing, the contractor shall obtain further approval of the layout at site from the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge before commencement of the work.

iii: Furnish samples of materials on display board at site for approval including arranging necessary tests on samples, as directed by the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge in an approved Laboratory.

iv: To extend facilities to the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge to inspect work and assist them to obtain samples, if they so desire.

v: Furnish general arrangement drawings of the switchboard and other fabrication items, which the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge may direct for their approval.

vi: To employ a full time experienced supervisor having electrical supervisor's certificate of competency endorsed by the

Licensing Board, Directorate of Electricity of concerned State to supervise the work. The Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge have the right to stop the work if the contractor's supervisor is not present when the work is being carried out.

vii: To keep the appropriate Electrical Inspector & supply authority be informed from time to time as per the execution

programme of the work shall be the responsibility of the contractor and he shall be responsible to ensuring that all work passes their approval.

viii: To provide all incidental items not shown or specified in particular but necessary for proper execution of works in

accordance with the drawing, specification and schedule of items. ix: To maintain the work and keep them maintained till handed over to the owner in proper working condition. x: Co-ordinate with all agencies including those engaged by the owner for proper execution of the job.


19

3.3. MATERIALS Materials shall be of the approved make & quality. A list of materials of approved brand and manufacturer is indicated in the annexure. If the list of materials mentioned above stipulates two or more or alternative brands/makes of any product, the decision as to which brand/make shall be used in the work shall be taken by the Consultant/ Employer and the contractor shall provide the brand/make so selected without any extra cost. In case, materials are required to be obtained from any manufacturer other than those listed on account of non-availability then prior approval from Consultant will be necessary, supported by relevant test certificates qualifying the required standard. Further tests as directed by the Consultant shall also be carried out by the contractor at their own cost, if required. Contractor shall obtain approval from the Consultant/ Employer of sample of all materials before placing order and the approved sample shall be carefully preserved on the display board in an appropriate manner at the site office for verification by the Consultant/ Employer. For standard bought out items, the sizes manufactured by the firms listed shall prevail when there is discrepancy in the sizes mentioned in the schedule without any financial adjustment. 3.4. SPECIFICATIONS Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, all applicable codes and standards published by the Bureau of Indian Standard and all other such publication as may be published by them after construction work starts, shall govern in respect of design, workmanship, quality and properties of material and method of testing. 4.5. SAFETY 5.1 All equipment shall be complete with approved safety devices wherever a potential hazard to personnel exists and with provision for safe access of personnel to and around equipment for operation and maintenance functions. 5.2 Special care shall be taken to ensure against entry of rats, lizards and other creeping reptiles which may create electrical short circuit inside live equipment. 3.6. DRAWINGS On completion of all work the contractor shall furnish three copies of Ammonia print along with the original tracing of the following “As built” drawings to the Consultant without any extra cost. I: Wiring diagram for final power / lighting distribution system showing the rating/ size of switchgear, cables, conduits, lighting fixtures and all accessories for individual installation. ii Detailed general arrangement drawings of the switchboard complete with dimension in metric units. iii Drawings showing the route of conduits and cables with sizes, lengths, sources and destination of all cables with the circuit designation number, etc. iv Drawings showing the balancing of phases with connected load in each circuits, etc. 3.7. TEST CERTIFICATES AND INSTRUCTIONS Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, the contractor shall furnish, in duplicate, Manufacturer's Test Certificate with the delivery of the equipment to the Consultant and Instruction Manual in English for operations and maintenance of equipment wherever required. 4.8. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING


20

Before each field test, the contractor shall obtain the permission from the site engineer and all tests shall be conducted in the presence of duly authorised representative. Records of each test shall be prepared immediately after the test and this record shall be signed by contractor's representative conducting the test and the site engineer attending the test. Copies of their record in quadruplicate shall be handed over to the Consultant/ Engineer-in-Charge. A certificate in quadruplicate shall be furnished by the contractor countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out and the owner's site engineer. This certificate shall be in the prescribed forms in addition to the test certificate required by the Local Electric Supply Authorities. Recommended completion certificate’s Format is given in Appendix 'A'. 3.9. COMPLETION OF WORK Each item of the electrical work shall be considered as complete in all respects only after obtaining permanent service connection from local power supply authority, energising, testing and final commissioning of the complete installation as directed by the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge. Payment on each item of electrical work shall be made as per measurement and proportionate to the quantum of work completed. In the event of any dispute with regard to the proportion of work complete, the decision of the Consultant/ Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and binding to the contractor. 3.10. PREAMBLE TO THE SCHEDULE OF WORK The successful tenderer shall carefully go through the Clauses of Invitation to Tender, Specification, Schedule of Work and drawings and shall include in his rates any sum he may consider necessary to cover the fulfillment of the various clauses contained therein. Unit prices stated in the schedule of work against the item of work shall be inclusive of all installation, accessories and consumables necessary to complete the said work within the contemplation of the contract. Beyond the unit prices no extra amount will be paid for incidental contingent work and materials. The quantities mentioned in the schedule of work are probable quantities and it must be clearly understood that the contract is not a lump sum contract, that the probable quantities, the value of the entire tender are only indicative and Employer does not in any way assure the tenderer or guarantee that the actual quantity of work would correspond to the probable quantities in the tender. No change in unit rate will be admissible on any variation of quantity. 3.11. PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WIRING SYSTEM 1. SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers supply of materials, erection and commissioning of distribution wiring, connection to distribution boards, cable laying, earthing and miscellaneous items. Applicable provisions and conditions of contract shall govern the work under the section. 2. GENERAL 2.1 Work to be provided for by the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall include but not be limited to the following: i: Furnishing of labour, materials, supports, scaffolds, transportation, etc required for the work. ii: To provide all incidental items not shown or specified in particular but reasonably be implied or necessary for successful completion of the work in connection with the drawings, specification and schedule of items. iii: To provide all supervision for proper execution of the work. iv: To conduct and bear all costs in respect of any test advised.


21

2.2 After completion of supply and installation of wiring system and earthing, if any defect in the material or workmanship is found by the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge, the contractor shall remove the same and supply better and approved materials at his own cost. 2.3 All precaution against theft and fire shall also be taken by the contractor. 3. MATERIALS 3.1 All materials used in the work shall be ISI approved quality and in its absence conforming to the IS Specification. 4 . WIRING SYSTEM 4.1 The electric load of all lights, power outlets, etc. shall be balanced across the three phases. 4.2 Generally the final loading of any sub-circuit for lights and fans shall not exceed 800 watts and shall not be connected to more than total 10 fans, lights, socket outlets, etc. Bell push if operated at low voltage shall be fed from a separate circuit of distribution board. 4.3 The 16 Amps sub-circuit for power shall be connected to a maximum one 16 Amp. socket outlet or two 6 Amp. socket outlets. 4.4 A power circuit shall always be originating from a distribution board or MCB DB and the same shall run in a separate con-duit. 4.5 The point wiring shall mean wiring from one way of distribution board to point of utilisation of electricity i.e. where the load is applied and this shall include complete wiring from distribution board, supply and fixing of switch board, controlling switches, ceiling rose, batten holder and socket outlet, etc. unless otherwise stated in the drawing or the specification. 4.6 Insulated or covered earthing conductors where used, shall have green insulation braiding or covering as appropriate. Under no circumstances shall the colour green be used for other than earthing conductor. In addition where it is required, cables of different colours be used. For identification purposes the following system shall be employed :

Red or any colour (other than black or green) For phase or switch wire

Black For Neutral

Green For earth

4.7 Unless otherwise mentioned in the schedule of quantities, single way porcelain/ bakelite terminal connectors with nickel plated brass inserts and screws to suit the conductor size shall be used for intermediate wiring/ joints in junction boxes and in switch boards or by any other method approved by the Consultant/ Engineer-in-Charge. 4.8 Distribution wiring in conduit to light, fan, plug points etc.shall be done in looping in system. In this system, no joints or connections shall be made anywhere of the system except at terminating points such as, at terminals of switches, ceiling roses, etc. and in case of socket outlets, at the socket terminals. Intermediate wiring joints of neutral wire in junction boxes will not be permitted. 5. CONDUIT WIRING 5 1 All conduit shall be ISI marked and finished with galvanised or stove enamelled surface. All conduit accessories shall be conforming to IS:2667-1988 and be threaded type. Conduit less than 20mm in diameter shall not be used. All conduits shall be 1.4 to 1.8 mm thickness below 32 mm dia. and 1.6 to 2.2 mm thickness for 32 mm dia. and above. 5.2 The conduit for each circuit shall be erected complete with necessary bushes before drawing in of any wire. Galvanised M.S. Spacer of 3 mm thick minimum shall be used between the conduit saddle and fixing surface. The saddle shall be fixed at an interval of not more than 750 mm apart for vertical run and 600 mm apart for horizontal run.


22

5.3 The joint in conduits shall be made by means of threaded couplers and threaded accessories only to ensure electrical continuity throughout. All pipes after cutting, the threading shall be carefully reemed out with special reamer to remove any burr and then painted immediately with an anti-corrosive preservative after removing all traces of oil or grease. Junction boxes shall be provided with gasketed covers to render them dust and damp proof. The conduit accessories having pull outlet for conductors shall only be used in all conduit installation. 5.4 Where specified, P.V.C. conduit conforming to IS: 7537 (Part-III) shall be used. The thickness of P.V.C.conduit shall be adequate to withstand mechanical injuries. PVC conduit accessories conforming to IS: 3419-1976 shall be used along with P V C conduit. 5.5 The entire conduit system shall be effectively earthed by means of suitable earthing conductors and the resistance from any point to earth shall not be more than one OHM. After installation of conduit pipes and fittings are completed in all respects, the exposed outer surfaces of the conduit and accessories shall be painted with two coats of approved enamel paints or aluminium paint over a coat of red oxide primer as required to match the surrounding wall finishing. To protect against rust the bare thread portion shall be painted with anti-corrosive preservative. 6. CONCEALED WIRING This system of wiring shall comply with all the requirements of surface conduit wiring system specified in Causes 5.1 to 5.6 in addition to the following points: 6.1 Making of chase : The chase in the wall shall be filled up neatly made and be of ample dimensions to permit the conduit to be fixed in the manner desired. In case of buildings under construction, chases shall be provided in the wall, ceiling etc. at the time of their construction and shall be filled up neatly after erection of conduit and brought to the original finish of the wall. Specially for ceiling, conduit shall be laid before casting. 6.2 Fixing of conduit in chase : The conduit in chase in the wall shall be fixed by means of staples or by means of saddles not more than 60 cm apart. Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as practicable and all curves maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with a long radius which will permit easy drawing of PVC insulated wires. All threaded joints of con-duits shall be treated with some approved preservative compound to secure protection against rust. 6.3 Inspection boxes : Suitable inspection boxes shall be provided to permit periodical inspection and to facilitate removal of wires, if necessary. These shall be provided with inspection box covers. 6.4 Types of accessories to be used : All outlets, such as switches, wall sockets, etc. may be either flush mounting type or of surface mounting type. The outlet box shall be mounted flush with the wall. The metal box shall be effectively earthed with conduit by an approved means of earth attachment. 6.5 Fish wire : 1 x 18 SWG G.I. wire inside the conduit and accessories to be provided with an extension of 250 mm at both the conduit ends. 6.6 Conduit laying in floor/ roof slabs before casting : M.S./ G.I./ rigid PVC/ polythene conduit shall be laid straight as far as practicable and properly placed including binding with the steel reinforcement rods with 22 SWG G.I. binding wire so that proper positions of conduits are maintained. While laying the conduits for concealed wiring in the cealing / beams / columns / walls before casting, the contractor shall ensure that both ends of the conduit are plugged by means of dead-end sockets or otherwise to prevent the entry of any foreign material against conduit choking. All precaution must be taken while laying the conduits in the slabs, R.C. walls, columns, etc. and the contractor shall rectify at his own cost, if any defects are found during process of drawing cables through the concealed prelaid conduits.


23

Each M.S. / G.I. conduit shall be provided with protruding length of 150 mm on free end of the conduits with sockets under the bottom level of slab/ beam. Each rigid PVC/ polythene conduit shall be provided with protruding length of 150 mm on free end of the conduits under the bottom level of slab/ beam. There shall be no intermediate joints in one straight run of conduit. All ceiling outlets shall be terminated in a round M.S./ G.I. circular box (80 mm depth minimum)/ deep box to suit standard size ceiling rose or/ and rectangular M.S. junction box or Fan Hook Box as the case may be. It will be mandatory for the contractor to get the layouts approved by the Engineer-in-charge/Consultant, measurements are checked when the conduits are laid and bound to steel reinforcement rods, before he can release the work for casting of slabs/ floor/ beams etc. 6.7 Connector Boxes, Draw-in-Box, Junction Boxes : These shall be constructed from 16 SWG M.S. sheet and have M.S. cover. Minimum size for connector box is 150mm x 100mm and for Draw-in-Box is 100mm x 100mm with required depth upto 80mm. 6.8 Fan Hook Box : These shall be 100mm dia x 80mm depth, constructed from 14 SWG M.S. sheet and provided with one 12 mm dia. M.S. rod of 300mm long having 'U' bend inside the box. 6.9 Painting : Both inside & outside wall of switch board, connection box, draw-in-box and other M.S. accessories shall be painted with two coats of anti-corrosive paint in addition to other painting instructions given elsewhere. 7. WIRES 7.1 Unless otherwise mentioned in the schedule of quantities, only single core PVC insulated / PVC insulated & sheathed cable consisting of multistrand / flexible copper conductor and of approved manufacturers conforming to relevant I.S. shall be used for wiring in conduit system. 7.2 The maximum number of wires drawn in one conduit shall not be greater than the recommended number given in the Table – 1 given in this section.


24

SECTION IV GENERAL SPECIFICATION: FURNISHING WORKS

All interior decoration works shall follow the below mentioned specifications unless otherwise specified. 4.1. All Ply shall be BWR Exterior grade conforming to IS-303 4.2. All Marine Ply shall be conforming to IS-710 4.3. All Block Board shall be Exterior grade conforming to IS-1659 4.5. All Laminate (external) shall be 1.5mm thk conforming to IS-2046 4.6. All Laminate (balancing) shall be 0.8mm thk. conforming to IS-2046 4.7. All Veneer shall be 4mm thk. (one side decorative ply) conforming to IS-1328. All veneer surfaces shall be PU coated. 4.8 Duco paint: Providing and applying Duco Paint of approved make and shade. Rate to include sand papering, cleaning the surface, applying waterproof putty to full surface 3 times, thereafter painting , spraying Duco Paint in 3 coats to complete surface. 4.18. Mild steel: All mild steel to conform to IS 2062 GRADE A/B 4.22. Fabric: As per make list. 4.17. Stainless Steel: All Stainless Steel to conform to SS 316 Grade 4.27. All Powder coating shall be 40-60 micron thick unless otherwise specified. 4.8. All Hardwood for structural framework shall be best quality salwood. Hardwood structural framework shall always be hidden, unexposed and out of view. 4.9. All Wood (TW) shall be best quality teakwood (Central province-CP). All wood (TW) shall be PU coated. 4.10. All hardwood and wood The timber/wood should be free from knots, shakes, fissure, flaws, sub-cracks & other defects. The surface shall be smooth & free from blemishes & discolorations. All fully fabricated timber shall be seasoned and chemically treated. The preparation of timber for joinery is to commence simultaneously with the beginning of the project work generally and should proceed continuously until all the wood work is prepared and fixed / stacked on/near the site as the case may be. All timber for carpentry and joinery shall be treated with wood preservative before fixing. Oil type wood preservative of specified quality and approved make, conforming to IS: 218-1961 shall be used. Generally, it shall be creosote oil type-l or anthracene oil. All hardwood and wood (TW) to be treated with 1 coat of anti-termite coat/paint of approved make as per manufacturer's specifications 4.13. Edge lipping All the exposed edges of ply or block board shall be finished with 2mm thk. PVC lipping wherever there is any laminate (external) finished items/furniture unless otherwise specified. All the exposed edges of ply or block board shall be finished with 4mm thk. wood (TW) lipping for any veneer finished items/furniture unless otherwise specified. 4.14. Polish: Providing and applying Polyurethane polish to all wood (TW) and veneer surfaces at all levels & locations including scrapping, surface preparation, leveling, application of filler coats and undercoat of transparent spirit polish etc and top three or more coats of specified type of polish of approved colour and shade etc all complete as directed by architect or NRDA (approved shade has to be achieved on final finished coat of polish). All wood (TW) and veneer (wherever used in any item) shall be PU coated unless otherwise specified. 4.15 Finish on Exposed Hardwood : All exposed hardwood (wherever visible before or after opening of shutter/drawer) shall be finished with general polish. 4.16 Edge joints between veneer: There shall be chamfered edge joint Wherever two adjacent sides veneer sheets are meeting with each other. 4.17. Every ply/block board edges which are unexposed or touching the wall shall be sealed with unpolished 4mm thk. wood(TW) lipping . Every ply and block board used shall have sealed edges (all sides). 4.18 HARDWARE & FITTINGS


25

The hardware throughout shall be of approved manufacture and brand, well made and equal in every respect to the samples to be deposited with the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall be required to produce and provide samples from many different sources before the Architect/Engineer-in-charge is able to make a decision. Fittings shall be of mild steel, stainless steel, brass, aluminum or as specified. Some mild steel fittings may have components of cast iron. These shall be well made, reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges and corners, flaws and others defects. Screw holes shall be counter sunk to suit the head of specified wood screws. These shall be of the following types according to the material used. 4.18.1 Tower bolt Tower bolts shall be well made and free from defects. The bolt shall be finished to correct shape and shall have a smooth action.Tower bolt chute made with steel of 1.2 mm thickness and above shall have counter-sunk screw holes to suit counter-sunk head of screws. All sharp edges and corners shall be removed and finished smooth. These shall generally conform to IS: 204 Pt. I. & II. Brass tower bolts with barrel of extruded section of brass and rolled or drawn brass bolt will be used. The knob of the brass tower bolts shall be cast and shall have counter-sunk screw holes to suit counter-sunk head of screws. All sharp edges and Corners shall be removed and finished smooth. These shall generally conform to BS: 1210. 4.18.2 Screws All screws shall be of best quality chromium plated brass or steel screws as per approved make. Screws are to match the finish of the article to be fixed, and to be round or flat headed or counter-sunk as required. 4.18.3 Nails, spikes & bolts Nails, spikes and bolts shall be of the best quality galvanized mild steel or wrought iron and of lengths and weights approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge and of approved quality sample. Brass screws where specified shall comply with B.S. 1210 and ire staples shall comply with B.S. 1494 or equivalent. The contact surfaces of dowels, tenons, wedges, etc., shall be glued with an approved adhesive. 4.18.4 Contractior shall follow following code of HAFELE make or equivalent make unless otherwise specified for all hardware requirement.

Sno. HARDWARE REQUIREMENT CODE

1 Shutter/drawer handle 115.42.002

2 Shutter/drawer lock

232.26.600/610/620

210.40.600

219.19.677

239.40.703

3 Drawer telescopic sliding channel 422.58.340

4 Single shutter Magnetic catcher 246.29.703

5 Double shutter Magnetic catcher 246.84.115

6 Shutter auto-closing hinge B34.39.793

B19.25.383

7 Sliding rail for AV equipments 941.10.936


26

941.10.004

8 Push type magnetic closing for shutter B78.41.770

9 Soft closing hinge for pop up box 356.53.310

4.19 Tempered I Toughened glass Toughened or tempered glass is 4 to 5 times stronger than its equivalent thickness of normal annealed float or sheet glass. It offers great resistance to sudden temperature changes and sudden impacts. Float glass of international quality and of the thickness specified in the item shall be used for manufacturing toughened glass. Toughening which shall be carried out horizontally without tong-marks, in specialized tempering plants, shall conform to DIN 1249, Part 12. All works such as cutting, grounding, drilling etc. on glass shall be carried out prior to toughening. Once tempering is done, no work will be allowed on the glass. Tempered glass used shall be of approved make. Frameless toughened glass, where specified for use as table top or work top, shall be provided with full-round moulding or bevelling as directed by the Architect/ Engineer-in- charge. 4.20 LAMINATE / VENEERS The Codes and standards generally applicable to the work of this section are listed hereinafter: IS: 848: Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood IS: 1998: Methods of test for synthetic resin-bonded laminated sheets IS: 2046: Decorative synthetic resin-bonded laminated sheets IS: 1328: Decorative Veneer The following clauses are intended to amplify the requirements of the reference documents fisted above and the Contractor shall comply with these clauses. 4.20.1 Material Plastic laminate/ veneer shall be fire retardant conforming to IS: 2046 and decorative veneer shall be conforming to IS: 1328. It shall be of the brand, manufacture, catalogue number, surface finish, texture and colour as specified and approved by the Architect/ Engineer-in- charge. The laminate shall be 1.5 mm thick on horizontal & vertical surfaces and 1 mm thick on curved surfaces unless otherwise directed and the teak/ decorative veneer shall be 4mm. thick. Unless specified otherwise in the item of work, the laminate shall have a standard matt finish. Adhesive shall be of the approved brand and manufacture. Rubber based adhesives shall not be allowed. 4.20.2 Application Plastic laminate/ veneer shall be veneered to the mounting surface with approved adhesive conforming to IS: 848, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to ensure a smooth ripple-free surface. Sheeting shall not be applied to timber with a moisture content of more than 12% or a temperature of less than 15 degrees C (60 degree F). Jointing of laminates shall not be permitted. Where allowed by the Architect, butt joints shall be perfectly flush and sealed. No surface sanding shall be allowed. Grain direction of the laminated sheeting shall be as follows: Lengthwise on horizontal surfaces Vertical on vertical surfaces Horizontal on edges of top surfaces and shelves Samples of laminated plastics/ veneers showing the surface texture and pattern shall be submitted to the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge for approval before bulk purchase. 4.20.3 Storage, handling and testing


27

Plastic laminate/ veneer proposed to be used shall be brought to the site well in advance to allow sufficient time for testing, if required. Testing of the samples shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer. Testing shall be performed as per IS : 1998 from an approved testing laboratory. While handling and storing, the laminated Plastics/ veneer shall not warp or crack. Utmost care shall be taken to prevent chipping of edges. 4.21 Foam Foam shall be of the best quality available in the market, ISI marked of high density 40 kg/ cu.m and as specified in the items. The Contractor shall submit samples of the above mentioned material before execution of the work and shall execute the work only after getting approval of the material. 4.22 Leather/ Leatherite Leather/ Leatherite shall be of the best quality available in the market of approved make. The Contractor shall submit samples of the above-mentioned material before execution of the work and shall execute the work only after getting approval of the quality, colour, shade and texture of the material. 4.23 Upholstery Upholstery shall be in first class workmanship with webbing, no-sag springs, coiled springs, padding and filling as specified. Covering fabrics shall be sewn, tufted and corded. Nowhere shall the stitching be visible on the exposed surface, except where it is specially mentioned. All upholstery work shall be first upholstered with 'markeen' cloth except for leatherite and then with approved fabrics. All woven upholstery shall be scotchguard-treated. No upholstery fabrication is to commence until the Contractor has obtained approval/ clear instructions concerning the direction of the pattern and the method of its joining from the Architect, especially when the fabric is patterned. 4.24 FURNITURE Loose Furniture will be made with wood, board, foam rubber, fabric etc., in accordance with the items in the bill of quantities, as described and specified, properly housed, tenoned, glued, b1ocked, stitched, etc. and entirely to the satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer-in- charge. Fixed Furniture items, such as counters, shelving, cupboards, etc., shall be made with plywood/block board as described and specified, properly housed, grooved, tongued, glued, blocked and screwed together, and entirely to the satisfaction of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall first prepare a prototype sample each of all the custom-made pieces and get them approved from the Employer/ Architect/ Engineer-in-charge to their entire satisfaction before mass production. The Contractor will be expected to do all the modifications to the samples for which no claim will be entertained. Glue, hardware, etc. used shall be as per approved make. The cost of providing and installing conduiting, wiring, extension or shifting of cables/wires from the wall/ floor and upto the outlets above/ below/ along the furniture items/ worktops/ tables/ cabinetry, making neat cut-outs, provision & installation of switches/ sockets for light/ power/ telephone/data/ t.v., etc. and commissioning of the system shall be included in the scope. 4.24.1 Fasteners They will match the finish of the hardware item. Nails in a finished surface shall be neatly punched and the hole filled with wood filler matching the finish. Screws in a finished surface will be round head, raised head or sunk beneath the surface and the hole plugged with matching colour and grain of the wood surface, unless specially detailed. 4.24.2 Metal


28

Where metal legs. frames, etc. are used, these shall be welded, brazed, bolted or rivetted as required and on finished surfaces welding, brazing and rivetting shall be neatly smoothened so that no evidence of this is apparent on the final finish of the metal, which will be as specified in the item in the schedule of quantities. On all legs, nylon glides or adjustable plastic screws are to be installed as per the instructions of the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge. 4.25 Glue Where adhesive is to be used, it shall be phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin confirming to B.W.R. (Boiling water resistant) type as per IS-848-1974. The use of animal glues will not be permitted. 4.26. All screw: All screw used shall be of stainless steel.

SECTION V TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: FURNISHING WORKS

5.1. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY General notes The workmanship shall be first class and to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. Scantling and boardings shall be accurately sawn and shall be of required width and thickness. All carpenters work shall be wrought except where other wise described. The workmanship and joinery shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawing and shall be framed together and securely fixed in approved manner and with properly made joints. All work is to be properly tenoned, shouldered, wedged, pinned, etc. and properly glued with approved quality adhesive to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. The rates for carpentry and joinery work are to include for all cutting and waste notching, holes, housing ends, miters, ends and shaped ends, angles, junctions, heading joints, short lengths, etc. for all nails, spikes, pins or brads, for coating the backs of frames, backing fillets, etc, with two coats of approved wood preservative, and for all necessary templates or moulds for circular work states “plugged to walls, etc.” the prices are to includes for plugging and fixing with nails, etc. to brickwork, block work or concrete work, and any hacking off and clearing away existing plaster as necessary. The rates shall also include for the provision of all samples and shop drawings. Joinery is to be prepared immediately after the placing of the Contract, framed up, bonded and wedged up. Any portions that wrap or develop shakes or other defects are to be replaced before wedging up. The whole of the work is to be framed and finished in a proper and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the detailed drawings, wrote where required and fitted with all necessary metal ties, straps, bolts, screws, glue, etc. Running bonded joints are to be cross tongued with teak tongues and where over 12mm thick, double cross tongued.


29

Should joints in Joiner’s work open, or other defects arise within the period stated for maintenance in the Contract, and the cause thereof be deemed by the Designer to be due to unseasoned timber or faulty or bad workmanship, such defective joinery shall be taken down, refitted, redecorated and/or replaced if necessary and any work disturbed shall be made good at the Contractor’s expense. Exposed Joinery shall have a high degree of finish and shall be of the best quality throughout. Joinery shall comply with the detail drawings. Prepare joinery for stained or tinted finishes. Conceal all fastenings where possible. Use the minimum of surface railing. Punch rail heads below surface and fill with putty coloured to match finish. Adhesive and jointing compounds shall be none staining and kept off visible surfaces. Surface screws where necessary shall, if visible, be Philips Head, countersunk flush. The Contractor shall provide all fixings, fastenings, anchors, plugs and the like of approved type to transmit the loads and stresses imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly. Carcass work, shelving and framework to built-in and freestanding units shall be generally constructed of ply as described and specified, properly housed, grooved, tongued, glued, blocked and screwed together as per manufacturers guidelines, and entirely to the satisfaction of the Designer. All exposed surfaces of joinery to be properly finished. Protection of Finished Work The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining any boxing or other temporary coverings required for the protection of dressed or finished work that might be damaged during the progress of the work if left unprotected. He is to clean out all shavings, cut ends and other waste from all parts of the Works before coverings or infillings are constructed. Timber Timber is to be cut to the required sizes and lengths as soon as practicable after the works are begun and stored under cover, so that the air will circulate freely around it. Unless otherwise stated all timber is to be wrote all round and all sizes shown on drawings or specified are finishes sizes. 5.2. FURNITURES & RELATED WORKS 5.2.1. CABINET Body construction

• Sides, internal dividers, top & bottom of cabinet shall be made up of 25mm ply.

• Rear Back of cabinet shall be made up of 12 mm thk. ply.

• Drawer - both sides, bottom, rear back shall be made up of 12mm ply.

• Internal rack shall be made up of 19mm ply.

• Shutter shall be made up of 19mm thk. block board.

• Drawer front face shall be made up of 19mm thk. ply.

• Wherever required additional hardwood structural framework shall be used to strengthen the cabinet as per the instruction of NRDA.

• Necessary cutting of cabinet rear back/sides shall be required as per the requirement and fixing of electrical and networking switches and I/Os. Electrical and networking switches and I/Os are not included in the scope of work.

Finish • Finish type 1: o All external exposed surfaces of cabinet including top and skirting shall be finished with laminate (external) of approved

shade/make. o All internal surfaces of cabinet shall be finished with laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 2mm thk PVC


30

• Finish type 2: o All external exposed surfaces of cabinet including top and skirting shall be finished with veneer of approved shade/make. o All internal surfaces of cabinet shall be finished with laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 4mm thk. wood(TW).

Hardware • All shutters shall be fitted with auto closing hinges (which shall open upto 90-110 degrees), magnetic catchers, tower bolts,

stoppers, shutter handles and locking system.

• All drawers shall be fitted with telescopic channel of ball bearing type, drawer handle and locking system.

• Every shutter and drawer shall have locking system.

• All shutter/ Drawer handles shall be 10mm square x 10mm round rail bar handle of stainless steel 304 (Hafele, Article no. 115.42.002 or equivalent make) unless otherwise specified.

Internal rack

• There shall be 1 no. internal rack in every compartment of cabinet fitted with height adjustable system for low ht cabinet

• There shall be 4 nos internal rack in every compartment of cabinet fitted with height adjustable system for full height cabinet.

5.2.2. WORKING TABLE Body construction

• Top, sides, modesty panel and intermediate support of the table shall be made up of 25mm thk. ply

• In built Drawer - both sides, bottom, rear back shall be made up of 12mm ply.

• In built Drawer front face shall be made up of 19mm thk. ply.

• Keyboard drawer (overall size 800mm x 300mm) shall be made up of 12mm thk ply with 25mm x 38mm polished top rounded wood (TW) moulding in the front face

• Wherever required additional powder coated Mild steel bracket of approved shade or hardwood structural framework shall be used to strengthen the table top as per the instruction of NRDA.

• Necessary cutting of table sides shall be required as per the requirement and fixing of electrical and networking switches and I/Os. Electrical and networking switches and I/Os are not included in the scope of work.

Finish • Finish type 1: o Table Top , both sides of table sides, both sides of modesty panel, drawer front faces, all exposed surface of keyboard

drawer and skirting shall be finished with laminate (external) of approved shade/make. o Bottom side of table top, internal sides and bottom of drawers and bottom side of keyboard drawer shall be finished with

laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 2mm thk PVC o Table top edge shall be finished with duco painted 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) half rounded moulding. o Finish type 2: o Table Top, both sides of table sides, both sides of modesty panel and skirting shall be finished with veneer of approved

shade/make. o Bottom side of table top and internal sides of drawers shall be finished with laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 4mm thk. wood(TW) o Table top edge shall be finished with 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) half rounded moulding.

Hardware

• All drawers shall be fitted with telescopic channel of ball bearing type, drawer handle and locking system.

• Every drawer shall have locking system.

• Keyboard drawer shall be fitted with telescopic channel of ball bearing type.

• All Drawer handles shall be 10mm square x 10mm round rail bar handle of stainless steel 304 (Hafele, Article no. 115.42.002 or equivalent make) unless otherwise specified.

5.2.3. MEETING & CONFERENCE TABLE (Rectangular/square shape) Body construction


31

o Meeting table top shall be made up of 2nos. layer of 19mm thk ply. o The base of the table shall be made up of 19mm thk. ply boxing with internal hardwood structural framework. o The table top shall have wire manager system made up of 19mm thk. ply boxing with hardwood framework. o The base of the table shall have access door/shutter to do maintenance of wire manager system. Access door/shutter shall

be made up of 19mm thk. block board. Finish

• Finish type 1: o Table Top, exposed table base surfaces & skirting shall be finished with laminate (external) of approved shade/make. o Bottom side of table top shall be finished with laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 2mm thk PVC matching the shade of laminate (external). o Table top edge shall be finished with duco painted 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) half rounded moulding. o Finish type 2: o Table Top, exposed table base surfaces & skirting shall be finished with veneer of approved shade/make. o Bottom side of table top shall be finished with laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 4mm thk. wood(TW) matching the finish of veneer. o Table top edge shall be finished with 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) half rounded moulding.

Hardware o All access door/shutter shall be fitted with auto closing hinges (which shall open upto 90-110 degrees), magnetic catchers,

tower bolts and locking system. There shall be push and pull type (push magnet) hardware of approved make to open the access door/shutter.

• Wire manager system: o There shall be flip up type POP UP box on table top . o The flip up shutter including all the inside body shall be made up of 19mm ply. There shall be cutouts at the flip up shutter

to open it and pull wires/cables after plugging. The top of the flip up shutter shall be in same level of table top. The flip up shutter shall be fitted with hinges as specified in Hardware list

o All inside of POP UP box shall be finished with laminate (balancing). o The minimum clear size inside the POP UP box shall be 100mm(depth) x 300mm(length) x 150mm(wide) o There shall be cutouts in the base bottom to fix switch sockets and I/Os. o The top of the flip up shutter shall be veneer finish in case of veneer finished table top and laminate(external) finish in case

of laminate finish table top. o There shall be 2mm thk. PVC lipping in case of laminate finish table and 4mm thk. wood(TW) lipping in case of veneer

finish table for flip up shutter. o The gap in-between two POP UP box shall be filled with 19mm ply with veneer/laminate finish top. There shall be holes on

this gap ply to fix table mounted microphone. 5.2.4. CONFERENCE TABLE (U shape) Body construction

o The conference table is like U shape. o Conference table top shall be made up of 2nos. layer of 19mm thk ply. o There shall be sides and intermediate supports under the table top made up of 2nos. layer of 19mm thk ply. o There shall be a peripheral ply boxing (from floor to table top level) of width 125mm -175mm along the complete length of

table at internal side of U shaped conference table made up of 19mm thk. ply on hardwood framework. This ply boxing shall be used to carry all wires and cables. There shall be electrical pop up box fixed on top of the ply boxing. The ply boxing shall have access door/shutter to do maintenance of wire manager system. Access door/shutter shall be made up of 19mm thk. block board.

o Conference table top, sides & intermediate supports are interconnected and structurally supported. Finish

• Finish type 1: o Table Top, both sides of sides and intermediate supports, all surfaces of peripheral ply boxing & skirting shall be finished

with laminate (external) of approved shade/make. o Bottom side of table top shall be finished with laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 2mm thk PVC matching the shade of laminate (external). o Table top edge shall be finished with duco painted 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) half rounded moulding.


32

o Exposed edges of Sides and intermediate supports shall be finished with duco painted 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) moulding/lipping

o There shall be wood(TW) moulding of size 75mm x 50mm fixed at the level of table top fixed along the complete length of peripheral ply boxing at internal side of U shaped conference table.

• Finish type 2: o Table Top, both sides of sides and intermediate supports, all surfaces of peripheral ply boxing & skirting shall be finished

with veneer of approved shade/make. o Bottom side of table top shall be finished with laminate (balancing) of approved shade/make. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 4mm thk. wood(TW). o Table top edge shall be finished with 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) half rounded moulding. o Exposed edges of Sides and intermediate supports shall be finished with 50mm x 50mm wood(TW) moulding. o There shall be wood(TW) moulding of size 75mm x75mm fixed at the level of table top along the complete length of

peripheral ply boxing at internal side of U shaped conference table.

• Hardware o All access door/shutter shall be fitted with auto closing hinges (which shall open upto 90-110 degrees), magnetic catchers,

tower bolts and locking system. There shall be push and pull type (push magnet) hardware as per approved make to open the access door/shutter.

• Wire manager system: • There shall be flip up type POP UP box on table top .

• The flip up shutter including all the inside body shall be made up of 19mm ply. There shall be cutouts at the flip up shutter to open it and pull wires/cables after plugging. The top of the flip up shutter shall be in same level of table top. The flip up shutter shall be fitted with hinges as specified in Hardware list

• All inside of POP UP box shall be finished with laminate (balancing).

• The minimum clear size inside the POP UP box shall be 100mm(depth) x 300mm(length) x 150mm(wide)

• There shall be cutouts in the base bottom to fix switch sockets and I/Os.

• The top of the flip up shutter shall be veneer finish in case of veneer finished table top and laminate(external) finish in case of laminate finish table top.

• There shall be 2mm thk. PVC lipping in case of laminate finish table and 4mm thk. wood(TW) lipping in case of veneer finish table for flip up shutter.

• The gap in-between two POP UP box shall be filled with 19mm ply with veneer/laminate finish top. There shall be holes on this gap ply to fix table mounted microphone.

5.2.5. WALL PANELING Body construction

o There shall be a framework of hardwood framed @ 600 center to center (both ways) fixed on plastered wall/column surface in line and level with proper screw and plug.

o 12mm base ply to be fixed on the framed hardwood to prepare a base for finish of any type of wall panel o Necessary cutting of wall panel shall be required as per the requirement of electrical and networking switches and I/Os.

Electrical and networking switches and I/Os. Are not included in the scope of work. Finish

o Finish type 1 (veneer finish): o Polished veneer to be fixed and pasted on 12mm base ply fixed to 50mm x 38mm hardwood framework. o There shall be polished uniform groove of size 4mm x 4mm in between two veneer surfaces as per design in line and level. o Finish type 2 (laminate finish): o Laminate (external) to be pasted on 12mm base ply fixed to 50mm x 38mm hardwood framework. o There shall be uniform nail joint groove in between two laminate surfaces as per design finished with paint. o Finish type 3 (fabric finish): o Fabric along with 3mm thk foam shall be wrapped on 15mm thk acoustical board of Anutone make (Anutone strand). The

acoustical board shall be framed with Auminium C channel on all sides before wrapping of fabric and foam. o Patented Grippers with unique teeth design shall be used for gripping fabric. Free Floating Fabric tucked inside the

Grippers. Anti-rust staple pins shall be used for adhering Grippers to the substrata. o Velcro shall be used to fix Fabric wrapped acoustical board on 12mm base ply fixed to 50mm x 38mm hardwood

framework fixed to plastered wall. The Velcro shall take the load of acoustic board and keep it in line and level. o There shall nail joint groove in between two surfaces of Fabric wrapped acoustical board unless otherwise specified.


33

o Fabric shall be wrapped properly in line and level of design of fabric, no crease, no wrinkle shall be there, shall be tightly wrapped, edges shall be uniform , no deformation, etc as per the satisfaction and approval of NRDA.

o Finish type 4(no finish): o 12mm thk. base ply surface shall be finished with two layers of primer with all proper filling of ply joints. The primer painted

surface shall be smooth, even, neatly leveled and uniform with no holes or deep scratches and ready to take wall paper/covering or paint or texture paint.

o The scope of work for supply and installation of Wall paper/covering, paints and texture paint is not included in this finish type.

o Finish type 5 (skirting): o Fixing of 19mm thk. and 100mm ht. Italian marble or granite or polished wood(TW) on 12mm thk. base ply. o The top edge of Italian marble or granite or polished wood(TW) shall be champhered (8mm x 8mm). o Italian marble and granite skirting shall be fixed on 12mm thk. base ply by using adhesive o Polished wood (TW) shall be fixed on 12mm thk. base ply by screw

5.2.6. PLY BOXING Body construction All ply boxing shall be made up of 12mm thk. base ply on 50mm x 50mm hardwood structural frame work framed @ 600 center to center (both ways) fixed on plastered wall/slab/beam/column surface in line and level with proper screw and plug. There shall be niche of various sizes within ply boxing with spot light above to display sculpture. Finish of all sides of the niche shall be same as the finish of nearest surfaces of ply boxing unless otherwise specified. Supply and installation of sculpture in not in the scope of work.

• Necessary cutting of ply boxing shall be required as per the requirement and fixing of electrical and networking switches and I/Os. Electrical and networking switches and I/Os are not included in the scope of work.

Finish o Finish type 1 (veneer finish): o Polished veneer to be fixed and pasted on 12mm base ply o There shall be polished finish uniform groove of size 4mm x 4mm in between two veneer surfaces as per design in line

and level. o Finish type 2 (laminate finish): o Laminate (external) to be pasted on 12mm base ply. o There shall be uniform nail joint groove in between two laminate surfaces as per design finished with paint. o Finish type 3(no finish): o 12mm thk. base ply surface shall be finished with primer with all proper filling of ply joints .The primer painted surface shall

be smooth, even, neatly leveled and uniform with no holes or deep scratches and ready to take wall paper/covering or paints or texture paint.

o The scope of work for supply and installation of Wall paper/covering, paints and texture paint are not included in this finish type.

o Finish type 4 (skirting): o Fixing of 19mm thk. Italian marble or granite or wood(TW) skirting on 12mm thk. base ply. o The top edge of Italian marble or granite or wood(TW) shall be champhered (8mm x 8mm). o Italian marble or granite skirting shall be fixed on 12mm thk. base ply by adhesive o Polished wood (TW) shall be fixed on 12mm thk. base ply by screw.

5.2.7. EXTENDED FILLER General specification for all extended filler unless otherwise specified in BOQ and drawing. Body construction Extended filler shall be used to fill the gap between different furnitures and walls. The extended filler shall be fixed permanently to fill the gap by making necessary hardwood framework fixed to adjacent furniture and wall. The hardwood section shall be as per the size of extended filler. The section size of hardwood shall be approved by NRDA before execution. Type 1


34

Extended filler top (one side only) shall be made up of 19mm thk base ply on hardwood framework. Type 2 Extended filler ply boxing (three sides) shall be made up of 19mm thk. base ply on hardwood framework. The length shall vary as per the available size of the gap as per site conditions. Finish

• Finish type 1: o The external surfaces shall be finished with laminate (external) as per approved make/shade

• Finish type 2: o The external surfaces shall be finished with veneer as per approved make/shade

5.2.8. DOOR Note:

• All the flush doors (with both side veneer finish and edge Lipping) and wall fixed door frames are existing and already installed at site along with all hardware supplied by other contractor of the project.

• Hinges and other necessary hardware shall be unscrewed and doors to be removed from the existing location for new finishing work.

• Existing veneer finish (one side only) and lipping (all sides) of door shall be removed and the surface to be prepared to take new finish of 4mm thk. wood (TW) lipping and veneer or laminate. Contractor shall do the finishing on the surface (one side only) of the door facing inside the room.

• The existing finish (side facing the room) of door frame fixed to wall shall be removed and new finish of veneer or laminate to be fixed.

• Contractor shall take necessary care to avoid any damage of existing door including safety and security of existing hardwares.

• After the completion of new finish the door shall be re-installed using same/existing hinges & hardware with necessary rectification and modification.

• Average size of door is 1000mm x 2100mm Finish

• Finish type 1:

• The surface (one side only) of door shall be finished with laminate (external) as per approved make/shade.

• There shall be 4mm thk. wood (TW) lipping all around the door edges.

• The door frame shall be finished with laminate (external)

• Finish type 2:

• The surface (one side only) of door shall be finished with veneer as per approved make/shade.

• There shall be 4mm thk. wood (TW) lipping all around the door edges.

• The door frame shall be finished with veneer. 5.2.9. WASH BASIN COUNTER Body construction Wash basin counter shall be made up of Granite top (600mm deep) and front fascia (150mm ht.) pasted on 25mmthk. marine ply backing supported over MS powder coated brackets. Necessary hardwood framework shall be fixed under the counter top and fascia to strengthen the wash basin counter. The fascia granite (with polished top edge) shall be projected 12mm above top level of counter. The counter top shall be cut to size to install under counter mounted wash basin as per manufacture’s specification to install wash basin . Inside edge of granite facing the wash basin shall be polished chamfer edge of 8mm x 8mm. There shall be holes on counter top as per manufacture’s specification to install pillar cock There shall be a 150mm ht. granite splash pasted on ply boxing at the back. The top edge of granite splash shall be polished chamfer edge of 8mm x 8mm.


35

There shall be shutters below the counter upto 12mm above floor level made up of 25mm thk. block board finished with laminate (external) or veneer. Shutter shall be fixed on hardwood framework at the back. The back of the shutter shall be finished with laminate (balancing). All shutters shall be fitted with auto closing hinges (which shall open upto 90-110 degrees), magnetic catchers, tower bolts and stoppers. There shall be push and pull type (push magnet) hardware to open the shutter.The wall area inside/under the counter shall be finished with acrylic emulsion paint on existing plaster. There shall be veneer or laminate (external) finish on ply boxing above counter top level. The ply boxing shall have 200mm deep niche for mirror and display sculpture items as per design. All exposed surface of niche shall be finished with veneer or laminate (external). All niche shall have spot lights. Note: All Granite shall be 19mm thk. and pre-polished. The ply boxing shall be as mentioned at technical specification no 5.2.6 Supply and installation of sculpture is not included in the scope of work Supply and installation of spot light is not included in the scope of work Following items are included in the scope of work for wash basin counter.

• Mirror: The mirror shall be of superior glass as per approved make straight and sharp finish edges. It shall be free from flaws, speaks or bubbles. The thickness of the mirror shall be not less than 6mm. The glass for the mirror shall be uniformly silver plated at the back and shall be free from silvering defects. Silvering shall have a protective uniform covering of red lead paint. The mirror shall be fixed on 12mm thk. ply backing using 3M make double side adhesive tape.

• Wash basin: Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of below/under counter mounted washbasin with a pair of cast iron brackets fixing to wall/wall dado with required materials like teak wood plugs packing pieces, screw, nails etc, with C.P Pillar cock, 32mm dia C.P. Waste coupling, 32mm dia C.P. bottle trap, C.P. connecting pipe, 15mm dia C.P. angle stop cock for cold water supply with wall flange, Long neck Pillar cock with aerator etc. The work Shall include cutting and making good the walls and floors. All materials shall be of approved make and model as specified below Item code No for Washbasin - Grand Basin 435mm dia - Parryware Item code No for Pillar cock - 021 - Jaquar 'Continental' series

Item code No for Angular Stop Cock - 053 - Jaquar 'Continental' series

Item code No for Bottle Trap - 767- Jaquar - CP finished

Item code No for Waste Coupling - 709- Jaquar - CP finished

The quoted rates shall include all such items, whether specifically mentioned or not required to complete the work including cutting, chasing, concreting, redoing, provision of screws , bolts, white cement etc. the quoted rates shall also include provision of MS angle stays, u bolt, hi-tech hangers , expansion bolts etc.

• Tissue dispenser: Fixing in position Hygienic Bathroom Tissue (Standard) Dispenser of Kimberly-Clark make in approved

shade.

• Liquid soap dispenser: Fixing in position Mini 500 of Kimberly Clarke in approved shade.

• Hand dryer: Fixing in position Solid State, No touch operating fully hygienic Hand drier of approved shade with single blower, with time delay, summer and winter control, music while drying, volume ON/OFF controls including providing necessary brackets, cable from dryer to plug, plug top key and lock etc complete as required Testing and Commissioning is included in the scope of work. Make :- Novatech

5.2.10. SERVICE COUNTER


36

General specification for all service counters unless otherwise specified in BOQ and drawing. Body construction Service counter shall be made up of Granite top (600mm deep) with rounded polished edge (both sides/all exposed sides) pasted on top of cabinets for storing kitchen/cooked items. Those rear backs of cabinets which are the front sides of counter shall be made up of 25mm thk. marine ply and finished with laminate (external) or veneer. There shall be polished finish uniform grooves of size 4mm x 4mm in between two veneer surfaces as per design on the front sides of counter or There shall be uniform nail joint groove in between two laminate surfaces as per design finished with paint on the front side of counter. Note: All Granite shall be 19mm thk. and pre-polished. The cabinet shall be as per the technical specification no 5.2.1 All ply for sides, top, bottom, dividers, rear back and shutters of cabinet shall be marine ply. 5.2.11. LOOSE TABLE Loose tables are made up of wood (TW) legs, top front fascia, top & bottom rack. There shall be metal jafri work which shall be fixed within wood (TW) frame on all the top fascia sides and top as per design. There shall be a 1 inch beveled polished edged 12mm thk. Toughened glass top fixed on wood (TW) top by UV glue on brushed steel finished studs as per dwg. Supply and installation of metal jafri is in the scope of work. The metal jafri is made up of bell metal(Bastar art of Chhattisgarh) as per approval of sample by NRDA. Sample to be provided by the contractor. 5.2.12. PLANTER BOX Planter box shall be made up of 25mm thk. ply. Bottom of all planter box shall be finished with laminate (balancing). Finish type 1: All exposed surfaces (inside and outside) of planter box shall be finished with laminate (external) and 2mm thk PVC lipping Finish type 2: All exposed surfaces (inside and outside) of planter box shall be finished with veneer and 4mm thk. polished wood (TW) lipping. 5.2.13. BED

• Mattress size = 1950mm x 900mm x 150mm(ht.)

• Mattress make is sleepwell - Durafirm Flexi Puf (6 inches ht.)

• The height of the bed with mattress shall be 450mm.

• The length and depth of the bed shall be as per the size of mattress.

• Height of headboard is 900mm from floor level. The length of the headboard shall be same as the width of the bed.

• The four vertical sides of bed shall be made up of 25mm thk. ply fixed to hardwood frame work. Two adjacent exposed vertical sides shall be finished with veneer. The top edge of the vertical sides shall be finished with 4mm thk. wood (TW) lipping. The bottom of the vertical sides shall be 100mm above floor level. There shall be 4 nos 75mm x 75mm rounded section wood (TW) leg base at the corners of the bed.

• The top of the bed ( base for mattress) shall be made up of laminate (balancing) finish on 19mmthk. ply fixed to hardwood framework. The top of the bed shall be recessed 25mm inside the top level of vertical sides to hold the mattress within the recessed area.

• Head board shall be made up of 2nos. layers of 25mm ply finished with veneer on one exposed side including all the edges.

5.2.14. GLASS RACK


37

All the glass racks shall be 12mm thk. Toughened glass with polished edge for all exposed edge sides fixed to wall or ply surface by brushed finish stainless steel wall clamps as per the approval of NRDA. Contractor shall submit samples of wall clamps for approval. 5.2.15. CUPBOARD The cupboard shall be as per the technical specification no 5.2.1 There shall be racks inside cupboard as per design detail. There shall be 12mm dia MS pipe fixed inside the cabinet to hang dress item by hanger. Supply of hanger is not included in the scope of work. All the exposed surfaces of cupboard shall be finished with veneer. Veneer to be finished on hardwood section to get a desired thickness for exposed edges of sides, dividers, racks as per design and approval. 5.2.16. OPEN RACK – TYPE 1 All open rack shall be made up of ply boxing to give desired thickness of exposed edges of dividers, sides, racks as per design. The section of hardwood framework inside ply boxing shall vary as per the thickness of edges. All the exposed sides, inside of open racks including exposed edges shall be finished with veneer. The ply boxing shall be as per the technical specification no 5.2.6 5.2.17. OPEN RACK – TYPE 2 All open rack (one rack only) shall be made up of 25mm thk. ply finished both sides with polished veneer or laminte (external) and the exposed edges shall be finished with 4mm thk. wood (TW) lipping or 2mm thk PVC lipping. The open single rack shall be fixed and supported from wall or wall panel or plyboxing. 5.2.18. ALUMINIUM RAFTER Providing and fixing Aluminum rafters formed out of 1.2 mm thk. Aluminum box section of 1.2mm thick finished with approved color powder coating finish as per approval, including necessary suspension system etc as per Architect's approval. 5.2.19. FABRIC MAGNETIC BOARD: Providing and fixing Fabric wrapped on magnetic board on 19mm thk. back ply fixed to POP finished surface. 4mm thk. polished wood(TW) lipping shall be finished all around the four sides of back ply covering all the edges of magnetic board. Patented Grippers with unique teeth design shall be used for gripping fabric. Free Floating Fabric tucked inside the Grippers. Anti-rust staple pins shall be used for adhering Grippers to the substrata. There shall nail joint groove in between two surfaces of Fabric soft board panel Fabric shall be wrapped properly in line and level of design of fabric, no crease or wrinkle shall be there, shall be tightly wrapped, edges shall be uniform , no deformation, etc as per the satisfaction and approval of NRDA. Fabric shall be as per approved make. Tenderer shall supply 16 nos magnetic bolts for each workstation at cabin. Tenderer shall supply 8 nos magnetic bolts for each worktable at ante-room. 5.2.20. WOOD BAND Polished Wood (TW) band shall be of 25mm thk. fixed on painted surface or wall panel or ply boxing. The edges shall be chamfered 10mm x 10mm both the sides. 5.2.21. GLASS FILM Supply & installation of printed 3M Scotch print self adhesive frosted film of crystal range computer cut to Architect's design & installed over existing glass partition. The installed frosted film shall be guranteed against delamination for 10years from the date of installation. Please note that 3M film need to be measured to the actual fixed area only. Contractor to pass on all guarantee/warranty documents to NRDA.


38

Please note that 3M film need to be measured to the actual fixed area only 5.2.22. VINYL POSTERS/GRAPHICS To paste Vinyl Posters/Graphics of approved shade with recommended adhesive of approved make and sample as per manufacturer's specifications . Cost to include preparation on the punned surface for receiving the Poster as per the manufacturer specification. Basic Cost of Vinyl poster Rs.3500/Sqm The installed graphics shall carry a Gurantee for 5 year from the date of installation against fading, delamination & bubbling on indoor conditions. 5.2.23. WOOD SKIRTING ON TABLE TOP OR CABINET TOP Wood (TW) skirting shall be 150mm height and 25mm thk. fixed to POP finished wall. The top of the skirting shall have chamfered edge. POP is not included in the scope.

• Necessary cutting of skirting shall be required as per the requirement and fixing of electrical and networking switches and I/Os. Electrical and networking switches and I/Os are not included in the scope of work.

5.2.24. WOODEN FLOOR (INCLUDING SKITING AND TRANSITIONAL STRIP): Engineered wood floor, as per make, product code and shade. Installation shall be as per manufacturer’s specification. 5.2.25. GYPSUM CEILING Providing and fixing suspended false ceiling consisting of 12.5mm thick Gypsum plaster board suspended on GI framework. GI framework to consist of GI perimeter channels 0.55mm thick 20mm x 30mm along perimeter of false ceiling of ceiling, screw fixed to wall/partition with nylon sleeves and screws @ 600mm c/c. Suspending GI intermediate channels of size 0.9mm thick 45mm x 15mm from the soffit at max dist 1220mm c/c with ceiling angle 0.55mm thick 25mm x 10mm fixed to soffit using GI cleat and steel expansion fasteners. Ceiling section 0.55mm thick web size 51.5mm and flanges 26mm each and 10.5mm lips are fixed to perpendicular to intermediate channel @ 457mm c/c using connecting clips. 12.5mm tapered edge plasterboard (IS 2095-1982) is screw fixed to ceiling section with 25mm drywall screws @ 230mm c/c. Boards to be finished with proprietary supplied jointing tape and jointing compound and sand papered to achieve a smooth and seamless finish. Two coats of gypboard primer to be applied to finished surfaces and then smoothened using chalk putty as directed. The surface shall be ready to take acrylic emulsion paint finish. Acrylic emulsion paint is not in the scope of work. Rate quoted to include vertical drops of 150mm and all cut-outs required for light fixtures, smoke detectors and other services cut-outs complete as directed by Architect. Gypsum plaster board Cove light tray shall have internal size of 150mm (ht.) x 200mm. Cove fascia height shall be 150mm. There shall be a gap of 150mm above cove fascia for light to come out from cove tray. Tube light (T5) shall be installed inside cove tray. Supply and installation of tube light is not in the scope of work. 5.2.26 TRAP DOOR AT FALSE CEILING Providing and fixing PVC Trap door in the false ceiling ( for maintenance of MEP works above ceiling) in UPVC frame of size 60mm x 56mm, 1.2mm thick. Corner fusion welding with SS Hinges. PVC Shutter with ‘C’ Profile on all the four sides along with Allen Key. The rate to be inclusive of necessary support from ceiling etc. complete. The finish of PVC shall be as per the choice of NRDA. 5.2.27. WALL COVERING Providing and fixing of wall paper on existing POP surface or wall panel or ply boxing wias per details. Technical characteristics*: Width Approx. 130 cm (50/51 – 51/52 inches)


39

Technical values Light-fastness All groups 7, tested according to ISO 105. Fire classification Class 1 – Class 0, Adhesive Only use standard Leed Compliant adhesive. Basic Cost of wall paper is Rs. 1250/Sqm. The Contractor will make good all holes and indentation, touch up including hair cracks rub and sand down to a smooth and level surface for the existing walls before the application of the wallcovering. The Contractor will apply an approved alkali resisting primer to seal all the surface to receive wall covering. The Contractor will first install on single layer of approved lining paper (to be hung horizontally) using an approved adhesive. The Contractor will install all wall coverings with the manufacturers specified pre-mixed adhesive which is to be applied thoroughly and evenly to the back of the wall covering. All joints are to be perfectly met with both ends wiped clean of surplus adhesive. A clean roller or brush is to be used to drive out all air bubbles. Where applicable pattern matching must be perfect. When the Contractor has completed the installation all areas are to be cleared of excess materials. All left over rolls or half rolls are to be turned over to the Employer. All work on site shall be done under the direction of a capable supervision who has had a minimum of 12 years experience in this type of work. 5.2.28. BLINDS AND CURTAIN RAILS/RODS 5.2.28.1 Fabric Vanes/Blinds for Vertical and Roller Blinds Fabric vanes/blinds shall be made from any of the following materials: a. Polyester viscose yarns, coated with chemicals to give maximum resistance to staining, surface abrations and fading. The polyester fibre material should be dyed in fade- resistant colours and' coated to 'give stabi1ity, dust repellancy and stain resistance, The blinds snould be of high quality weave and finish so as not to fray or curl in normal use and should be washable. They should hang straight and flat without buckling distortion and fibre density and striations should be as per accepted standards. b. 100% fibre glass yarns, coated with chemicals to give maximum resistance to staining, surface abrations and fading. The polyester fibre material should be flame-retardant and dyed in fade-resistant colours and coated to give stability, dust repellancy and stain resistance. The fabric shall be 0.30 mm thick, of weight 2851 2 sq.m. with an openness factor of 1 % and such as not to fray or curl in normal use. They should hang straight and flat without buckling or distortion and fibre density and striations should be as per accepted standards. c. A specially formulated plastisol, extruded over a glass fibre yarn. The fabric shall be so woven as to provide a subtle view of the other side of the blind and 1he blind shall offer elimination of glare and sunlight radiance up to a minimum of 80%. The fabric shall be flame retardant and the blinds shall hang straight and flat without buckling or distortion and the fibre density and striations shall be as per accepted standards. d. 100% polyester yarns, coated with fade-resistant polymer to ensure complete opacity with zero light transmittance. The blinds shall hang straight and flat without buckling or distortion.


40

e. 78% polypropelene and 22% polyester woven in a natural weave pattern. The fabric shall be 0.70 mmthick,.of weight 330 gm/sq.m and with a lining fused on the reverse side of the fabric to give stiffness and stability to the blind and to reduce the intensity of sunlight. f. 84% polyester, 10% cotton and 6% flex woven in a natural weave pattern. The fabric shall be 0.50 rom thick, of weight 220 gm/sq.m. and with a lining fused on the reverse side of the 'fabric to give stiffness and stability to the blind and to reduce the intensity of sunlight. 5.2.28.2 Aluminium Louvres/Vanes/Slats for Venetian Blinds Aluminium louvres/ vanes/ slats shall be made out of spring-tempered aluminium alloy with 3% to 5% magnesium content, pre-treated for maximum strength, flexibility and resistance to corrosion; they shall be 25 mm wide and between 0.17 mm to 0.20 mrn in thickness. They will have a pre-treatment and polyester -based painted finish.Vanes would be properly formed to give a finished crown with curvature. They shall be punctured at the bottom to accommodate connectors for connecting chain. Each louvre should have a pocket at the bottom to carry a louvre stabilizing weight within and should be connected on each side to the next louvre by a plastic-moulded ball chain. 5.2.28.3 Control & Movement Mechanism The traverse of the blinds should be controlled by an adjustment mechanism, entirely incorporated in the head rail. The head rail should be extruded from steel or aluminium, as specified, and anodized or powder coated in standard colours approved by Architect. 5.2.28.3.1 Control & Movement Mechanism for Vertical Blinds

a) Head Rail - The head rail shall be extruded aiurniniurn alloy measuring 45 mm wide and 25 mm high with a minimum wall thickness of 1.10 mm and shall be specially desiqned with curve shaped front face. The head rail shall house all operating components of the blind and shall be powder coated.

b) Carriers - The carriers shall be made of detrinacetal resin and shall traverse on two wheels along the guide slots in the

head rail. Each carrier shall have a self-aligning worm-and-spur gear mechanism to provide a synchronized 1800 louvers rotation by use of an aluminium alloy tilt rod functioning as a drive shaft between the control box and the carriers. The spacing of each carrier shall be controueo by a plastic spacer fixed to the carrier body providing a minimum louver overlap of 12 mm in the fully closed position.

c) Control Box - The control box shall house the planetary tilt gear hub for turning the louvers and shall also have rollers for

the traverse cord. An endless plastic chain shall synchronize and actuate 1800 rotation by turning the tilt rod attached to the tilt gear sprocket on the one end and the non-operating cap on the other end. Louvers shallt raverse left to right, right to left or split by means of the traverse cord.

d) Other Hardware - Louvers shall incorporate hem pockets at the top sewn with monofilament clear thread for inserting the

hanger and bottom weight. Hangers shall be made of nylon and bottom weight shall be made of galvanized steel mouldedwith nylon. Bottom weight shall be connected together on both sides with a plastic bead link chain. The traverse cord shall be tensioned by a cord weight, which shall be removable without detaching from the head rail.

e) Installation Bracket - Installation bracket shall be made of spring-tempered steel with a front flange and rear tab to snap-

in at the top of the head rail. 5.2.28.3.2 Control & Movement Mechanism for Roller Blinds

a) Roller Tube - The Roller tube shall be of extruded aluminium alloy of 40 mm outer diameter with a minimum wall thickness of 1.0 mm, duly anodized for long lift. It shall be designed to accommodate a spring and gear system.


41

b) Spring Clutch and Gear - Spring clutch with gear shall be provided for hanger-touch running and lowering of the blind. Clutch shall be of warp spring design with high strength fibre glass reinforced polymer assembly and high carbon steel spring to transmit motion from driving to driven members of the clutch mechanism. Clutch shall be crash proof, prevent slippage and shall raise and lower smoothly to any desired heiqht. Clutch shall never need adjustment.

c) Idler - Idler shall be of high strength fibre glass reinforced polymer, consisting of an

outside sleeve and centre shaft. Sleeve shal~ provide bearing .surtace for roller tube and rotate freely on the centre shaft, provitJing smooth, quiet and long wearing operation.

d) Installation Brackets - Brackets shall be of tempered steel, powder coated to give a

superior finish. Brackets shall accommodate overhead, side or face mounting with clutch assembly on either end of the roller.

e) Bottom Weight - The bottom 0f the blind shall be provided with an Aluminium tube, powder coated in a colour matching

the fabric. The fabric shall be enclosed in a suitably created pocket along with the tube. The tube shall be closed from the sides with end caps to give a neat look.

5.2.28.3.3 Control & Movement Mechanism for Venetian Blinds

a) Head Rail - The head rail shall be of 0.65 mm thick tempered steel, Ll-shaped, 25 mm wide, 25 mm high and coated in the same colour as the slat using polyester-based paint. The head rail shall house a/l operating components of the blind.

b) Bottom Rail - The bottom rail shall be of 0.65 mm thick tempered steel, c-shaoeo, 19.5 mm wide, 10 mm high and coated

in the same colour as the slat using polyester based paint

c) Tilt Mechanism - The titter shall be 100% polycarbonate housing with self-lubricating worm and gear and shall engage with the tilt mechanism using an acrylic transparent 7 mm wide wand. The wand shall have a snap-in knob at the bottom to facilitateeasy operation.

d) Cord Lock - Cord lock shall be of 100% polycarbonate housing with brass rollers and stainless steel walls to ensure long

life and minimum wear to the lift cords. It shall allow the blind to lock at any desired position.

e) Cords - Ladder string shall be of high quality polyester with distance between ladders not exceeding 20 mm to ensure a good overlap. Lift cord shall be of braided polyester jacket and centre core with diameter of 1.4 mm. Both shall be in colour matching the slats and shall be securely attached to the bottom rail.

f) Other Hardware - Ladder string roll shall be of delrin acetal polymer with a locking prong for attaching the string. It shall

clip into the 4 mm thick galvanised steel rod attached to the tiller and shall rest on the supports located inside the headrail. End caps shall be provided on the head and bottom rails to give a neat finish.

g) Installation Bracket - Blinds shall be installed with swivel brackets, made 'of qalvanised

steel with holes to screw them onto horizontal or vertical surfaces Brackets shall facilitate cfio-on installation of head rail and shall hold the blinds firmly in position.

5.2.28.4 Curtain Rails/ Rods 5.2.28.4.1 P-Line

a) Track - The curtain track shall be of extruded aluminium alloy measuring 25 mm high and 12 mm wide with a minimum wall thickness of 1.4 mm. The track shall be so designed as to allow fixation of brackets along the length of the track and shall be powder coated in an approved colour of choice.

b) Carriers - The carriers shall be of delrin acetal resin, designed for smooth movement

along the length of the track. The carriers shall have the required provision for attaching curtain hooks. Each meter of track shall have 10 carriers.


42

c) Overlapper - The overlapper shall be of galvanized steel with delrin acetal resin contours for smooth movement. The Zinc-plated steel hinges shall ensure 50 mm overlap of the curtains.

d) Other Hardware - The bracket shall be power coated in a colour matching the track and shall be so designed as to engage

the track at any desired position. The brackets shall be provided to have a maximum spacing of 1 meter. 5.2.28.4.2 Smooth-Line

a) Track - The curtain track shall be of extruded aluminium alloy measuring 24.75 mm high and 18.75 mm wide with a minimum wall thickness of 1.40 mm. The track shall be designed to allow fixation of brackets along the length of the track and shall be powder coated in an approved colour of choice.

b) Carriers - The carriers shall be of delrin acetal resin with stainless steel-ball bearing for friction free movement along the

length of the track. The carriers shall have the required provision for attaching curtain hooks.

c) Overlapper - The overlapper shall be of delrin acetal resin with rollers for smooth movement. The Zinc-plated steel hinges shall ensure proper overlap of the curtains.

d) Other Hardware - The bracket shall be power coated in a colour matching the track and shall be so designed as to engage

the track at any desired position. An optional glass fabric wand shall be for movement of curtains. The end caps shall be provided with a provision for attaching curtain hooks.

5.2.28.4.3 Nature-Line

a) Curtain Rod -The curtain rod shall be of extruded aluminium alloy measuring 36 mm in diameter with a minimum wall thickness of 1.2 mm. The rod shall be designed to have round shape when seen from front and shall have provision for movement of rings at the back. It shall have the provision to allow fixation of brackets along with length of the rod and shall have veneered in front and coated in a colour of choice.

b) Rings - The rings shall be made of wood in a colour matching the colour of the rod. The rings shall be of rounded shape 10

mm wide 4 mm high and shall move along the rod with carriers made of derlin acetal resin designed for smooth movement along the length of the track. The rings shall have polycarbonate hooks attached to them for hanging of curtains.

c) Finials - The finials shall be made of wood in a colour matching the colour of the rod. The finials shall be of approved

shape and shall be attached on both the ends of the rods and shall have provision for polycarbonate hooks for hanging of curtains.

d) Overlapper - The overlapper shall be made of Polycarbonate with delrin acetal resin carrier for smooth movement. The

Zinc-plated steel hinges shall ensure 50 mm overlap of the curtains.

e) Other Hardware- The control unit shall allow smooth operation of cord for movement of curtains. The cord shall have a round shaped handle for holding the cord straight. The brackets shall be powder coated in a colour matching the rod and shall be so designed as to engage the rod at any desired position. The brackets shall be provided to have a maximum spacing of 1 meter.

5.2.28.4.4 Wood-Line

a) Curtain Rod - The curtain rod shall be of extruded aluminium alloy measuring 36 mm in diameter with a minimum wall thickness of 1.2 mm. The rod shall be designed to have round shape when seen from front and shall have provision for movement of rings at the back. It shall have the provision to allow fixation of brackets along with length of the rod and shall have veneered in front and coated in a colour of choice.

b) Rings - The rings shall be made of wood in a colour matching the colour of the rod. The rings shall be of rounded shape 10

mm wide 4 mm high and shall move along the rod with carriers made of derlin acetal resin designed for smooth movement along the length of the track. The rings shall have polycarbonate hooks attached to them for hanging of curtains.


43

c) Finials - The finials shall be made of wood in a colour matching the colour of the rod. The finials shall be of approved shape and shall be attached on both the ends of the rods and shall have provision for polycarbonate hooks for hanging of curtains.

d) Overlapper - The overlapper shall be made of Polycarbonate with delrin acetal resin carrier for smooth movement. The

Zinc-plated steel hinges shall ensure 50 mm overlap of the curtains.

e) Other Hardware - The control unit shall allow smooth operation of cord for movement of curtains. The cord shall have a round shaped handle for holding the cord straight. The brackets shall be powder coated in a colour matching the rod and shall be so designed as to engage the rod at any desired position. The brackets shall be provided to have a maximum spacing of 1 meter.

5.2.28.5 Other Conditions 5.2.28.5.1 Samples The Contractor shall submit minimum 600 mm long samples in the form of a sample/ shade selector card of the slats/ vanes indicating full colour/ design range and colour variations as per specifications: For curtain rails/rods, the Contractor shall submit minimum 600 mm long samples in the form of tracks with carriers, overlappers, rods, rings, bracket, etc and shade selector card indicating full colour/ design range and colour variations. Final samples shall be got approved by the Architect before execution. 5.2.28.5.2 Dimensions The Contractor shall take field measured dimensions of the openings scheduled to receive the blinds and curtains/ rails, before execution of works. 5.2.28.5.3 Guarantee The Contractor shall guarantee that all materials and components designed, fabricated, supplied and installed by him shall be free from defects due to faulty design, materials and/ or workmanship and that the blinds, rails, operating systems and movement mechanisms with all their components shall perform satisfactorily as per specifications for a minimum period of 10 years. 5.2.28.6 Motors to be used for individual Blinds

Make Type Somfy France - Arriane

Nominal Torque (NM) 6

Nominal Speed (rpm) 17

Maximum number of terms in one direction 46

Current consumption of nominal Torque (w) 90

Rated Current (amps) 0.4

Running Time before thermal protector trips (min) 4

Thermal Protector tripping Temperature 140

Net Weight (kg) 1.72

Cable length (m) 2.5

5.2.28.7 Remote hand Set Make Somfy France

Box Material ABS

Colour White

Size 120X45X17 mm

Protection factor against solid and spalshproof

IP 30

Battery Voltage 3V DC

Type 2430 lithium


44

5.2.29. MAGNETIC WHITE BOARD Providing and fixing magnetic white board of White mark /Alkon of size as specified in the drawings and BOQ as per manufacturer's specifications, with necessary support in the partition. The rate to include chalk trays in MS powder coated as per approved sample etc. complete. 5.2.30. FLOOR MAT Providing and fixing of 15mm thk -3M make - Nomad heavy duty wiping mat. 5.2.31. GYPSUM PARTITION – FULL HT. Fabricating & fixing in place partitions of overall thickness of 100 mm, formed out of the following components. Framework: To consist of 70mm GI steel stud of 0.55mm thk with 34 and 36mm flange on either side placed at 610mm c/c spacing . Partition framework to be secured to floor, structural ceiling and nearest structural member using 50mm floor and ceiling channel ( 0.55mm thick having equal flanges of 32mm made of GI Steel) Cladding: The framework to be cladded on both sides with one layer of 12.5 mm thk tapered edge gypsum board (IS-2095/1982) upto true ceiling from finished floor level in line and level screw fixed with 25mm drywall screws @ 300mm c/c with staggered joints to avoid through joints and finished with proprietary supplied jointing tape and compound as per manufacturer's specification. Joints to be sand papered to achieve a smooth and seamless finish as per architects approval. Infill: As an acoustic requirement, contractor to affix 50mm thick rock wool of density 48kg/m3 blanket wrapped in RP tissue suitably affixed to partition framework using where necessary GI binding wire, duct tape as indicated in the drawing. Finishes: Two coats of gyp board primer to be applied to finished surfaces and then smoothened using chalk putty as directed. The surface shall be ready to take acrylic emulsion paint finish. Acrylic emulsion paint in not included in the scope. Special Provisions Contractor to make provision for all electrical/networking boxes and to provide cut-outs as required. Necessary cutting of Gyp baord shall be required as per the requirement and fixing of electrical and networking switches and I/Os. Electrical and networking switches and I/Os are not included in the scope of work. All junctions between materials, columns, walls, etc to have a 6mm groove with 12 x 12 x 1.2 mm thk Aluminium `L' angle as per details Skirting: Necessary provision of 12mm thk x 75mm high ply base be made to fix the proprietary skirting . 5.2.32. CAFÉ TABLE Table top shall be veneer finished on 2 nos. layer of 19mm ply, edge finished with half round 50mm X 50mm thk wood (TW) lipping. There shall be brushed finish Stainless steel single circular pole support and 5 nos. spreaded legs around the pole with levelor. 5.2.33. PELMET Body construction All sides of window pelmet shall be made up of 19mm ply Finish

• Finish type 1: o The external surfaces shall be finished with laminate (external) as per approved make/shade o The internal surface shall be finished with laminate (balancing) as per approved make/shade. o Lipping of all edges shall be of 2mm thk PVC matching the shade of laminate (external). o There shall be concealed arrangement to hang the pelmet on wall.

• Finish type 2: o The external surfaces shall be finished with veneer as per approved make/shade o The internal surface shall be finished with laminate (balancing) as per approved make/shade.


45

o Lipping of all edges shall be of 4mm thk. wood (TW) matching the shade of polished veneer. o There shall be concealed arrangement to hang the pelmet on wall.

• Finish type 3: o The external and internal surfaces shall be finished with veneer as per approved make/shade o Lipping of all edges shall be of 4mm thk. wood (TW) matching the shade of polished veneer. o There shall be concealed arrangement to hang the pelmet on wall.

• Finish type 4: o The internal surfaces shall be finished laminate (balancing) as per approved make/shade o There shall be no finish on the external side of pelmet. o Pelmet shall be integrated with nearest ply or gypsum ceiling as per design. Supply and installation of ply boxing and

gypsum ceiling is not included in this scope of work o Lipping of bottom edge of pelmet shall be of 2mm thk. PVC . The shade of PVC lipping shall be as per the choice of NRDA. o The pelmet shall be hanged by using hardwood support fixed to wall/slab/beam

SECTION VI LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIAL/AGENCIES

Only one of the under mentioned makes of equipment/materials will be acceptable. Although the acceptable makes are given, the

contractor shall submit samples of all materials (other than heavy equipment) and obtain approval of NRDA for the make of each

item before ordering the same. This condition is also applicable to all items equipment/materials for which makes are not

given in these specifications.

Tender price shall be applicable to all the makes of equipment/materials indicated in the list. Selection of

equipment/material before procurement shall be got approved from the Chief Engineer, NRDA.

Sl. No.

Item Make/Agency

1 Timber Teak wood (CP-central province)- 1st quality

2 Hardwood Best quality Salwood

3 Plywood (exterior grade) of specified thickness confirming to BWR IS 303

Century, Duro, Merino, Green, Archidply

4 Block Board (exterior grade) Century, Duro, Merino, Green, Archidply

5 Marine ply of specified thickness, termite & borer proof confirming to BWP IS 710

Century, Duro, Green, Archidply

6 Veneer Century, Uro, Green, Archidply

7 Laminate (external) Formica, Decolam, Greenlam, Century

8 Laminate (balancing) Formica, Decolam, Greenlam, Century

9 Fabric Response, Ashadeep, Noble


46

10 Fabric Protection coating for Upholstery

Fabguard of Dove Corporation Scotchguard, Birla 3M Ltd.

11 Wall paper Walltracts, Pride, Tex Décor, Elemento

12 Texture paint Asian paints, ICICI Paints, Berger Paints

13 PU polish Italian ICA, Asian Opel or equivalent

14 Malamine polish PC 742 or 743 of Asian paint or approved equivalent make.

15 Lusture oil paint ICI, Asian, Nerolac, Burger

16 Emulsion paint ICI, Asian, Nerolac, Burger

17 Wood Primer Paint ICI, Asian, Burger

18 Toughened glass Modi Guard, Saint Gobain

19 Mirror Modi Guard, Saint Gobain

20 Adhesive Fevicol SH, Araldite of Hindustan Ciba Geigu Ltd, Vamicol or equivalent

21 Preservatives Wood guard, Termiseal, Solignam, Black Japan or approved equivalent make.

22 Foam Geo foam, Dunlop, Kurlon

23 Soft board Sita tex, Jolly board or approved equivalent make.

24 Screws (Oxidized) Nattlefold, GKW or approved equivalent make.

25 Rockwool/Glass wool UP Twiga or approved equivalent make.

26 CRCA Steel Tata steel, Bhushan Steel, Uttam Galva, Sail

27 Aluminium Hindalco, Nalco, Jindal

28 Roller Blind Vista, Marvel, Packman, Hunter Douglas

29 Venetian blind Vista, Marvel, Packman, Luxaflex

30 Gypsum false ceiling India Gypsum, Lafarge Boral

31 Gypsum partition India Gypsum

32 Softboard Sitatex, Celotex

33 Modular/metal false ceiling USG, Armstrong

34 Self-adhesive vinyl transfer film 3M or approved equivalent make.

35 Two sided foam adhesive tape 3M or approved equivalent make.

36 Neoprene pads Resistoflex or approved equivalent make.

37 Tile adhesive, Epoxy grout, Silicone spray, polysulphide Sealant

Roffe, Pifilite

38 Adhesive for woodwork, Boards, Ply, Laminate work, Veneering

Fevicol (SR 998), Fevicol (MARINE)

39 Silicone sealant Dow Corning, Wacker, G.E.

40 Tower bolt Hettich, Hafele, IPSA

41 Castors Jhonson, Regal, Zenith Metaplast

42 Dash fasteners Hilti, Fischer

43 Levellers Win plastic, Narke

44 All Hardwares Dorma, Hafele, Hettich, Blum

45 Wooden floor Armstrong, Pergo

46 Cement Lafarge, Ambuja, Ultratech

47 Wires Finolex, Polycab


47

Name of work: Zonal Contract for Additional/Special Repair & Furniture work for Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan Naya Raipur.

Reference: WO No: 40 / Mantralaya-MD/ZID/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2014-15, Naya Raipur, dated: 03 / 02/2015 CA

No.37/Mantralaya-MD//ZID/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2014-15 Dated 03/02/2015 [Touchwell Marketing & Mfg. (i)

Pvt. Ltd]

*****

Technical Specification of Works:

GENERAL:

Manufacturer Specification of each items.

Material to be of best quality:

The whole of the materials, employed in connection with the permanent work, shall be new and of the best of its kind. All materials shall be in accordance with these specifications and shall be as approved by the engineer’s representative.

Standards:

Except where otherwise specified or permitted by the engineer in charge, all material shall confirm to the latest edition of Indian /international Standard Specifications.

1. RELATED CIVIL WORKS

Sl. No.

SOR/Non-SOR/NRD

A ref.

Item

no. Item of work (Description of item) Unit Qty.

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 CGPWD

Bldg-2009/1.1.2

1

Excavation of all types of Soil/Soft or Hard Rock in all types and sizes of foundations, trenches and drains or for any other purpose with all lead and lift including seperation of usefull soil for refilling and stacking & levelling of same, and disposal of surplus excavated stuff and spoils beyond NRDA boundries or as directed by Engineer In-charge including souring, dewatering, surface dressing, etc.., complete as per direction of Engineer In-charge.

Cum 10.00

2 1.17 2

Filling Surface dressing of the ground including removing vegetation and making up undulations and in-equalities not exceeding 15 cms in depth/ height including disposal of rubbish from available excavated stuff (Excluding rock) in trenches, plinth, sides of foundation etc. in layers consolidating each deposited layer by ramming and watering in all lift and lead beyond NRDA boundries or as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Cum 10.00

3 1.18 3

Providing and filling in plinth with sand/ Crusher dust and hard moorum under floor in layers not exceeding 20cm in depth consolidating each deposited layer by ramming and watering, including dressing etc. complete with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Cum 10.00

4 2.1 4 Providing and fixing formwork including centering, shuttering, strutting, staging, propping bracing etc. complete and including its removal at all levels, for all required with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 100.00

5 2.4 5

Providing and fixing double scaffolding system (cup lock type) on the exterior side, upto seven story height made with 40mm dia. M.S. tube 1.5 m centre to centre horizontal & vertical tubes joining with cup & lock system with M.S. tubes, M.S. tube challies, M.S. clamps and M.S. staircase system in the scaffolding for working platform etc. and maintaining it in a serviceable condition for the required duration as approved and removing it there after .The scaffolding system shall be stiffened with bracings, runners, connection with the building etc wherever required for inspection of work at required locations with essential safety features for the workmen etc. complete as per directions and approval of Engineer-in-charge. The

Sqm 100.00


48

elevation area of the scaffolding shall be measured for payment purpose .The payment will be made once irrespective of duration of scaffolding. (To be used for maintenance work judicially necessary deduction for scaffolding in the existing item to be done.)

6 16.6.2 6

Dismantling RCC, Lintel, Wall, any items of Masonry, Cement Concrete, Brick, FALG Brick, all kind of stone work, marble work or precast concrete work in Cement Mortar of any shapes and all lead & Lift with stacking of serviceable material and disposal of unserviceable material to any lead as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Cum 50.00

7 16.36 7

Dismantling Granite, Marble, Italian Marble, Terrazzo or mosaic or glazed vitreous or patent cement or tiled Flooring or Cladding Or dado skirting of any thickness without sub base with all lead & Lift with stacking of serviceable material and disposal of unserviceable material to any lead as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 10.00

8 16.37 8 Dismantling cement plaster or skirting at any height raking out joints and cleaning the surface for plaster including disposal of rubbish with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 100.00

9 16.26 9 Dismantling & taking out doors/window chowkhats with shutters (steel or wood) & Grill including architrave, hold fast etc. complete and stacking within 500 metres lead with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Each 10.00

10 16.31 10

Dismantling & Taking out all type of structural or normal steel work in built-up section in angles, channels, flats I-section and H/T-section including all gusset plates, bolts, nuts, cutting rivets, welding etc., including dismembering and stacking within 500 metres lead with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Kg 200.00

11 3.5.2 11

Providing and laying Design mix reinforcement cement concrete M-20 OR M-25 (using minimum cement 410 kg/cum concrete) with crushed graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size Including plastisizers or retarders if required,using batching plant, transit mixer and concrete pump, in all works excluding cost of reinforcement and form work with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Cum 200.00

12 3.14.1 12

Providing and placing in position reinforcement with Thermo-Mechanically treated bars (HYSD Fe 500) including binding wire 18 SWG GI wires.for R.C.C. work including straightening, cutting, bending, binding etc. complete as per drawings including cost of binding wire all complete with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Kg 4000.0

0

13 4.2 13

Providing grouting work for treatment of dampness & Seepage in walls of basement, plinth, super structure (occurs due to ground water table rising and absence of damp proof course at plinth level), with ROFF materials (ROFF Hyguard, ROFF Hyinject and ROFF grout mix) including preparing the surface, drilling holes in walls in zigzag manner spacing 150 mm center to center, pressure grouting by injecting the material, plugging holes with ROFF Grout GP and one coat of ROFF Hyguard and finished with 15mm cement plaster in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 100.00

14 7.18 14 Precast cement concrete block masonry having crushing strength 75 kg/sqcm in all levels in cement mortar 1:5 (1 Cement :5 coarse sand )

Cum 50.00

15 7.17.3 15 Brick work with modular fly-ash lime bricks (FALG Bricks) in Cement Mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) confirming to IS:12894-2002 of class designation 40 in all works at all levels

Cum 50.00

16 13.3.6 16

15 mm thick 2nd Grade Marble work of ANY COLOR & TYPE (machine cut, table rubbed & polished) for Wall cladding, dado, flooring, kitchen platform, vanity counters, window sills and similar locations of required size laid over 20mm thick base cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) including joints treated with white cement mixed with matching pigment including rubbing and polishing to edge moulding to give high gloss finish with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 30.00


49

17 13.4.3 17

15mm thick Granite work of ANY COLOR & TYPE (machine cut, table rubbed & mirror polished) for wall lining (veneer work) in cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) including pointing with cement mortar 1:2 (1 white cement: 2 marble dust) mixed with matching pigment. (Area of slab should be over 0.5 sqm) with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 20.00

18 11.4 18

Providing and fixing chicken mesh weighting not less than 250 gms/ sqm as per IS : specification in the required width with 10mm long steel nails on vertical and horizontal surface near R.C.C. and brick walls junctions including scaffolding and all lead and lifts etc. complete before plastering upto 10mts in height.

Sqm 50.00

19 11.11 19

18mm thick cement plaster in two coats with under layer of 12mm thick plaster 1:5 (1 cement : 5 fine sand) and top layer of 6mm thick with cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine sand) finished rough with sponge including scaffolding with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 100.00

20 10.51 20 Providing 10mm thick plaster of paris (Gypsum anhydrous) False ceiling height of 5m. above floor level over GI frame below.

21 10.51.1 21 Flat surface sqm 50.00

22 10.59 22

Providing and fixing at all height false ceiling consisting of frame work "W" / "U" / "L" sections made of G.I. sheet with zinc coating of grade 120 consisting of angle cleats of size 25mm wide x 1.6mm thick with flanges of 22mm and 37mm at 1200mm centre to centre one flange fixed to the ceiling with dash fastener 12.5mm diax40mm long with 6mm dia bolts to the angle hangers of 25x25x0.55mm of required length, and other end of angle hanger being fixed with nut and bolts to G.I. channels 45x15x0.9mm running at the rate of 1200mm centre to centre to which the ceiling section 0.5mm thick button wedge of 80mm with tapered flanges of 26mm each having clips of 10.5mm at 450mm centre to centre shall be fixed in a direction perpendicular to G.I. channel with connecting clips made out of 2.64mm diax230mm long G.I. wire at every junction including fixing the gypsum board with ceiling section and perimeter channels 0.55mm thick 27mm high having flanges of 20mm and 30mm long, the perimeter of ceiling fixed to wall/partition with the help of rawl plugs at 450mm centre to centre with 25mm long drive-all screws @ 230mm interval including jointing and fixing to a flush finish of tapered and square edges of the board with recommended filler, jointing tapes, finisher and two coats of primer suitable for board as per manufactures specification and also including the cost of making openings for light fittings, grills, diffusers, cutouts made with frame of perimeter channels suitably fixed all complete as per drawing and specification and direction of the Engineer inCharge but excluding the cost of painting with 12.5 mm thick tapered edge gypsum board conforming to IS: 2095- Part I.

Sqm 50.00

23 23

Providing and Fixing Armstrong/Hunter Douglus OR approved EQUIVALENT make Metal false ceiling Made from SS/galvanised steel with polyester powder paint finish, metal ceilings are made to last. Their high performance specifications include excellent durability and unequalled acoustical properties. The satin appearance of metal ceilings gives an attractively modern, functional look. Suspension systems Armstrong offers coordinated ceiling systems with support grids that fully integrate with the ceiling tiles you choose. All systems are designed to meet performance needs, durability and aesthetics. Specifying Armstrong’s Trulok Peakform suspension systems will ensure the highest quality of finished ceiling. In addition, Peakform grids provide a strong, easy and secure solution including all fixtures, fasteners as per company catloge and make coplete with scaffolding with all lead & Lift as directed by Engineer In-charge.

Sqm 200.00


50

24 Old int.

work item no.1.1

24

Providing and applying punning with 12mm thick layer of super fine plaster of paris (anhydrous gypsum) applied over selected existing plastered surface on walls and columns finished smooth, surface prepared by hacking, sand papering and applying a coat of cement slurry if required including all incidentals, groove making, pattas, sills, etc. Complete. The finished surface should be smooth so as to avoid unevenness.complete in all respect as per drawings/specifications and as directed.

Sqm 200.00

25 1.2 25 Providing and applying wall putty of approved brand of 2 mm thickness over P.O.P to prepare the surface even and smooth complete as per the direction of Enginner-in-charge.

Sqm 200.00

26 1.3 26

Applying Interior grade solvent based Acrylic primer (Two coats) of approved quality and brand on plastered/P.O.P/Concrete surfaces to receive Distemper/Acrylic emusion paint including scrapping the surface throughly with sand paper and preparing the surface completely as per manufacturer's specification and as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. The rate inludes cost of all materials, labour, scaffolding and all incidental.

Sqm 200.00

27 1.4 27

Applying Interior grade Acrylic emulsion paint (three coats: Luster finish) of approved colour, quality and brand, as per manufacturer's specification and as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. The paint to be applied over the surface of Acrylic Primer as required. The rate inludes cost of all materials, labour, scaffolding and all incidental but excluding the cost of Primer.

Sqm 200.00

28 1.5 28

Decorative Textured high class matt finish paint of approved style, colour, quality, composed of special thermoplastic rasin containing fine crystalline additives as per manufaturer's specification and as per direction of Engineer-in-charge to be applied over acrylic primer as required.

Sqm 100.00

29 SECTION K : DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS

30 Notes:

31 1) The items given below shall be as per 'K': "Carpentry and Joinery, Steel Doors, Aluminium Windows", openable/ sliding windows and Rolling shutters specifications

32 2) Aluminum windows, steel doors, partition walls etc.

33

(a) For all aluminum/steel works, the contractor shall submit shop drawing for each item of work indicating the section of aluminum/steel, its weight and joinery detail and total weight of window/door/partition walls etc.Wherever possible riveting shall be resorted to for connection. Alternatively hot dipped galvanized pinheaded sheet metal/brass, screws could be used. No mild steel without hot dipped galvanizing shall be used for any fastenings, etc.

34 (b) The rates shall be paid separately for Aluminum/steel sections used on weight basis.

35 (c) The rate of item of providing & fixing glass panels includes cost of all types of fixtures and fastenings made of any materials, neoprene rubber gaskets, screws, etc.

36 (d) Contractor shall submit samples of assembly sections from different manufacturer's for approval. Engineer-in-charge decision shall be final.

37 (e) All joints between civil work and aluminum/steel frames shall be sealed and made air tight by applying Silicone sealant or equivalent as approved at Contractor's cost.

38 K1 29

Providing & fixing Mild steel sheet frames for door/ window 152 mm x 50 mm of 18 gauge nominal as per drawing with/ without ventilators incl. anchor fasteners HILTI or approved equivalent to be fixed to the frame, & providing concrete bedblock for fixing the anchor fastener including filling cement mortar 1:6 in hollow core and 1 coat of zinc chromate primer & finishing with 3 Coats of Synthetic Enamel paint etc. complete.

Rmt 30


51

39 K2 a Same as Item No. K1 but for Door Frame of Sized 152 mm x 50 mm of 16 Gauge nominal for Fire Doors

Rmt 20

40 K3 b Same as Item No. K1 but for Door Frame of size 175 mm x 78 mm of 16 Gauge nominal for Acoustic Doors

Rmt 15

41 K4 30

Providing and fixing 1st class BTC teakwood door frames of finished size including making single or double rebates for shutters as per drawing, incl. anchor fasteners HILTI or approved equivalent for fixing frames to concrete members or masonry walls applying solignum on timber surface incontact with masonry/ concrete and melamine finish etc. complete.

42 (i) a 100x50mm Rmt 10

43 (ii) b 150x75mm - fire rating upto 2 hours Rmt 10

80 K6 33 Providing and fixing fire-rated glass vision panel 200 x 200mm (clear glass area) using 6mm thick clear pyran glass, Pilkington or approved equivalent including providing necessary beading for fixing the glass etc. complete.

No. 5

81 K7 34 Providing Plain 6mm thick clear float glass for glazed doors and windows including side beadings, rubber gaskets etc. complete.

SqM 10

82 K8 35 Providing 5mm thick Bajri glass for louvered windows. SqM 10

83 K9 36

Providing and fixing solid core flush door shutter in single/ Double leaf 35/ 50 mm thk. Marine type of exterior grade as per detailed drawings, approved marine plywood facing on both sides without glazing and Venetians, all necessary 12 x 18 mm teak wood beading/ moulding and 6 x 35/ 50mm T.W. lipping, laminate , veneer and Paint finish as per detailed drawing and schedule and to the satisfaction of Architect. Hardware to be paid for separately.

84 a (xvi) a D10a SqM 10

85

SIZE: 900 X 2400mm SHUTTER (900 X 2400mm approx.) / SHUTTER (1000 X 2400mm approx.) 50mm thk solid core marine flush single shutters finished with approved laminate on 3mm thk plywood on both sides with 2mm grooves in laminate as per drawing.

86 a (xviii) b D11a SqM 10

87

SHUTTER = 900 X 2400mm / 1000 X 2400mm /1200 X 2400mm / 1500 X 2400mm approx. 35mm thk solid core marine flush single shutters finished with approved laminate on 3mm thk plywood / 3 coat enamal paint on both sides with 2mm grooves in laminate as per drawing.

88 a (xx) c D12 - 900 X 2400 SqM 10

89 SIZE: 900 X 2400mm SHUTTER (900 X 2400mm approx.) 50mm thk solid core marine flush single shutters finished with approved veneer on both sides with 2mm grooves in veneer as per drawing.

90 a (xxxvii) d D28 SqM 10

91 DUCTS - TERRACES, SIZE: 1100 X 600mm SHUTTER (1100 X 600mm approx.) MS double shutters with 1.2mm MS louvers with zinc chromate primer & finished with 3 coats of synthetic enamel paint in approved shade as per drawing

94 EX - 22 39 D7- Providing and fixing steel glazed door shutter (D7) of standard rolled sections as per drawing

SqM 10

95 K10 40 ROLLING SHUTTERS

96 41

Providing and fixing MS normal type rolling shutter of min. 18 guage of approved make including all fixtures and fastenings, GI guides, GI sheet cover, rollers, locking arrangements as directed on both sides, sides filled with ball bearings, painting three coats of synthetic enamel paint over zinc chromate primer complete


52

in all respects of all sizes along with heavy duty padlock of Godrej or equivalent make.

97 i a RS1: 3000 x 3000 OR any size Plain, manually operated Sqm 40

98 ii b RS 2a : 3000 x 3000 Partial grill, manually operated Sqm 40

99

Note: 1)Rate shall include to provide the following Sealants, confirming to the recommended thickness & bites of sealants as determined by calculation, verified by testing and to withstand 3 times of the stress caused by the design wind pressure & scaffolding at all heights etc. complete

100

2) Shop Sealants : a) Structural Sealant shall be Dow corning 995 or 795. Tremco Spectrum 2 or ProGlaze 2 and No acetoxy sealant shall be used for IG units. b) Non - Structural Sealant shall be Dow corning 789 or approved equivalent. Field Sealants : a) Structural Sealant shall be Dow corning 983 or DLLR 993 (one part) or DLLR 995 (Silicone Adhesive) or Ge Silpruf - 2 or Tremco Spectrum 2. b) Non-Structural Sealant shall be Dow corning 983 or DLLR 982 / DLLR 3362/ 999 or General Electric 1200 or Tremco Tremsil 870 or Tremsil 870.

101

3)Design calculations conforming to applicable IS codes or other specified codes, should be submitted with shop drawings before commencement of work. Rate payable shall be for finished surface area of glazing / cladding. Costs for all corner cut pieces, flashing, wastage, etc. are to be included in the rates quoted. Deductions to be made - doors, windows, etc.

102

4)Rate shall include for providing and fixing firestops at all floor levels, sills, top of parapet at terrace including vertical surfaces like gap between column/ beam and Aluminium Members wherever required and providing aluminium flashing between the false ceiling and structural glazing, etc complete and as Directed

103

5)Rate shall include for providing lock washer at all bolted connections and also to be provided with EPDM DUTRAL barriers in minimum of 4 stages including extruded Reddiprone weather strip to ensure water and air tightness. Structural sealant shall be Ceiling Dow Corning 995 or 795 (one part) or approved equivalent make and jointing shall be done, using whether proof sealant of Dow Corning 789 or approved equivalent make with Backer rods.

104 Glazing

105 N6 42

Providing & fixing glazing panels & doors using 12mm thk toughened, float, clear glass of Asahi or approved equivalent make with crystal edge polish (conforming to ASTM Standards C-1048) supported by S.S. patch fittings (Sevax Olivier or approved equivalent) at the bottom, top & side edge and inter- connecting patch fittings between glass panels, stainless steel articulated countersunk bolts threaded bolts, chemical fasteners, etc. glass panel size as per design and drawing including applying colourless sealant of joint incl. required edge polish, making glazing water tight, etc. Destructive node joint test reports to be submitted for establishing the safety factor. Including operating hardware,SS patch fittings, fabricated long length satin finish SS 316 handles, patch lock, floor springs etc. complete as directed by the architect for frameless patch doors,single or twin leaf shutters with fixed panel on top. (All hardware: as specfied ) Item to include making & fixing necessary 37.5 x 50mm BTC rigid framework above the false ceiling for fixing the angle part of the internal glass partitions and glass doors at the top as per architectural detail drawing including all hardware complete.

106 a GL8a - Café, Ancillary Block 'B'

107 Glazing size: 2700 x 2800mm

108 Glazing panels: 1350 x 2800mm

109 i a Upper hinge on door SN308394 No. 4


53

110 ii b Rectangular lower hinge SN308393 No. 4

111 iii c Over panel hinge with angle part attached SN308390[L]/91[R] No. 4

112 iv d Over panel hinge ( 'L' Shaped ) SN308388[L]/89[R] No. 4

113 v e Corner lock SN308396 No. 4

114 vi f Angle part SN308398 No. 4

115 vii g Connecting part 2 leaves SN308399 No. 4

116 viii h Connecting part 4 leaves SN309137 No. 4

117 ix i Roller box SN308395 No. 4

118 x j H ' Type handle 450 X 25 dia.SS 316 PHH2518 No. 4

119 xi k Compact - Heavy Duty Floor Spring 'Minos (F4) No. 4

120 xii l 12mm thk Toughened Clear Glass with crystal edge polish SqM 10

121 c m GL11 - CM's Terrace, Ministers' Block Glazing size: 4850 x 2800mm Glazing panels: 1210 x 2800mm

122 d n GL12 - CM's Terrace, Ministers' Block Glazing size: 6000 x 2800mm Glazing panels: 1280 x 2800mm

123 e o GL13 - CM's Terrace, Ministers' Block Glazing size: 4350 x 2800mm, Glazing panels: 1090 x 2800mm

124 f p GL14 - Entry to Ministers' BlockGlazing size: 3000 x 2800mm, 11nos, Glazing panels: 300 x 2800mm, Door size: 2400 x 2400mm

125 g q GL15 - CM's Reception, Ministers' Block Glazing size: 5770 x 2800mm, Glazing panels: 1140 x 2800mm, 1490 x 2800mm, 1730 x 2800mm, Door size: 1000 x 2400mm

126 h r GL19 - Conference Rm, Secretaries Block Glazing size: 6900 x 2800mm, Glazing panels: 1000 x 2800mm, Door size: 900 x 2400mm

127 i s GL20 - Café, Secretaries block, Glazing size: 6900 x 2800mm, Glazing panels: 1150 x 2800mm

128 j t GL21a - CS's Terrace, Glazing size: 3600 x 3500mm, Glazing panels: 900 x 3500mm

129 k u GL21b - CS's Terrace, Glazing size: 1800 x 3500mm, Glazing panels: 900 x 3500mm

130 l v GL22a - CS's Waiting, Secretaries Block, Glazing size: 2650 x 2800mm, 3150 x 2800mm, Glazing panels: 1580 x 2800mm, 1580 x 2800mm, Door size: 1000 x 2400mm

131 m w GL22b - CS's Waiting, Secretaries Block, Glazing size: 3000 x 2800mm, Glazing panels: 1000 x 2800mm, Door size: 1000 x 2400mm

144 8.157 47

Providing and fixing factory made P.V.C. door frame of size 50x47mm with a wall thickness of 5mm, made out of extruded 5mm rigid PVC foam sheet mitred at corners and joined with 2 Nos of 150mm long brackets of 15x15mm M.S. square tube, the vertical door profiles to be reinforced with 19x19mm M.S. square tube of 19 gauge, EPDM rubber gasket weather seal to be provided through out the frame. The door frame to be fixed to the wall using M.S. screws of 65/100mm size complete as per manufacturers specification and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.

metre

50


54

145 8.158 48

Providing and fixing 30mm thick factory made panel PVC door shutter consisting of frame made out of M.S. tubes of 19 gauge thickness and size of 19mm x 19mm for styles and 15x15mm for top & bottom rails. M.S. frame shall have a coat of steel primers of approved make and manufacture . M.S. frame covered with 5mm thick heat moulded PVC 'C' channel of size 30mm thickness, 70mm width out of which 50mm shall be flat and 20mm shall be tapered in 45degree angle on either side forming styles; and 5mm thick, 95mm wide PVC sheet out of which 75mm shall be flat and 20mm shall be tapered in 45 degree on the inner side to form top and bottom rail and 115mm wide PVC sheet out of which 75mm shall be flat and 20mm shall be tapered on both sides to form lock rail. Top, bottom and lock rails shall be provided either side of the panel. 10mm (5mm x 2 ) thick, 20mm wide cross PVC sheet be provided as gap insert for top rail & bottom rail. paneling of 5mm thick both side PVC sheet to be fitted in the M.S. frame welded/ sealed to the styles & rails with 7mm (5mm+2mm) thick x 15mm wide PVC sheet beading on inner side, and joined together with solvent cement adhesive. An additional 5mm thick PVC strip of 20mm width is to be stuck on the interior side of the 'C' Channel using PVC solvent adhesive etc. complete as per Manufacturer’s specification including 3 nos ISI marked stainless steel hinges of size 100x58x1.9 mm complete. (for W.C. and bathroom door shutter).

146 8.158.2 49 Both side Pre-laminated panel PVC door shutter sqm 50

147 8.16 50

Providing and fixing 30mm thick fibreglass reinforced plastic (F.R.P.) flush door shutter in different plain and wood finish made with fire retardant grade unsaturated polyester resin, moulded to 3mm thick FRP laminate all around, with suitable wooden blocks inside at required places for fixing of fittings and polyurethane foam (PUF) / Polystyrene foam to be used as filler material throughout the hollow panel, casted monolithically with testing parameters of F.R.P. laminate conforming to table - 3 of IS: 14856 : 2000, complete.

sqm 50

148 9.42 51

Providing and fixing “ NETLON Insect screens" with 25mm wide Hook and loop tape all around to wooden /Aluminium/ steel windows, ventilators and the like complete at all levels with scafolding as per specification and direction of engineer-in-charge.

sqm 50

149 52

Providing and fixing “ SS 304I / 306I Insect screens" with 25mm wide Hook and loop tape all around to wooden /Aluminium/ steel windows, ventilators and the like complete at all levels with scafolding as per specification and direction of engineer-in-charge.

sqm 40

2. CABIN FURNITURES

Sl. No. SOR/Non-

SOR/NRDA ref. Item no.

Item of work (Description of item) Unit Qty.

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2.1.1 1 S1 - Basic Cost of veneer: Rs 150/sqft.

2 A.4 a Back credenza No. 1

3 A.5 b Side cabinet with AV No. 1

4 2.1.1.3 2 S2 - Basic Cost of veneer: Rs 100/sqft.

5 A WORKSTATION 5.2.2, Finish type 2 for Working table

6 A.1 a Working table No. 1

7 A.3 b Side unit No. 1

8 A.4 c Back credenza No. 1

9 A.5 d Side cabinet with AV There are two no. of side cabinet with AV as per dwg. There shall be provision of fixing switch socket inside the cabinet.

No. 1

10 3 M1 - Basic Cost of veneer: Rs 225/sqft.

11 A WORKSTATION

13 A.3 a Side unit No. 1


55

14 A.4 b Back credenza No. 1

15 2.1.1.4 4 M2 - Basic Cost of veneer: Rs 150/sqft.

16 A.1 a Working tableThere shall be 100mm dia brushed finished stainless steel pole under the working table with five nos. spreaded leg with levellor. The pole is fixed with a powder coated MS plate which is fixed to table top. The table top shall have a combination of Veneer as per approved sample and as per drawing.

No. 1

17 A.2 b Cabinet under working table No. 1

18 A.3 c Side unit No. 1

19 A.4 d Back credenza No. 1

20 A.5 e Side cabinet with AV No. 1

21 5 M3 (SS) -Basic Cost of veneer: Rs 100/sqft.

22 A WORKSTATION

23 A.1 a Working table No. 1

24 A.2 b Cabinet under working table No. 1

26 A.3 c Side unit No. 1

27 A.4 d Back credenza No. 1

28 A.5 e Side Cabinet with AV No. 1

29 E36 6

Shifting & Reinstallation of Working Tables @ 60% of Original item

30 a Working Table No. 3

31 b Side Unit No. 3

33 d Back Credenza No. 3

35 f AV Unit No. 3

3. CONFERENCE & MEETING ROOMS

Sl. No. SOR/Non-

SOR/NRDA ref. Item no.


1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3.1 FURNITURE

2 3.1.3 CONFERENCE AND MEETING ROOM

3 All shutter and drawer handle shall be Hafele/Hettich or approved equivalent make.

4 3.1.3.1 Basic Cost of laminate (external): Rs 50/sqft.

5 A 1 Conference table - Any shape POP UP Box: 1 no. per meter length

Meter 20

6 B 2 Service counter cabinet Size: 1000mm x 450mm x 750mm(ht.)

Meter 4

7 C 3 Granite TOP Basic Cost of Granite: Rs 150/sqft.

Sqm 10

8 D 4 Wall with AV cabinet Sqm 5

13 3.1.3.9 Basic Cost of veneer: Rs 150/sqft.

14 A 8 Conference table - Any shape POP UP Box: 1 no. per meter length

Meter 20

15 B 9 Service counter cabinet Size: 1000mm x 450mm x 750mm(ht.)

Meter 4

16 C 10 Wall with AV cabinet- Sqm 5

TOTAL OF CONFERENCE AND MEETING ROOM

4. FURNITURES OF PANTRY & CAFES

Sl. No. SOR/Non-SOR/NRDA ref.

Item no. Item of work (Description of item) Unit Qty.


56

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 1 1

Supplying and installation of LAMINATED PLY CUPBOARD WITH SHELF with 19mm exterior grade ply, 1.5mm thick external laminate and finished completely as per specification no. 5.2.1 Finish type-1 and as directed by engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 15


57

5. MISCALLANEOUS FURNITURES

Sl. No.

SOR/Non-SOR/NRDA ref.

Item no.


1 2 3 4 5 6

1 3.1 FURNITURE

2 3.1.6 MISCALLANEOUS FURNITURE Basic Cost of laminate(external): Rs 40/sqft. Basic cost of Granite: Rs 125/sqft.

3 B.1.10 File Cabinet 450mm wide Sqm 10.00

4 E1 1

Supplying and installation of Inclined Footrest of size 600mm x 450mm top, 75mm ht.in front and 150mm ht. in back with 19mm exterior grade ply and finished completely with laminate of price of laminate (external) is Rs. 50/- per sqft. All internal surface of footrest shall be finished with balancing laminate. All leaping shall be 4mmthick teakwood as per SHOP-drawing no-1, in place of BOQ item no B.5/p.n.159 and as directed by engineer-in-charge.

Each 50

5 E7 2 Supplying and installation of 6mm thick CORIAN CLADDING OVER PLY OR OTHER SURFACES and finished completely as per shop drawing no-7 and as directed by engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 5.00

6 E8 3

Supplying and installation of LAMINATED PLY BOOKSHELF with 19mm exterior grade ply, 1.5mm thick external laminate and finished completely as per shop drawing no-8, similar specification no. 5.2.1 Finish type-1 and as directed by engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 10

12 E12 5 Supplying and fixing of 3M make Frosted Film in required size, shape & design as approved by engineer-in-charge.

Sqm. 20.00

13 E13 6 Supplying and installation of 75 x 8mm size Teak wood lipping with polishing as approved by engineer-in-charge.

Rmt. 50

14 E14 7 Supplying and installation of Reception Table (Size 3.10m x 0.75m x Ht 1.50m) as approved by engineer-in-charge.

Rmt. 10

15 E18 8 Supplying and installation of 6mm thick toughened Glass shutter Bookcase Veener finished with Ply and external laminate as per architectural/shop drawing, specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 5

32 E30 15 Providing and fixing 8mm wide Aluminium TEE-profile/U-channel for highlighter complete as per architectural/shop drawing, specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge.

Rmt. 50

Total


58

6. FURNISHING

Sl. No. SOR/Non-SOR/NRDA ref.

Item no. Item of work (Description of item) Unit

Qty.

1 2 3 4

5 6

1 A 1 WALL PANELING

2 A.1 Finish type 1 (Veneer finish)

3 A.1.1 a Finish type 1A Basic cost of Veneer = Rs 225 /Sqft.

Sqmt. 10.00

4 A.1.2 b Finish type 1B Basic cost of Veneer = Rs 150 /Sqft.

Sqmt. 10.00

6 A.2 2 Finish type 2 (laminate finish)

7 A.2.1 a Finish type 2A Basic cost of laminate (external) = Rs 50 /Sqft.

Sqmt. 10.00

8 A.3.1 b Finish type 3A (Fabric with Anutone accoustic board) Basic cost of fabric = Rs 250 /Sqft.

Sqmt. 10.00

9 A.4.1 c Finish type 4A (No finish for Wall paper/Texture) Sqmt. 10.00

10 B 3 PLY BOXING

11 B.1 Finish type 1 (Veneer finish)

13 B.1.2 b Finish type 1B Basic cost of Veneer = Rs 150 /Sqft.

Sqmt. 10.00

15 B.2.1 d Finish type 2A (laminate finish) Basic cost of laminate (external) = Rs 50 /Sqft.

Sqmt. 10.00

16 B.3.1 e Finish type 3A (No finish for Wall paper/Texture) Sqmt. 10.00

17 C 4 PELMET

18 C.1 a Type 1 - Laminate finish Basic cost of laminate (external) = Rs 50 /Sqft. Size = 150mm x 250mm (ht.)

Rmt. 10.00

19 C.2 b Type 2 - Veneer finish Size = 150mm x 250mm (ht.)

21 C.2.2 d Basic cost of veneer = Rs 150 /Sqft. Rmt. 10.00

32 I 8 WOOD BAND

33 I.2 a 100mm wide Rmt. 10.00

34 I.4 b 150mm wide Rmt. 10.00

36 O 9 WALL COVERING with wall paper Basic Cost of Wall paper : Rs 125/sqft.

Sqmt. 20.00

37 P 10 BLIND

38 P.1.1 a Roller Blind - Opaque: Manual control Sqmt. 50.00

41 E20 11 Supplying and installation of ZEBRA BLINDS (Marvel Rainbow Series make) including support, control and movement mechanism complete as approved by engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 10.00

42 E19 12

Supplying and installation of FABRIC CURTAIN including support, control and movement mechanism complete, consists of Raw Kosa Silk as Curtain Cloth back side of which is stitched with Sear (Orgenza) with Blackout curtains at the front elevation of glass façade as approved by engineer-in-charge. (only Clear opening area to be measured )

Sqm 20.00

43

Total (Rs)


59

7. STRUCTURAL/PRESSED STEEL & ALUMINUM WORK

Sl. No.

SOR/Non-SOR/NRDA

ref.

Item no.


1 2 3 4 5 6

1 E26 1

Providing and fixing Anodised Aluminum work for Doors, Windows, Ventilators and Partitions and built up standard tubular and other sections of approved make conforming to IS:733 and IS:1285 anodised transparent or dyed to required shade according to IS:1868 (minimum anodic coating of grade AC 15), fixed with rawl plug and screws or fixing clips or with expansion hold fasteners including necessary filling up of gaps at junction, at top, bottom and sides with required PVC / Neoprene felt etc. Aluminium section shall be smooth, rust free, straight, mitered, and jointed mechanically wherever required including cleat angle. aluminium snap beading for glazing / paneling, C.P brass/ stainless steel screws, all complete as per architectural drawing and the direction of engineer-in-charge. (Glazing and paneling to be paid for separately).

Kg 100.00

2 E27 2

Providing and fixing 5 mm thick (weight not less than 12 kg/sqm) Toughened Glass Pane in anodised aluminium work for doors, windows, ventilators and partitions with PVC/Neoprene Gasket etc. complete as per architectural/shop drawing, specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge. (Cost of aluminium snap beading shall be paid in basic item).

Sqm 50.00

3 3 Providing and fixing 6 mm thick Toughened Glass Pane with cutting and edge polishing in any shape etc. complete as per architectural/shop drawing, specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 30.00

4 4 Providing and fixing 8 mm thick Toughened Glass Pane with cutting and edge polishing in any shape etc. complete as per architectural/shop drawing, specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 50.00

5 E27 5 Providing and fixing 10 mm thick Toughened Glass Pane with cutting and edge polishing in any shape etc. complete as per architectural/shop drawing, specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 50.00

6 E32 6

Providing and fixing 12mm thick Pre-laminated Particle board (PLPB) flat pressed three layer or graded wood particle board conforming to IS: 12823 Grade I Type II, in paneling fixed in aluminium doors, windows shutters and partition frames with C.P. brass/ stainless steel screws etc. complete With decorative lamination on one side and balancing lamination on other side as per CGPWD Building specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge.

Sqm 50.00

7 E33 7

Providing and fixing anodized Aluminium framed grill (minimum anodic coating of grade AC 15) of approved shape, pattern and design including cutting, bending, hoisting and erecting/ fixing to door, window frame or to wall with fixing clips or hold fasteners or bolts and nuts as required etc. complete as per CGPWD Building specification and the direction of engineer-in-charge.

Kg 50.00

8 9.5.2 8 Steel work welded in built up sections/ framed work including cutting, hoisting, fixing in position and applying a priming coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer in Grill, gratings, frames, guard bar, ladder, railings, brackets, gates and similar works.

Kg 200.00

9 9.13.4 9

Providing and fixing in position Single rebate 100mmx50mm size, 1.6mm thick sheet. doors, windows and ventilators frames made of cold rolled pressed steel sheet framed profiles made from commercial M.S. Sheets conforming to I.S. 513 of 1973 and as per general specifications of I.S 4351 including hinges jamb, lock jamb, steel butt hinges, base tie, joints mitred and welded with 10cm long legs of size 15x3mm M.S. flat, embedded in cement concrete blocks 15x10x10cm size of grade M-10 or rawl plugs and screws or with fixing clips or with bolts and nuts including neatly compacted filling M-10 cement concrete in profile section applying a priming coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer.

Meter 20.00


60

10 9.49.3 10 Providing and fixing glazing in aluminium door, window, ventilator shutters and partitions etc. with PVC/ neoprene gasket etc. complete. (Cost of aluminium snap beading shall be paid in basic item): With float glass panes of 6 mm thickness

Sqm 50.00

11 9.50 11

Providing and fixing double glazed hermetically sealed glazing in aluminium windows, ventilators and partition etc. with 6 mm thick clear float glass both side having 12 mm air gap including providing EPDM gasket, perforated aluminium spacers, desiccants, sealant (Both primary and secondary sealant) etc. complete.

Sqm 30.00

12 9.52 12 Providing and fixing of six/seven levers branded and approved mortise lock. each 5.00

13 9.53 13 Providing and fixing of floor spring IS: marked (Everite, Door link or any equivalent make) with stainless steel cover plate including cutting and making good the floor etc. complete.

each 5.00

14 9.54 14 Providing stainless steel railing/ grill made of S.S. flats, hollow S.S. pipe or square/ rectangular sections of approved design fixing in stair case, balcony or other places with metal fasteners and stainless steel bolts etc complete.

kg 50.00

15 9.57 15

Designing, providing and fixing aluminium frame work made of special aluminium section on building face with M.S. angle iron brackets fixed on RCC structure with S.S. hold fasteners, including providing and fixing two sided structural adhesive tape of appropriate grade (NORTON or equilent), on aluminium sections for fixing aluminium/ glass panel, sealing on periphery of frame work, by providing EPDM gasket, silicon weather sealant between aluminium frame and building structure including hire charges of double scaffolding complete.

kg 50.00

Total


61

Name of Work:- Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of modular workstation (Modular office Furniture) for Section Block of State Secretariat Building at Naya Raipur (Chhattisgarh).- MOD-1

Work Order No: 635 / SSB/Int. & Fur./PW/B/4-4 /NRDA/09, Raipur, dated : 10 /05/2011 Contract Agreement No 22/SSB/Int. & Fur./PW/B/4-4 /NRDA/09 Dated : 28.4.2011 [M/s Featherlite Office System (P) Ltd, # 83&88/1, Bangalore-Mysore Road, Hejjala Circle, Ramanagaram Dist (Section Block)]

VOLUME II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Section-I: PART I : Modular furniture

MODULAR OFFICE FURNITURE, SECTION BLOCK - SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION

SNO. Technical Specification

General specification of all specified modular furniture. 1. All Prelaminate particle board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12823:1990 (IS 3087:2005).

2. All prelaminated medium density fibre (MDF) board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12406:

2003 (IS 14587: 2008)

3. All exposed & balancing laminates should be 0.6-0.8mm thick.

4. All metals used should be CRCA or Aluminium unless otherwise specified.

5. All CRCA or Aluminium should have powder coating of 40-60 micron thick unless otherwise specified.

6. All lipping should be of PVC edging of 2 mm thickness on all edges.

7. All Modular furniture/partition shall have adjustable leveler.

8. All color / shade of specified finishes shall be as per Architect’s choice

9.Tenderer shall get approval of samples from NRDA of all BOQ items before manufacturing

1 Modular Workstation Type 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 2A, 2B, 2C & 3A

Refer VOLUME II, PART II for parameter and requirement of all modular workstations.

General specification of all specified modular workstation

Work Table: Work Table top should be made of Pre laminated particle board of 25 mm thickness with Straight edge.

CRCA powder coated cantilever bracket to be used for table top support. The worktop shall be fitted with suitable metal /

nylon inserts to take the M6 machine screws that fit the cantilever brackets to the worktop.

Gable End/sides: Gable end/sides should be made of Pre laminated particle board of 25 mm thickness with Straight

edge.

Modesty panel: Modesty panel should be made of Pre laminated particle board of 18 mm thickness with Straight edge.

Intermediate support: Additional Intermediate support of 25mm thk prelaminated particle board(supported on floor) or

powder coated CRCA bracket to be used for table top support.

Wire manager: Each worktop shall be provided with a wire manager hole of 72 mm diameter, which in turn shall be

fitted with a plastic wire manager of approved shade and colour.

Magnetic Board:

Note A: There is no magnetic board for Modular workstation type 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D.

Note B: Modular workstation type 2A, 2B & 2C shall have magnetic board with fabric finish panel in partition.

Note C: Magnetic Board for Modular Workstation Type 3A.

1. Magnetic Board should have fabric finish with 25mm thk CRCA/Aluminium powder coated wall frame.

2. Necessary concealed arrangement shall be there for hanging the magnetic board on finished wall surface.

Note D: Basic cost of fabric for soft board should be Rs 250/meter. Basic cost is inclusive of all taxes, duties & delivery

at manufacturer factory.

Note E: Tenderer shall supply 12 nos magnetic bolts for each magnetic board for modular workstation type 2A, 2B, 2C &

3A.


62

Laminate tile on wall: Modular workstation type 3A shall have 25mm thk prelaminated particle board skirting above table top with

25mm thk CRCA/Aluminium powder coated wall frame. The laminate tile shall have concealed arrangement for hanging it on

finished wall surface. Necessary cutting of laminate tile as per the approved switch socket sizes should be done to fix electrical and

data sockets on laminate tile.

Side storage unit & back credenza: Made up of 25mm thk. prelaminate particle board with sliding or open able shutter. The

doors shall be fitted with special hinges for openable shutter which shall open up to 110 degrees. Fitted with necessary hardware

like hinge/sliding rail, shutter handle, magnetic catcher, etc. All shutter should have locking mechanism. There should be one

adjustable rack inside the cabinet made up of 25mm thk. prelaminate particle board. The side storage unit shall have sliding shutter

and back credenza shall have openable shutter with hinges.

Partition system(tile based) for Modular workstation type 2A, 2B & 2C

1. Partition framework: Frame should be in CRCA & consist of – Vertical channel, Top rail, bottom rail, center transom

rail, horizontal pipe assembly, leveler bolt, cable carrier, tile supporter. There should be separate raceway for data &

electrical cable laying (horizontal & vertical direction) inside the partition.

2. Edge /trim/cap/cover - Made up of powder coated CRCA/Aluminium.

3. Skirting –Made up of powder coated CRCA/Aluminium.

4. Magnetic Board with fabric finish panel in partition

5. Laminate tile panel – made up of 8-9mm prelaminate particle board or 4-5mm thk MDF board with edges sealed.

6. Necessary cutting of laminate tile as per the approved switch socket sizes should be done to fix electrical and data

sockets on laminate tile.

2 Filing cabinet - 4A

Size: Width=450-500mm, Height=1300-1350mm, Depth: 600-650mm

Construction: Rigid Knock down Construction

Material: CRCA, 0.7 mm Thick (Top, Side & Drawer Front), 0.6 mm Thick (Frames, Drawer- Inside Cover, Side Back

Side), 0.5mm Thick (Back, Bottom, Drawer Bottom)

Drawer front: Easy to grip Full length Handle recess integrated into Metal Drawer fronts

Label Holder: Snap on type plastic label holder on Drawer Fronts

Drawer Size & Files type:

1. For hanging ‘Ezee’ / ‘Visa’ files (Foolscap) from front to back (Files Along the Width)

2. No. of 20 mm thk file which can be hanged in above way per drawer is 28.

Locking & anti-tipping arrangement: Centralized locking with 10 lever Cam Lock & having anti-tipping arrangement to

ensure that when one drawer is opened for use, it does not allow other drawers to be opened.

Slide: High quality precision ball slide.

Accessories:

1. Drawer Partition

2. Cradle for hanging A4 file folders front to back.

Finish: Powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10).

3 Loose table - 5A

The top of the table should be of prelaminate particle board (25mm thk.) with 2mm thk. PVC edge binding. The leg &

base support should be made up of powder coated CRCA with adjustable leveler. Size = 450mm dia X 450mm(H)

4 Partition - 6A

Size: 75mm thk X 2400mm(H)

1. Internal structural frame work shall be made up of powder coated CRCA fixed to floor/wall.

2. Finished both side with 8-9mm thk. Prelaminated particle board

3. Skirting shall be made up of powder coated Aluminium.

4. All edges shall be finished with necessary trims and edge caps made up of powder coated CRCA/aluminum.


63

5. The internal structural frame work shall have facility for laying of vertical and horizontal raceways

6. Necessary cutting of panels shall be required to fix switch sockets

5 Door - 7A

1. Aluminium composite door with door frame. Overall size including door frame = 1000mm(L) X 2400mm(H)

2. All door panel frame work and door frame shall be made up of powder coated aluminum.

3. Door panel shall have 25mm thk. Prelaminated particle board at bottom level and 12mm thk toughened glass panel at

upper level.

5. Skirting shall be made up of powder coated Aluminium.

6. All edges shall be finished with necessary trims and edge caps made up of powder coated CRCA/aluminum.

7. Necessary hardware shall be provided like door hinge, door handle bothside, door locking mechanism, door stopper

and door closure.

6 CPU trolley- 8A

All CPU trolleys (with expandable width) shall be of 1.5 mm thick Steel of approved size and colour. The sheet should be

powder coated on all surfaces. The trolley should move on 4 castors with locking mechanism.

7 Keyboard Drawer - 9A

All keyboard drawer with foldable mouse padded tray shall be of 0.8 mm thick steel of approved size and colour. The

trays shall be mounted on telescopic channels of ball bearing type mounted on the underside of the worktop.

8 Name tag - 11A

All name tag shall be made up of acrylic sheet with slide in facility of paper name card of size = 75mm x 175mm. The

Name tag shall be fixed to workstations by bothside adhesive tape (3M equivalent make)


64

VOLUME II: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

PARAMETER & REQUIREMENT

SNO

.

Dw

g./B

OQ

Cod

e

No.

of p

erso

n us

er

Work Table

Softb

oard

on

wal

l 13

50m

m(L

) X 4

50m

m(H

)

Lam

inat

e Ti

le o

n w

all

2600

mm

(L) X

15

0mm

(H)

Side

Sto

rage

Uni

t 45

0mm

(D) X

730

mm

-75

0mm

(H)

Bac

k C

rede

nza

45

0mm

(D) X

730

mm

-75

0mm

(H)

Exte

nded

fille

r top

45

0mm

(L) x

450

mm

(D)

Part

ition

50

- 60m

m th

k.

P1 =

900

-10

50m

m(H

)

P2

=120

0-13

50m

m(H

)

size 730-750mm(H)

Gab

el E

nd/S

ide

Mod

esty

Pan

el

Stat

iona

ry D

raw

er:

10

0mm

(H) X

450

mm

(D)

Inte

rmed

iate

sup

port

for t

able

top

lam

inat

e Po

stfo

rm ta

ble

top

edge

No.

No. X L X D (mm)

No. No. No. X L (mm)

No. (Y/N) No. No. No. X L (mm)

No. X L (mm)

No. P type, L (mm)

1 Modular Workstation

1.1 Modular Workstation Type 1

1.1.1

One person cluster - 1A

1 1 X 1500 X

750 1 1 1 X 300 1 N 1 X 1050

P1, 1800

1.1.2

Two person cluster (type -1) - 1B

2 2 X 1500 X

750 2 2 2 X 300 2 N

2 X 1050

P1,

3600

1.1.3

Two person cluster (type -2) - 1C

2 2 X 1500 X

750 2 2 2 X 300 2 N

2 X 1050

P1,

1800

1.1.4

Four person cluster - 1D

4 4 X 1500 X

750 4 4 4 X 300 4 N

4 X 1050

P1

3600


1.2.1


1 1 X 1800 X

800 1 1 1 X 450 1 N

1 X 1350

1 X 1350 1 P2,

2600

1.2.2

Two person cluster - 2B

2 2 X 1800 X

800 2 2 2 X 450 2 N

2 X 1350

2 X 1350 2 P2,

2600

1.2.3

One person cluster - 2C

1 1 X 2100 X

800 1 1 1 X 450 2 Y

1 X 1350

1 X 2500 1 P2,

2600


1.3.1


1 1 X 2100 X

800 2 1 1 X 450 2 Y 1 1

1 X 1350

1 X 2400 1


65

Volume – II Technical Specifications

SECTION II: LIST OF APPROVED MAKE/MANUFACTURER OF MATERIALS

1. Prelaminate particle board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12823:1990 (IS 3087:2005) A. Novapan Industries Ltd.

B. Bhutan Board

C. Archid Ply

D. Merino

2. Prelaminated medium density fibre (MDF) board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12406: 2003 (IS 14587: 2008) A. Duratuff ( Manglam timber)

B. Green Ply

C. Archid Ply

D. Merino

3. Aluminium

A. Hindalco

B. Nalco

C. Jindal

4. CRCA / Steel A. Tata Steel

B. Bhushan Steel

C. Uttam Galva

D. Jindal

E. SAIL

5. Hardware A. Ebco

B. Hettich

C. Haffele

D. Dorma

6. Fabric A. Response

B. Ashadeep

C. Noble


66

Name of Work:- Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of modular workstation (Modular office Furniture) for Ancillary A&B, Ministry & Secretary blocks of State Secretariat Building at Naya Raipur.- MOD-2

Work Order No: Work Order No: 1116 /SSB/Mod-2/PW/B/4-4 /NRDA/11, Raipur, dated: 29.7.2011 Contract Agreement No. 26 /SSB/Int. & Fur./Mod-2/B/4-4 /NRDA/11-12, Dated : 26.7.2011 [De Bono Flexcom(I) Ltd., Kukreja House, 1st Floor, 46, Rani Jhansi Road, New Delhi]

SECTION I

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

VOLUME II , TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION, PART I

NIT No.: 548/Engg.Section/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 26.4.11

Name of Work :- Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of modular workstation (Modular office Furniture) for Ancillary A&B, Ministry and Secretary blocks of State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex,

Naya Raipur. - SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION SNO. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

General specification of all specified modular furniture.

1. All Prelaminate particle board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12823 : 1990 (IS 3087:2005).

2. All prelaminated medium density fibre (MDF) board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12406: 2003 (IS 14587: 2008)

3. All exposed & balancing laminates should be 0.6-0.8mm thick.

4. All metals used should be CRCA or Aluminium unless otherwise specified.

5. All CRCA or Aluminium should have powder coating of 40-60 micron thick unless otherwise specified.

6. All lipping should be of PVC edging of 2 mm thickness on all edges unless otherwise specified.

7. All Modular furniture/partition shall have adjustable leveler.

8. All color / shade of specified finishes shall be as per Architect’s choice

9. Tenderer shall get approval of samples from NRDA of all BOQ items before manufacturing.

A Modular Workstation WS1 to WS28

Refer VOLUME II, PART II for parameter and requirement of all modular workstations.

General specification of modular workstation

Work Table: Work Table top should be made of Pre laminated particle board of 25 mm thickness with Straight edge. CRCA powder coated cantilever bracket to be used for table top support. The worktop shall be fitted with suitable metal / nylon inserts to take the M6 machine screws that fit the cantilever brackets to the worktop. All table top shall have prelaminated particle board drawer unit with telescopic type sliding rail mounted on the underside of the worktop.

Gable End/sides: Gable end/sides should be made of Pre laminated particle board of 25 mm thickness with Straight edge. Modesty panel: Modesty panel should be made of Pre laminated particle board of 18 mm thickness with Straight edge.

Intermediate support: Additional Intermediate support of 25mm thk prelaminated particle board(supported on floor) or powder coated CRCA bracket to be used for table top support.

Wire manager: Each worktop shall be provided with a wire manager hole of 72 mm diameter, which in turn shall be fitted with a plastic wire manager of approved shade and colour.

Magnetic Board:

1. Magnetic Board should have fabric finish with 25mm thk CRCA/Aluminium powder coated wall frame.

2. Necessary concealed arrangement shall be there for hanging the magnetic board on finished wall surface.

3. Basic cost of fabric for soft board should be Rs 250/meter. Basic cost is inclusive of all taxes, duties & delivery at manufacturer factory.

4. Tenderer shall supply 12 nos magnetic bolts for each magnetic board wherever mentioned


67

Laminate tile on wall: Modular workstation shall have 25mm thk prelaminated particle board skirting above table top with 25mm thk CRCA/Aluminium powder coated wall frame. The laminate tile shall have concealed arrangement for hanging it on finished wall surface. Necessary cutting of laminate tile as per the approved switch socket sizes should be done to fix electrical and data sockets on laminate tile. Side storage unit & back credenza: The top, sides, dividers, shutters and adjustable rack(1 no.) shall be made up of 25mm thk. prelaminated particle board.The doors shall be fitted with special hinges for openable shutter which shall open up to 110 degrees. Fitted with necessary hardware like hinge/sliding rail, shutter handle, magnetic catcher, etc. All shutter should have locking mechanism. The side storage unit shall have sliding shutter and back credenza shall have openable shutter with hinges.

Partition system(tile based) for Modular workstation

1. Partition framework: Frame should be in CRCA/Aluminum & consist of – Vertical channel, Top rail, bottom rail, center transom rail, horizontal pipe assembly, leveler bolt, cable carrier, tile supporter. There should be separate raceway for data & electrical cable laying (horizontal & vertical direction) inside the partition.

2. Edge /trim/cap/cover - Made up of powder coated CRCA/Aluminium.

3. Skirting –Made up of powder coated CRCA/Aluminium.

4. Magnetic Board with fabric finish panel in partition. Basic cost of fabric for soft board should be Rs 250/meter. Basic cost is inclusive of all taxes, duties & delivery at manufacturer factory. Tenderer shall supply 12 nos magnetic bolts for each magnetic board wherever mentioned

5. Laminate tile panel – made up of 8-9mm prelaminate particle board or 4-5mm thk MDF board with edges sealed.

6. Necessary cutting of laminate tile as per the approved switch socket sizes should be done to fix electrical and data sockets on laminate tile.

Note: 1. WORK TABLE TOP & EDGE of WS 9 SHALL BE FINISHED WITH LEATHER LOOK GREENLAM LAMINATE 401 BLACK(AGR) OR EQUIVALENT MAKE

2. Supply and installation of CPU trolley and Keyboard Drawer is not included in the scope of work for modular workstation.

B Loose table TH1 to TH5 and TL1 TO TL4

The top of the table should be of prelaminate particle board (25mm thk.) with 2mm thk. PVC edge binding. The leg & base support should be made up of powder coated CRCA with adjustable leveler.

C Laminate tile in Modular workstation

Providing Laminate tile in Modular workstation shall have 25mm thk prelaminated particle board skirting above table top or boxing on table edges as directed by Engineer-in-charge with 25mm thk CRCA/Aluminium powder coated frame. The laminate tile shall have concealed arrangement for hanging it on finished surface. Necessary cutting of laminate tile as per the approved switch socket sizes should be done to fix electrical and data sockets on laminate tile.

D Magnetic Board with fabric finish

Providing Magnetic Board with fabric finish with 25mm thk CRCA/Aluminium powder coated wall frame. Necessary concealed arrangement shall be there for hanging the magnetic board on finished wall surface with supply of 12 nos magnetic bolts for each magnetic board. Basic cost of fabric for soft board should be Rs 250/meter (inclusive of all taxes, duties & delivery ).

E 75mm thk Partition

Providing 75mm thk Partition Frame of powder coated CRCA fixed to floor/wall& consist of – Vertical channel, Top rail, bottom rail, center transom rail, horizontal pipe assembly, leveler bolt, cable carrier, tile supporter. There should be separate raceway facility for laying of vertical and horizontal racewaysfor data & electrical cable laying (horizontal & vertical direction) inside the partition . Finished both side with made up of 8-9mm prelaminate particle board or 4-5mm thk MDF board with edges sealed. All edges shall be finished with necessary trims and edge caps made up of powder coated CRCA/aluminum. Skirting shall be made up of powder coated CRCA/Aluminium. Necessary cutting of laminate tile as per the approved switch socket sizes should be done to fix electrical and data sockets on laminate tile.

F 4A Size Filing cabinet


68

Providing 4A Size Filing cabinet size-Width=450-500mm, Height=1300-1350mm, Depth: 600-650mm, Construction: Rigid Knock down Construction, Material: CRCA, 0.7 mm Thick (Top, Side & Drawer Front), 0.6 mm Thick (Frames, Drawer- Inside Cover, Side Back Side), 0.5mm Thick (Back, Bottom, Drawer Bottom)Drawer front: Easy to grip Full length Handle recess integrated into Metal Drawer frontsLabel Holder: Snap on type plastic label holder on Drawer Fronts Drawer Size & Files type: 1. For hanging ‘Ezee’ / ‘Visa’ files (Foolscap) from front to back (Files Along the Width)2. No. of 20 mm thk file which can be hanged in above way per drawer is 28.Locking & anti-tipping arrangement: Centralized locking with 10 lever Cam Lock & having anti-tipping arrangement to ensure that when one drawer is opened for use, it does not allow other drawers to be opened.Slide: High quality precision ball slide. Accessories: 1. Drawer Partition2. Cradle for hanging A4 file folders front to back.Finish: Powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10).

G CPU trolley

All CPU trolleys (with expandable width) shall be of 1.5 mm thick Steel of approved size and colour. The sheet should be powder coated on all surfaces. The trolley should move on 4 castors with locking mechanism.

H Keyboard Drawer

All keyboard drawer with foldable mouse padded tray shall be of 0.8 mm thick steel of approved size and colour. The trays shall be mounted on telescopic channels of ball bearing type mounted on the underside of the worktop.

I Name tag

All name tag shall be made up of acrylic sheet with slide in facility of paper name card of size = 75mm x 175mm. The Name tag shall be fixed to workstations by bothside adhesive tape (3M equivalent make)


69

SECTION II PARAMETER & REQUIREMENT

size

ga

be

l e

nd

/sid

e (

No

.)

ba

ck p

an

el

(No

.)

mo

de

sty

pa

ne

l (N

o.)

po

stfo

rm t

ab

le t

op

ed

ge

(Y

/N)

Wir

e m

an

ag

er

(No

.)

ke

y b

oa

rd (

No

.)

CP

U t

roll

ey

(N

o.)

Sta

tio

na

ry D

raw

er:

10

0m

m(H

) X

45

0m

m(D

)

WS1 1 1500(L) x 750(D) 2 1 N 2 300 (L)

WS2 1 1500(L) x 750(D) 2 1 N 2 1 1 750(L) 1500 (L)450(L) under the

table storage

WS3 1 1800(L) x 750(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 450 (L)

WS4 1 1800(L) x 600(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 450 (L) 1500 (L) 900(L)

WS5 1 1500(L) x 600(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 300 (L) 750(L) 1500 (L) 900(L)

WS6 1 1500(L) x 750(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 300 (L) 900(L) 1650 (L) 900(L)

WS7 1 1500(L) x 800(D) 2 1 Y 1 1 1 300 (L) 900(L) 2150 (L) 900(L) 1050(L)

WS8 1 1500(L) x 800(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 300 (L) 900(L) 2150 (L) 900(L) 1800(L)

WS9 1 2400(L) x 1000(D) 2 1 Y 1 1 1 450 (L) 1500(L) 2750 (L) 1500(L) 3800(L)

WS10 1 2100(L) x 900(D) 2 1 Y 1 1 1 450 (L) 1350(L) 2600 (L) 1350(L) 2750(L)

WS11 1 1800(L) x 800(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 450 (L) 900(L) 2150 (L) 900(L) 2500(L)

WS12 1 2400(L) x 1000(D) 2 1 Y 1 1 1 450 (L) 1350(L) 2600 (L) 1350(L) + 2600(L) 1950(L)

WS13 1 1200(L) x 600(D) 1 N 1 1 1 300 (L)

WS14 2 2 no. x 1500(L) x 600(D) 2 2 N 2 2 2 300 (L) 2nos. X 900(L) P1, 1500(L)

WS15 2 2 no. x 1500(L) x 600(D) 2 N 2 2 2 300 (L) 2nos. X 900(L) P1, 3000(L)




WS19 4 4 no. x 1500(L) x 600(D) 4 N 4 4 4 300 (L) 4nos. X 900(L) P1, 3000(L) + 3000(L)


WS21 2 2 no. x 2400(L) x 800(D) 2 2 Y 2 2 2 300 (L) 2nos. X 900(L) 2nos. X 1950(L) P2, 2150(L)

WS22 1 1800(L) x 800(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 450 (L) 900(L) 2150 (L) 900(L) 2400(L)

WS23 1 2400(L) x 1000(D) 2 1 Y 1 1 1 450 (L) 1350(L) 2600 (L) 1350(L) 1800(L)

WS24 1 1500(L) x 800(D) 2 1 N 1 1 1 300 (L) 900(L) 2150 (L) 900(L) 1950(L)

WS25 1 2400(L) x 1000(D) 2 1 Y 1 1 1 450 (L) 1350(L) 2600 (L) 1350(L) + 1700(L) 2950(L)

WS26 1 1 no. X 1800(L) x 800(D) 1 1 Y 1 1 1 300 (L) 1350(L) 2600 (L) 1350(L) 1350(L) P2, 2600(L)

WS27 2 2 no. X 1800(L) x 800(D) 2 2 Y 2 2 2 450 (L) 1350(L) 2600 (L) 1350(L) 1350(L) P2, 2600(L)

WS28 1 1 no. x 2400(L) x 800(D) 1 1 Y 1 1 1 450 (L) 1350(L) 2600 (L) 1350(L) 2400(L) P2, 2600(L)

VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION, PART II

Name of Work :- Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of modular workstation (Modular office

Furniture) for Ancillary A&B, Ministry and Secretary blocks of State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur.

NIT No.: 548/Engg.Section/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 26.4.11

MODULAR WORKSTATION - PARAMETER & REQUIREMENT

NOTE: FOR WORKSTATION - WS9 - WORK TABLE TOP & EDGE SHALL BE FINISHED WITH LEATHER LOOK GREENLAM LAMINATE 401 BLACK(AGR) OR EQUIVALENT MAKE

Laminate

tile on wall

150 mm(H)

side storage unit

450mm(D)

x

730mm-750mm(H)

back credenza

450mm(D)

x

730mm-750mm(H)

partition

P1 = 900 - 1050mm(H)

P2 =1200 - 1350mm(H)

Dwg. Code

No

. o

f p

ers

on

use

r

Work Table

Magnetic

board

450mm(H)


70

Dwg. Code

No

. o

f p

ers

on

3 nos. 6A x 230 volt

5pin socket outlet

point controlled by 1

no. 10/16A switch

for UPS, fixed above

table on partition

(No.)

2 nos. 6A x 230 volt 5

pin socket outlet


no. 10A switch for

raw power, fixed

above table on

partition (No.)

1 no. 6A x 230 volt 5

pin socket outlet


no. 6A switch for raw

power, fixed above

table on partition

(No.)

Dual port style face plate I/O (One port - RJ 45

for data and one port -RJ 45 for voice), fixed

below table on partition (No.)

WS14 2 2 2 2

WS15 2 2 2 2

WS16 2 2 2 2

WS17 3 3 3 3

WS18 4 4 4 4

WS19 4 4 4 4

WS20 6 6 6 6

WS21 2 2 2 2 2

WS26 1 2 1 1 2

WS27 2 4 2 2 4

WS28 1 2 1 1 2

ELECTRICAL AND NETWORKING REQUIREMENT OF MODULAR WORKSTATION

VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION, PART III

NIT No.: 548/Engg.Section/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 26.4.11Name of Work :- Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of modular

workstation (Modular office Furniture) for Ancillary A&B, Ministry and Secretary blocks of State

Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur.


71

SECTION III LIST OF APPROVED MAKE/MANUFACTURER OF MATERIALS

1. Prelaminate particle board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12823:1990 (IS 3087:2005) E. Novapan Industries Ltd.

F. Bhutan Board

G. Archid Ply

H. Merino

2. Prelaminated medium density fibre (MDF) board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12406: 2003 (IS 14587: 2008) E. Duratuff ( Manglam timber)

F. Green Ply

G. Archid Ply

H. Merino

3. Aluminium D. Hindalco

E. Nalco

F. Jindal

4. CRCA / Steel F. Tata Steel

G. Bhushan Steel

H. Uttam Galva

I. Jindal

J. SAIL

5. Hardware E. Ebco

F. Hettich

G. Haffele

H. Dorma

6. Fabric D. Response

E. Ashadeep

F. Noble


72

Name of Work:- Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing and commissioning of COMPACTORS, LIBRARY RACKS, TABLE, MODULAR STORAGE CABINETS & SLOTED ANGLE ADJUSTABLE STORAGE RACKS FOR State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur..- MOD-3

Work Order No: Work Order No:1588/ MOD-3/Engg. Section/NRDA/2011-12,, Raipur, dated: 26 /11/2011Contract Agreement No: 35/ SSB/Mod-3/PW/B/4-4 /NRDA/2011-12 Raipur, dated: 24/11/2011. [Kompress (India) Pvt. Ltd. 39/202, Maryland Corner Sion (E) Mumbai]

SECTION 1: VOLUME II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

NIT No.: 1261/MOD-3/Engg.Section/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 27.8.2011 NAME OF WORK: DESIGNING, MANUFACTURING, SUPPLYING, ASSEMBLING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF

COMPACTORS, LIBRARY RACKS, TABLE, MODULAR STORAGE CABINETS & SLOTED ANGLE ADJUSTABLE STORAGE RACKS FOR STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING AT CAPITOL COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR.

Contractor shall display specified items during mockup.

Contractor shall take approval of all finishes for color/shade before submitting samples for approval.

Contractor shall submit all samples, workshop drawings and test certificates for approval from NRDA for each item before manufacturing.

1 COMPACTOR Compactor shall consists of storage units fixed or movable – bolted to Undercarriage which rolls onto the channels, which, are firmly embedded to the ground. Rigid Knock Down construction.

The 2 and 3 Bay compactor shall move on a pair of channels.

Compactor Drive type – 2 and 3 Bay TYPE- D2, knock down drive type. Movement of units shall be achieved mechanically through a PU Drive wheel and ‘Sprocket-Chain- Tensioner’ arrangement mounted rigidly onto body side. Each movable undercarriage shall be provided with 2 Rollers on the shaft for driving, 2 antifriction ball bearing for rolling and 4 antifriction ball bearing for guiding between rail.

Main Body Construction 1. Rigid Knock Down construction made out of 0.8 thk. CRCA Steel conforming to IS: 513

2. Each body block (SS/SL/TM) building shall consists of 1 Main unit & then one no. Add-on unit.

3. Each unit shall have 5 loading levels formed by 4 nos. adjustable shelves.

4. Body units are to be bolted to undercarriage.

5. Each storage unit shall have individual hinged doors with locking system and made of 0.8thk CRCA steel confirming to IS: 513. Hinged door have recessed Die cast Handle cum lock giving 3 way locking through a lever & shooting bolts. Each individual stoarge unit shall have label holder for displaying name tag.

Shelf Construction: 1. Shelf shall be made up of 0.8 thk CRCA steel conforming to IS: 513

2. Its max load bearing capacity shall be more than 70Kg uniformly distributed.

3. Shelves are to be mounted on support brackets & shelf level can be adjusted

4. There shall be 4 adjustable shelves per body giving 5 loading levels.

Main Body and shelf finish: 1. Antirust surface treatment shall be given to the bodies and shelves

2. Final finish shall be of epoxy polyester powder coating of approved color & shade with a Dry Film Thickness of minimum 40 microns.

Undercarriage Construction: The Undercarriage is a welded frame made of HR sheet conforming to IS:10748 suitably fabricated to take the loads based on configuration. Undercarriage Finish:The undercarriage, after pre-treatment, shall be coated with final finish consisting of epoxy polyester powder coat of approved color & shade with a Dry Film Thickness of minimum 40 microns. Centralized Locking: A Centralized locking arrangement shall be provided onto back of Single Last unit so that it gets locked on channels when all the units are brought together. The handle lock shall be placed at suitable height. Each Drive type units shall have Locking Knob near the Drive wheel for manual locking of individual units when a person is using those units. Knob shall be rotated to unlock position when units are to be moved. After the unit is moved, before entering into aisle for accessing, this knob shall be rotated to lock position. End stoppers are provided at the end of channels to prevent derailment.

Guide Channels:It shall consists of ‘J’ section HR sheet & square bright bar. Fasteners: The nuts & bolts are to be galvanized / blackodized / Zn Plated.

Label Holder:It shall be made from clear transparent Acrylic sheet.


73

SECTION 1: VOLUME II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NIT No.: 1261/MOD-3/Engg.Section/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 27.8.2011

NAME OF WORK: DESIGNING, MANUFACTURING, SUPPLYING, ASSEMBLING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF COMPACTORS, LIBRARY RACKS, TABLE, MODULAR STORAGE CABINETS & SLOTED ANGLE ADJUSTABLE STORAGE RACKS FOR STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING AT CAPITOL COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR.

Colour finish: All colour finish and shade shall be approved by NRDA before manufacturing.

Height of Compactor from floor level = 2100mm ( 1950mm body ht. + ht. of undercarriage + ht. of channel system). Aisle Width = 900mm. 1.1 Storage Unit (Body) sizes:

1. Single Static (SS), 2 Bay

Main = 750mm(L) x 450mm(D) x 1950mm(H)

Add On = 1 no. x 750mm(L) x 450mm(D) x 1950mm(H)

Main + Add on = 1500mm(L) x 450mm(D) x 1950mm(H)

2. Single Last (SL), 2 Bay




3. Twin Mobile(TM), 2 Bay, 2 body back to back, both side accessable




1.2 Storage Unit (Body) sizes: 1. Single Static (SS), 3 Bay




2. Single Last (SL), 3 Bay




3. Twin Mobile(TM), 3 Bay, 2 body back to back, both side accessable




2 RACKS 2.1 CR1

Both side accessable open rack for library

Size: 900mm(L) x 600mm(D) x 1900mm(H). The height shall be inclusive of skirting. Construction: Rigid knockdown construction. Back panel shall be upto bottom of third rack for additional rigidity. Material: 1. Racks, Back Panel & Skirting shall be CRCA 0.8mm thickness of approved make and finish.

2. Side panels shall be 25mm thk. prelamianted particle board (wood based only) of exterior grade as per IS 12823:1990 (IS 3087:2005). All exposed & balancing laminates should be 0.6-0.8mm thick. All lipping should be of PVC edging of 2 mm thickness on all edges.

Finish: Colour finish of laminate shall be as per the approval of NRDA .Metal panels shall be Epoxy Polyester Powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10). The colour finish of metal panel shall be as per NRDA approval. Number of racks: There shall be bottom plus four fixed racks on each side (Total 10 Loading levels). For stiffening of the racks beading shall be provided. Uniformly Distributed Load Capacity per each full shelf shall be 80 Kg maximum. Contractor shall submit test certificates to confirm maximum UDL capacity of rack. Rack back stiffener: At the rear side of the racks back stiffeners shall be provided. These shall support books on the rear side & also act as divider between front & rear books in upper two compartments.


74



Label holder: Label Holder shall be made from clear transparent Acrylic sheet and fixed at each loading levels for identification.

2.2 CR2 One side accessable closed metal rack (Bookcase) for library

Size: 900mm (W) x 320 mm (D) x 1800 mm (H), 4 nos. Door. The height shall be inclusive of skirting. Construction & Material: Rigid Knock down construction. The whole body incliuding door shall be made up of CRCA Steel - Panels & Frame from 0.8 mm thick.

Configuration (Doors): 4 door

Door Features / Locking: Each Door shall be fitted with 10 Lever Cam lock with common key. Each Door shall have 3 mm Thk transparent glass for clear inside vision secured in a Metal Frame through rubber gasket Each door shall have a Scissor mechanism for receding inside the top of respective compartment & ensures parallel & smooth movement. Each door shall have Plastic side end caps as Handle which is easy to grip Storage Shelving: Each compartment shall have storage shelf Uniformly Distributed Load Capacity per each shelf shall be 80 Kg maximum. Contractor shall submit test certificates to confirm maximum UDL capacity of rack. Finish: Epoxy Polyester Powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10). The finish colour shall be as per NRDA. Label holder: Label Holder shall be made from clear transparent Acrylic sheet and fixed at each loading levels for identification.

2.3 CR3 and CR4 Both side accessable open rack CR3 for record room

Both side accessable open rack CR4 for Vault room

Size: 900mm(L) x 600mm(D) x 1900mm(H). The height shall be inclusive of skirting. Construction: Rigid knockdown construction. Back panel shall be upto top level. Material: 1. Racks, Back Panel & Skirting shall be CRCA 1.0 mm thickness of approved make and finish.

2. Side panels shall be 25mm thk. prelamianted particle board (wood based only) of exterior grade as per IS 12823:1990 (IS 3087:2005). All exposed & balancing laminates shall be 0.6-0.8mm thick. All lipping shall be of PVC edging of 2 mm thickness on all edges.

Finish: Colour finish of laminate shall be as per the approval of NRDA .Metal panels shall be Epoxy Polyester Powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10). The colour finish of metal panel shall be as per NRDA approval. Number of racks: There shall be bottom plus four fixed racks on each side (Total 10 Loading levels). For stiffening of the racks beading shall be provided. Uniformly Distributed Load Capacity per each full shelf shall be 100 Kg maximum. Contractor shall submit test certificates to confirm maximum UDL capacity of rack. Label holder: Label Holder shall be made from clear transparent Acrylic sheet and fixed at each loading levels for identification.

2.4 Personal Locker Unit, CR5

Size- 380mm (W) X 450MM (D) X 1830mm (H) DMX Drg- PL13-A4-33797, R1- 4 Sheets (Cam Lock) DMX Drg. PL13-A4-36467, R1 – 4 Sheets (Hasp)

Models - 6 Door

Stackability - The add- on units can be stacked width wise to form bank of lockers having common side panel.

Locking - 10 Lever cam lock with lock lever Option of hasp arrangement

Material- CRCA 0.6 mm thickness of approved make and finish.

Construction – Rigid knockdown construction

Shelf - Uniformly Distributed load capacity per each shelf level is 35 kg maximum.

Hal Shelf - Only for 1 Door Model at the top

Hanging Rod – For 1 Door- Below Hat Shelf, For 2 Door- 1 Hanging Rod in both compartment.

Finish - Epoxy Polyester Powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10). The colour finish of metal panel shall be as per NRDA approval.

Handle/Label holder – Aesthetically appealing Snap fit ABS plastic handle. Plastic label holder for identification.


75



Ventilation - Attractive punched pattern for ventilation.

Accessories (Optional) – Stand for 1 wide, 2 wide and 3 wide- 125 mm high (add to unit height) inclusive of Leveler.

2.6 CR7 Metal slotted angle adjustable open rack for all storage rooms.

Size: 900mm (W) x 450 mm (D) x 2100 mm (H). The height shall be inclusive of skirting. Construction. Rigid Knock down construction.

Material: All supporting members for bottom rack, adjustable racks, top and both sides shall be of slotted angles made up of CR steel compliance with IS 573-1963 and 1079-1973 norms. All racks shall be of CRCA sheet . Nuts, bolts and washers shall be electro galvanized in compliance with IS:3655-1966. Finish: All slotted angles and racks (complete metal work) shall be finished with Epoxy Polyester Powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10). The colour finish of metal panel shall be as per NRDA approval. Number of racks: There shall be fixed bottom rack plus four adjustable racks (5 loading levels). Uniformly Distributed Load Capacity per each full shelf shall be 100 Kg maximum. Contractor shall submit test certificates to confirm maximum UDL capacity of rack. In eack rack 2 nos. 440x150mm CRCA plate shall be provided with necessary nut & bolts. Label holder: Label Holder shall be made from clear transparent Acrylic sheet and fixed at each loading levels for identification.

3 CAFÉ TABLE 3.1 Café table for Secretary block

Table top shall be made up of 12mm thk. toughened glass with all edges polished and 1 inch bevelled.

The base of the table shall be made up of 0.8 mm thk brushed finished stainless steel square or round section bar as per dwg. There shall be heavy duty rubber buffer under the legs touching the floor.


76

SECTION II LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIAL/AGENCIES

Only one of the under mentioned makes of equipment/materials will be acceptable. Although the acceptable makes are given, the contractor shall submit samples of all materials (other than heavy equipment) and obtain approval of NRDA for the make of each item before ordering the same. This condition is also applicable to all items equipment/materials for which makes are not given in these specifications. Tender price shall be applicable to all the makes of equipment/materials indicated in the list. Selection of equipment/material before procurement shall be got approved from the Chief Engineer, NRDA. Sl. No.

Item Make/Agency

1 Prelaminated particle board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12823:1990

Archid Ply, Bhutan Board, Century, Balaji Action

Tesa, Shirdi ASIS

2 Prelaminated medium density fibre (MDF) board (wood based only) should be of exterior grade as per IS 12406: 2003 (IS 14587: 2008)

Century, Duratuff (Manglam timber), Green Ply,

Archid Ply

3 Laminate (External/ Balancing) Formica, Decolam, Greenlam, Century

4 PU polish Italian ICA, Asian Opel or equivalent

5 Malamine polish PC 742 or 743 of Asian paint or approved equivalent make.

6 Oil /Emulsion paint ICI, Asian, Nerolac, Burger

7 Wood Primer Paint ICI, Asian, Nerolac, Burger

8 Glass/Toughened glass/Mirror Modi Guard, Saint Gobai, Pilkington

9 Adhesive Fevicol SH, Araldite of Hindustan Ciba Geigu Ltd, Vamicol or equivalent

10 Preservatives Wood guard, Termiseal, Solignam, Black Japan or approved equivalent make.

11 Screws (Oxidized) Nattlefold, GKW or approved equivalent make.

12 CRCA Steel Tata steel, Bhushan Steel, Uttam Galva, SAIL

13 Aluminium Hindalco, Nalco, Jindal

14 Adhesive for woodwork, Boards, Ply, Laminate work, Veneering

Fevicol (SR 998), Fevicol (MARINE)

15 Levellers Win plastic, Narke

16 All Hardwares Dorma, Hafele, Hettich, Blum

17 Wires Finolex, Polycab


77

Name of Work:- Designing, manufacturing, supplying, assembling, testing & commissioning of office chairs and sofas for State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur.- MOD-4 & 05 [Office Chair, Sofa, (PART- 2 BOQ-3 ONLY FOR BALANCE CHAIRS)

(1) Work Order No: Wipro Limited, Work Order No: 1678/Int & Fur/Mod-4/ES/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 15 /12/2011 Contract Agreement No. 36/ In t& Fur/Mod-4/ES/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 14/12/2011.

(2) Godrej & Boyce Mfg. Co. Ltd (sofas), Work Order No: 319 /Int&Fur/Mod-4/ES/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 03 /03/2012 Contract Agreement No: 44/ Int&Fur/Mod-4/ES/NRDA/2011-2012,Dated: 29 /2/2012.

(3) Godrej & Boyce Mfg. Co. Ltd ([Mod4- PART- 2 BOQ-3 ONLY FOR BALANCE CHAIRS), Work Order No: 768 /Int&Fur/Mod-4/GC/ES/NRDA/2011-2012, Raipur, dated: 05 /06/2012 Contract Agreement No: 07/ Int&Fur/Mod-4/GC/ES/NRDA/2011-2012, Dated: 01/6/2012.(Part-2 BOQ3 only for Balance Chairs).

(4) Work order No: 1468/Int & Fur/Mod-5/EEC1/NRDA/2012-2013, Raipur, dated: 10/ 10 /2012 Contract Agreement No. 17 /Int&Fur/Mod-5/EEC1/NRDA/2012-2013, Raipur, dated: 10 /10/2012 [Mod-5 Part-1 De Bono Flexcom(I) Ltd]

(5) Work order No: 1470/Int & Fur/Mod-5/EEC1/NRDA/2012-2013, Raipur, dated: 10/ 10 /2012 Contract Agreement No. 18 /Int&Fur/Mod-5/EEC1/NRDA/2012-2013, Raipur, dated: 10 /10/2012 [Mod-5 Part-2 De Bono Flexcom(I) Ltd]

VOLUME II, PART 1 : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Name of Work: Designing, Manufacturing, Supplying, Assembling, Testing & Commissioning of Office Chairs and Sofas for State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur.

REVOLVING OFFICE CHAIRS

S.N0.

Technical Specification of different parts of Revolving

office chair with different level of qualities and

parameters

REVOLVING OFFICE CHAIR FOR

STAFF VISITOR CONFERENCE

RCS1 RCS2 RCS3 RCS4 RCS5 RCS6 RCV1 RCV2 RCC1 RCC2 RCC3

All chairs shall be designed ergonomically following international standards. All chairs shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per BIFMA guidelines.

1 All material of chair 1.1 All material should be used of

relevant ISI specification

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y

1.2 All finishes of materials for all chairs shall be approved by NRDA

Y

1.3 Tenderer shall submit all test certificates of all materials used in chairs

2 Castor

The castors of all chairs should be glass filled, twin wheel castors confirming to BIFMA Standards X 05.01.2002 tested to perform 1,00,000 cycles with 225 lbs Load

2.1 60mm dia castor wheel Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2.2 50mm dia castor wheel Y Y Y Y

3 Base Pedestal 3.1 BIFMA complaint die cast

alluminium base tested for Y Y Y Y Y Y


78




S.N0.



parameters




load bearing capacity of 1450 kg.

3.2 BIFMA complaint, moulded in black 30% glass –filled nylon base (five legged fitted with 5 nos twin wheel castors) tested for load bearing capacity of 1150 kg and above.

Y Y Y Y Y

4 Gas Lift Mechanism 4.1 BIFMA/DIN complaint CLASS -

3 with displacement of 120mm gas lift (Outer Tube Dia 50mm, Inner Tube diameter 25mm). The Gas lift mechanism should be tested as per BIFMA X 05.01.2002 Standards.

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

5 Seat and Back Rest

The Seat and Back Cushion of the chairs should be pressed on 12mm hot press moulded ply manufactured from plantation wood. The seat cushion of the chair should be made up High Density of 45±2 Kg/m3 polyurethane mould and back cushion should be made up of High Density of 33±2 Kg/m3 polyurethane mould. The hardness of foam shall be 20 kg on hampden machine and 25% compression and it shall be covered with fabric/leatherite. BIFMA complaint seat shall be tested for 1,00,000 cycles of dynamic load of 57kg. BIFMA Complaint Back shall be Tested for 1,20,000 Cycles of 45 kg load. The back and base of chair should be supplied with black polypropylene moulded covers.

5.1 The seat cushion shall be 50mm thick and back cushion shall be 38mm thick

Y Y Y Y Y


79




S.N0.



parameters




polyurethane mould.

5.2 The seat cushion shall be 75mm thick and back cushion shall be 50mm thick polyurethane mould.

Y Y


Y Y Y


Y

6 Upholstery 6.1 Fabric : 100% Polyester,

Weight: min 320GLM, Abrasion: 80,000 , Flammability: BS EN 1021-1 1994 (Cigarette) BS 7176:1995 (Low Hazard), Color Fastness to Light: 5+ [BS 1006 (1990)], Rubbing; Dry: Class 5 and Wet: Class 4.5

Y Y Y Y

6.2 PU Leatherette:

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

1) Quality : Wet PU

2) Thickness : 1 MM +

3) Width: 54"

4)Weight: 550 Grams/Linear Meter

5) Finish Addition: No Separation

6) Flexibility : Low temperature flexible

7) Light Fastness: Rating 5

8) Wet Rubbing : Rating 5

9) Dry Rubbing : Rating 6

10) Swet Rubbing : Rating 5

11) Abrasion : 0.10 CMS Cubes Max

12) Tear Strength: 60 N

13) Breaking Strength : 500 N


80




S.N0.



parameters




7 Mechanism 7.1 BIFMA complaint synchronised

knee tilt mechanism tested for 300000 cycles. Mechanism shall have system for any point multi locking position

Y

7.2 BIFMA complaint synchronised mechanism tested for 300000 cycles. Mechanism shall have system for four point locking position.

Y Y Y Y Y Y

7.3 BIFMA complaint synchronised mechanism tested for 300000 cycles. Mechanism shall have system for one position upright locking.

Y Y Y Y

8 Arm Rest BIFMA complaint djustable armrest shall be tested for 60,000 cycles of 40kg of inclined load at 10deg .

8.1 Armrest material Armrest is a combination of MS tube and PP and should be fitted with PU PAD with Shore "A" hardness (Range 50-55)

8.1.1 MS tube finished in chrome plated

Y Y Y Y Y Y

8.1.2 MS tube finished in black powder coated (40-60 micron thk.)

Y Y Y Y Y

8.2 Armrest adjustability 8.2.1 Armrest with min adjustability

of 75mm for vertical up and down motion and forward and backward motion

Y

8.2.2 Armrest with min adjustability of 75mm for vertical up and down motion

Y Y Y


81




S.N0.



parameters




8.2.3 Ring or T-shape fixed PP armrest

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

9 Head Rest

There shall be separate adjustable head rest fixed on back of chair as per manufacturer specification. The head rest shall be finished with same upholstery of seat and back rest. The head rest shall be cushioned with foam.

Y Y

10 Dimension

Minimum Height of chair ( Inclusive of maximum adjustment of gas lift mechanism ) (MM)

970 1100 1100 1225 1225 1225 1100 1225 1225 970 1100


82


Name of Work: Designing, Manufacturing, Supplying, Assembling, Testing & Commissioning Of Revolving Office Chairs and Sofas for State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur.

NON-REVOLVING CHAIRS

S.N0.

Technical Specification of different parts of Non Revolving chairs with

different level of qualities and parameters

NON-REVOLVING CHAIRS FOR

VISITOR WAITING CONFERENCE CAFÉ

FCV1 FCV2 FCV3 FCW1 & FCW2

FCC1 FCC2 FCCF1 FCCF2

All chairs shall be designed ergonomically following international standards. All chairs shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per BIFMA guidelines.

1 All material of chair 1.1 All material should be used of relevant

ISI specification

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1.2 All finishes of materials for all chairs

shall be approved by NRDA


2 Chair base/leg 2.1 Material

2.1.1 Mild steel tube finished in chrome plated fitted with heavy duty buffers.

Y Y Y Y Y Y

2.1.2 Mild steel tube finished in powder coated (40-60 micron thk.) fitted with heavy duty buffers.

Y Y

2.2 Type/look 2.2.1 S type or cantilever type chair Y Y Y Y 2.2.2 Four legged chair Y Y 2.2.3 Four legged chair with foldable tablet

arm

Y

Tablet arm shall be made up of Prelaminated particle board.

2.2.4 Interconnected seats (two and three seater). Type/look shall be as per manufacturer's specification. Seating System is standing on beam with frame assemblies.

Y

3 Upholstery 3.1 Fabric : 100% Polyester, Weight: min

320GLM, Abrasion: 80,000 , Flammability: BS EN 1021-1 1994 (Cigarette) BS 7176:1995 (Low Hazard), Color Fastness to Light: 5+ [BS 1006 (1990)], Rubbing; Dry: Class 5 and Wet: Class 4.5

Y Y Y Y

3.2 PU Leatherette:

Y Y Y 1) Quality : Wet PU

2) Thickness : 1 MM +


83


Name of Work: Designing, Manufacturing, Supplying, Assembling, Testing & Commissioning Of Revolving Office Chairs and Sofas for State Secretariat Building at Capitol Complex, Naya Raipur.

NON-REVOLVING CHAIRS

3) Width : 54"

4) Weight : 550 Grams/Linear Meter

5) Finish Addition : No Separation

6) Flexibility : Low temperature flexible

7) Light Fastness : Rating 5

8) Wet Rubbing : Rating 5

9) Dry Rubbing : Rating 6

10) Swet Rubbing : Rating 5

11) Abrassion : 0.10 CMS Cubes Max

12) Tear Strength : 60 N

13) Breaking Strength : 500 N

4 Seat and Back Rest 4.1 The seat cushion shall be 50mm thick

and back cushion shall be 38mm thick polyurethane mould with water fall edge design.

Y Y

4.2 The seat cushion shall be 75mm thick and back cushion shall be 50mm thick polyurethane mould with water fall edge design.

Y Y Y Y

4.3 The seat and back rest shall be made up of exposed perforated chrome plated Mild steel. The center area of the back rest and seat shall be covered with PU foam with leatherette upholstered.

Y

4.4 The seat and back shall be virgin moulded plastic with lumbar support

Y

5 Arm Rest Armrest is a combination of MS tube and PP and should be fitted with PU PAD with Shore "A" hardness (Range 50-55)

5.1 MS tube finished in chrome plated Y Y Y Y Y 5.2 MS tube finished in black powder

coated (40-60 micron thk.) Y Y

6 Dimension

Minimum Height of chair(MM) 800 850 800 800 800 850 800 850


84

NIT No.: 5010 /Int&Fur/Mod-5/EEC1/NRDA/2012-2013, Raipur, dated: 25/8/2012

Name of work:DESIGNING, MANUFACTURING, SUPPLYING, ASSEMBLING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF OFFICE CHAIRS FOR STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING AT CAPITOL COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR.

S.N0. Technical Specification of different parts of

Modular revolving office chair with different level of qualities and parameters

Chair

RCS5 FCV3 RCC5

1 2 3 4 5 1 All material of chiar

1.1 All material should be used of relevant ISI specification

1.2 All finishes of materials for all chairs shall be approved

by NRDA


2 Castor The castors of all chairs should be glass filled, twin wheel castors confirming to BIFMA Standards X 05.01.2002 tested to perform 1,00,000 cycles with 225 lbs Load

2.1 50mm dia castor wheel Y NA Y 3 Gas Lift Mechanism

3.1 BIFMA/DIN complaint CLASS -3 Gas lift and mechanism should be tested as per BIFMA X 05.01.2002 Standards.

Y NA Y

4 Upholstery 4.1 Leather- The seat & Back are made up of 1.2 cm thick

hot pressed plywood upholstered with leather for touch points & moulded PU foam. (back side can be upholstered with leatherite)

NA Y NA

5.1 Seat and Back Rest The Seat Cushion of the chairs should be pressed on 12mm hot press moulded ply or Plastic seat cover. The seat cushion of the chair should be made up High Density of 45±2 Kg/m3 polyurethane mould. The hardness of foam shall be min 20 on hampden machine and 25% compression and it shall be covered with fabric/leather . BIFMA complaint seat shall be tested for 1,00,000 cycles of dynamic load of 57kg. BIFMA Complaint Back shall be Tested for 1,00,000 Cycles of 45 kg load.

Y Y Y

5.2 The Back should be made up of injection moulded frame upholstered with mesh fabric. There should be limbar support for extra comfort.

Y NA Y

6 Base Pedestal 6.1 BIFMA complaint die cast alluminium base tested for

load bearing capacity of 1120 kg. Y NA NA

6.2 BIFMA complaint, moulded in black 30% glass –filled nylon base (five legged fitted with 5 nos twin wheel castors) .

NA NA Y

6.3 Understructure to be made up of MS ERW Elliptical tube powder coated in silver metallci gray colour NA Y NA


85

7 Mechanism 7.1 BIFMA complaint synchro tiltmechanism tested for

300000 cycles. Mechansim shall have system for locking.

Y NA Y

8 Arm Rest BIFMA complaint djustable armrest shall be tested for 60,000 cycles of 40kg of inclined load at 10deg . Y NA Y

8.1 Armrest material Armrest top is soft PU mounted on injection moulded plastic with height adjustability

Y NA Y

9 Head Rest There shall be separate head rest fixed on back of

chair as per manufacturer specification.The head rest shall be cushioned with height and angle adjustment for optimim user comfort

Y NA Y

10 Dimension Minimum Height of chair ( Inclusive of maximum adjustment of gas lift mechanism ) (MM)

1100 800 1100

11 Required Model Leoma HB or equivalent

Halo Visitor or equivalent

Crest MB or equivalent

A COMMITTEE OBSERVATION OF PRODUCED MOCKUP OF Godrej

Mockup for this chair is found as per specification.



B COMMITTEE OBSERVATION OF PRODUCED MOCKUP OF De Bono

Mockup for this chair is NOT found

as per specification.


Mockup for this chair is NOT found as per

specification.


86



SOFAS

All sofas shall be designed ergonomically following international standards-

1 SOFAS REFERENCE INDICATIVE PICTURE The rate shall be inclusive of +/- 5% deviation in sofa sizes.

The tenderer shall produce all workshop dwgs during the mockup.

The final selected tenderer shall produce all workshop dwgs for approval from NRDA before manufacturing.

All finishes (colour and shade) shall be as per approval of NRDA.

1.1 TYPE 1, SINGLE SEATER

Size of single seater = 1075mm width x 900mm depth x 830mm height

Height of legs = 50mm height made up of First class teak wood

Upholstery of Microfibre with Polyester laminates with a frame material used by Klin dried wood Seat Foam : Slab stock foam with recron layer. Also bonded foam used as a supporting material beneath slab stock, having a foam density of 34kg /cum . Back foam slab made of Slab stock foam with recon fill at back and arms with a density of 34Kg/cubic m and the webbing material used is S- spring along with nylon strips. All wood used inside sofa shall be second class teak wood.

1.2 TYPE 2, SINGLE SEATER, DOUBLE SEATER AND THREE SEATER


Size of double seater = 1500mm width x 920mm depth x 945mm height

Size of three seater = 2015mm width x 920mm depth x 945mm height

Height of legs = 100mm height made up of stainless steel

Upholstery of synthetic leather Polyester fiber wadding 175 GSM (18 mm). PU foam of 32d,28d,23d in various position with expanded PF sheet for load distribution in Seats. Durable rubber webbing of 50mm & 70mm. Cotton webbing on wooden surface to prevent sharp edges. Commercial ply of 12 to 15 mm shall be used as per design requirement. Second class teak wood of various thickness and length, duly dried as base structure and all structure are joined with stapling. S- spring along with nylon strips shall be used.

1.3 TYPE 3, SINGLE SEATER, DOUBLE SEATER AND THREE SEATER



Size of three seater = 1680mm width x 790mm depth x 740mm height

Height of legs = 100mm height made up of stainless steel


87



SOFAS


1.4 TYPE 4, DOUBLE SEATER


Height of legs = 50mm height made up of First class teak wood


1.5 TYPE 5, SINGLE SEATER COUCH

Size of recliner= 1500mm width x 1000mm depth x 900mm height .



88

VOLUME II, PART 4 : REFERENCE INDICATIVE PICTURE OF CHAIRS


SNO. Description Indicative Pictures

1 REVOLVING OFFICE CHAIRS

Refer Volume II, Part 1 for Technical Specification.

1.1 STAFF

1.1.1 RCS1

1.1.2 RCS2

1.1.3 RCS3

1.1.4 RCS4


89



1.1.5 RCS5

1.1.6 RCS6

1.2 VISITOR

1.2.1 RCV1

1.2.2 RCV2

1.3 CONFERENCE


90



1.3.1 RCC1

1.3.2 RCC2

1.3.3 RCC3

2 NON REVOLVING CHAIRS

Refer Volume II, Part 2 for Technical Specification.

2.1 VISITOR

2.1.1 FCV1


91



2.1.2 FCV2

2.1.3 FCV3

2.2 WAITING

2.2.1 FCW1/FCW2

2.3 CONFERENCE

2.3.1 FCC1


92



2.3.2 FCC2

2.4 CAFÉ

2.4.1 FCCF1

2.4.2 FCCF2

SECTION II

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIAL/AGENCIES Only one of the under mentioned makes of equipment/materials will be acceptable. Although the acceptable makes are given, the contractor shall submit samples of all materials (other than heavy equipment) and obtain approval of NRDA for the make of each item before ordering the same. This condition is also applicable to all items equipment/materials for which makes are not given in these specifications. Tender price shall be applicable to all the makes of equipment/materials indicated in the list. Selection of equipment/material before procurement shall be got approved from the Chief Engineer, NRDA. Sl. No.

Item Make/Agency

1 Revolving Office Chairs BIFMA standard.

2 Non-Revolving Office Chairs BIFMA standard.

3 Sofas BIFMA standard.

4 Timber Teak wood (CP-central province)- 1st quality

5 Hardwood Best quality Salwood

6 Plywood (exterior grade) confirming to BWR IS 303

Century, Duro, Merino, Green, Archidply

7 Fabric Response, Ashadeep, Noble or approved equivalent make.

8 Fabric Protection coating for Upholstery Fabguard of Dove Corporation Scotchguard, Birla 3M Ltd.

9 Foam Geo foam, Dunlop, Kurlon or approved equivalent make.


93

Name of Work: PROVIDING & FIXING OF SIGNAGES AND NAME PLATES FOR STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING AT CAPITOL COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR.

References: Work Order No. : 772 /SIGNAGE-SSB/ES/NRDA/2012, Raipur, Dated: 5/6/2012 Contract Agreement No. 06

/SIGNAGE-SSB/ES/NRDA/2012, Raipur, dated: 5 /5 /2012.

VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (PART 1)

NAME OF WORK: DESIGNING, MANUFACTURING, SUPPLYING, INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF SIGNAGE FOR STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING AT CAPITOL COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR.

NAYA RAIPUR DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY(NRDA), RAIPUR, CHHATTISGARH

NIT No.: 359/SIGNAGE-SSB/ES/NRDA/2012, Raipur, dated: 13.3.2012

Note:

1 All items shall be Supplied, fitted and fixed at specified locations including all materials, labours, tools, equipments complete in all respect as per the direction and satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge/ NRDA.

2 All items shall be duly approved by Engineer-in-charge/ NRDA before installation.

3 Proper care shall be taken at the time of installation of signage like level, alignment, etc.

4 Dimension of each signage may vary +/- 10% according to the content.

5 Rate of each item shall be quoted including all hardware required for fixing the Signage plate at specified location. All rate shall be inclusive of taxes, delivery, etc complete.

6 Each item shall be read along with respective technical specification of VOL II.

Sl. no.

Item Codes Type/ Description

T 1 RNP, MRNP, CFSP, TSP, MSP, CFRSP, TTNP, RN Shall be fixed on Doors with S.S. Mirror Finish screws and Studs of specified sizes including all necessary hardwares, labours, matrials, tools etc. complete as per the direction of Engineer-In-Charge/NRDA.

T1.a Technical Specification: General and Fixing

1 Acrylic sheet shall be of prescribed standard

2 Finish of Acrylic sheet shall have absolute crystal clear finish(complete trasperant)

3 Thickness of Acrylic sheet shall be variable as mentioned in BOQ

4 Fabrication of all acrylic specially corner cutting has to be of 90 degree, the level shall be confirmed by leveler

5 Cutting of aluminium composite panels (ACP) shall be done with immaculate precision

6 Film on Acrylic sheet shall be pasted with perfection

7 Film on ACP shall be pasted with perfection

8 Print on film shall be eco-solvent and of 1200 DPI.

9 Print content shall be supplied by NRDA and shall be strictly followed

10 Language of Print Content shall be Hindi/English

11 Colour of print content shall be Black.

12 All items used shall be of ISI standards and of approved brand and make.

13 Adhesive tapes to be used shall be of ISI standard and of approved brand and make.


94

14 For signage type RN (Room Number Plate), the S.S.Sheet (as per specification SS 304) shall be used. It shall be of brushed finish of 2mm thickness. This type of Signage Plate shall have Black Embossed Lettering on it.

15 S.S. Metal studs shall be of ISI standard and of approved brand and make.

16 Hanging chains shall be of ISI standard and of approved brand and make.

17 Holes in all the above cases shall be made with sophisticated drilling machines maintaining perfect allignment, preicsion and care.

18 All necessary care shall be taken while fixing the Signage on door/ wall or hanging it from ceiling.

T1.b Technical Specification: Materials/Hardwares

T1.b.1 Acrylic Sheet

Type Cast, Solid, Bubble free

Colour Clear/ Colourless

Thickness 4.5 to 5 mm

Resistance to impact High Impact

Preferred Make GE, Plexiglass, Mitsubishi or approved equivalent

T1.b.2 S.S Mirror Finish Screws

Size/Dia As required/ As approved

Preffered Make As per approved sample

T1.b.3 S.S Studs Size/Dia 12mm dia 19mm length

Preffered Make As per approved sample

T1.b.4 Self Adhesive Clear View Cast Vinyl Graphic Film

Type Self adhesive cast vinyl film


Thickness 0.07 mm

Warrenty 2 years (outdoor), 5 years (indoor)

Preffered Make 3M Clear Graphic Film (IJ8150) approved equivalent

T1.b.5 Aluminium Composite Panel

Colour Brushed Silver

Overall Thickness 4 mm

Skin thickness 0.25mm to 0.5 mm

Preferred Make Alstrong, Alubond, Aludecor or approved equivalent

T1.b.6 S.S. Sheet Finish Brushed


Quality SS 304

Preferred Make Tata Steel, Bhushan Steel, SAIL or approved euivalent

Sl. no.

Item Codes Type/ Description


95

T 2 WSP, WRNSP, OSP, ESP, LSSP, DWSP, RSP, BFSP, SCSP, FDS, MFDS

Shall be fixed on Walls with S.S. Mirror Finish screws and Studs of specified sizes/ Wrought Iron bracket of approved design/hung from Ceiling with Hanging Chain including all necessary hardwares, labours, matrials, tools etc. complete as per the direction of Engineer-In-Charge/NRDA.

T 2.a Technical Specification: General and Fixing

1 Acrylic sheet shall be of prescribed standard.

2 Finish of Acrylic sheet shall have absolute crystal finish.

3 Thickness of Acrylic sheet shall be variable as mentioned in BOQ.

4 Fabrication of all acrylic specially corner cutting has to be of 90 degree, the level shall be confirmed by leveler.

5 Cutting of aluminium composite panels (ACP) shall be done with immaculate precision.

6 Film on Acrylic sheet shall be pasted with perfection.

7 Film on ACP shall be pasted with perfection.

8 Print on film shall be eco-solvent and of 1200 DPI.

9 Print content shall be supplied by NRDA and shall be strictly followed.

10 Language of Print Content shall be Hindi/English.

11 Colour of print content shall be Black.

12 All items used shall be of ISI standards and of approved brand and make.

13 Adhesive tapes to be used shall be of ISI standard and of approved brand and make.

14 S.S. Metal studs shall be of ISI standard and of approved brand and make.

15 Hanging chains shall be of ISI standard and of approved brand and make.




19 All necessary care shall be taken while fixing the Signage on door/ wall or hanging it from ceiling.

T 2.b Technical Specification: Materials/Hardwares

T 2.b.1

Acrylic Sheet

Type Cast, Solid, Bubble free


Thickness 4.5 to 5 mm

Resistance to impact High Impact

Preferred Make GE, Plexiglass, Mitsubishi or approved equivalent

T 2.b.2

S.S Mirror Finish Screws

Size/Dia As required/ As approved

Preferred Make As per approved sample

T S.S Studs Size/Dia 12mm dia 19mm length


96

2.b.3 Preferred Make As per approved sample

T 2.b.4

Nickel plated Hanging Chain

Type Jack Chain/ Beaded Chain

Length 600/900/1200 mm

Hanging Capacity 500 gms. to 1kg.

Other Hardwares Adhesive mount, 'S' hooks, Sign Edge Stiffners, plustic lugs and all other necessry fittings


T 2.b.5

Wall bracket

Type Wrought iron

Length 300 mm

Other Hardwares All necessary hardware including screws, plustic lugs etc


T 2.b.6

Self Adhesive Clear View Cast Vinyl Graphic Film

Type Self adhesive cast vinyl film


Thickness As per approved make and sample


Preferred Make 3M Clear Graphic Film (Scotchcal: IJ8150) or approved equivalent

T 2.b.7

Aluminium Composite Panel

Colour Brushed Silver


Skin thickness 0.25mm to 0.5 mm

Preferred Make Alstrong, Alubond, Aludecor or approved equivalent

T 2.b.8

Self Adhesive Auto Glow Reflective Vinyl Graphic Film

Type Self adhesive Auto glow vinyl film

Colour As per approved sample

Thickness As per approved make and sample


Preferred Make 3M reflective, SP (Auto Glow) (Scotchlite: 680) or approved equivalent

Note:

1 All items shall be Supplied, fitted and fixed at specified locations including all materials, labours, tools, equipments complete in all respect as per the direction and satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge/ NRDA.

2 All items shall be duly approved by Engineer-in-charge/ NRDA before installation.

3 Proper care shall be taken at the time of installation of signage like level, alignment, etc.

4 Dimension of each signage may vary +/- 10% according to the content.

5 Rate of each item shall be quoted including all hardware required for fixing the Signage plate at specified location. All rate shall be inclusive of taxes, delivery, etc complete.

6 Each item shall be read along with respective technical specification of VOL II.


97

Sl. no. Item Code

Location/Use ACP size (Approx.)

Acrylic size (Approx.)

Area of Film including Printing (Approx) (Sq.mm.)

Tendative Design

Area (Sq.mm)

Area (Sq.mm)

1 RNP Room Name Plate: on doors of respective rooms

44800.00 90000.00 90000.00

2 WSP Waiting area Sign Plate: at waiting areas to be hanged in corridor

117174.00 286200.00 286200.00

3 MRNP Meeting Room Name Plate: on doors of meeting rooms

15750.00 100000.00 100000.00

4 WRNSP Way finding Room Number/ Name Sign Plate:at corridors/ corridor side walls

40005.00 90000.00 90000.00

5 CFSP Cafeteria Sign Plate: on door of Cafeterias

133940.00 270000.00 270000.00

6 TSP Toilet Sign Plate: on doors of toilets

60000.00 105000.00 105000.00

7 OSP Other Services Sign Plate: Exhibition/ Air washer room/ No Smoking etc: to be hanged in corridor/fixed on corridor side wall

49068.00 116500.00 116500.00


98

8 ESP Emergency Sign plate: Fire/Exit/First Aid etc: to be hanged in the corridors.

130980.00 247500.00 247500.00

9 LSSP Lift & Stair Sign Plate: at lift lobbies/ stair lobbies: to be hanged in the corridors/ to be fixed on the wall.

155760.00 291150.00 291150.00

10 DWSP Drinking Water Sign Plate: on walls/ to be hanged in the corridors of drinking water lobbies

133940.00 270000.00 270000.00

11 RSP Ramp Sign Plate: on walls/ to be hanged in corridor beside ramp

155760.00 291150.00 291150.00

12 MSP Maintenance Room Sign Plate: on door of Maintenance Room

14000.00 90000.00 90000.00

13 CFRSP Conference Room Sign Plate: on door of respective room

226000.00 103000.00 103000.00


99

14 TTNP Table Top Name Plate: on table top

N.A. 19600.00 19600.00

15 BFSP Block Finding Sign Plate: at lobbies on walls

126984.00 447300.00 447300.00

16 SCSP Security Pass Sign Plate: at security pass issue counters/ check points to be hanged in corridor/fixed on walls

70330.00 157200.00 157200.00

17 FDS Floor Directory: at lobbies of all floors to be fixed on walls

655800.00 1350000.00 1350000.00

18 MFDS Master Floor Directory: at lobbies of ground floor to be fixed on walls

1626384.00 2700000.00 2700000.00

19 RN Room Number Plate: on doors of identified rooms

S.S. Plate (Brussed

finish) with black

embossed lettering (180

x 60)

N.A. N.A.


100

Project: Consultancy Services for Interior Design Works and Project Management Services of Secretariat Building in Capitol Complex at Naya Raipur

TENTATIVE LIST OF ARTEFACT/HANDICRAFT ITEMS FOR SECRETARIES AND MINISTER BLOCK (GROUND FLOOR)

SL.NO LOCATION CODE

NO USAGES SIZE QTY

1 SECTION ROOM 1/72 to 18/72 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 18

2 O.S.D/UNDER SECRETARYCABIN ROOM 1/36 to 11/36

RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 11

3 CM's LOBBY Room - 1 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 4

4 EXHIBITION AREA - 2 EXSP EXHIBITION SIGN PLATE 450X200 6

5 WAITING AREA 1/33-g to 7/33-g WSP WATING SIGN PLATE 600x450 7

6 OTHER STAFF 1/33-f to 7/33-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 7

7 STAFF 1/32-d to 8/32-d RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 8

8 CABIN ROOM 1/32-a to 8/32-a RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 8

9 PS ROOM 1/33-e to 7/33-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 7

10 ANTE ROOM 1/33 to 7/33-b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 7

11 CONFERENCE ROOM (FOR 60 #) - 1 CFRSP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

12 CONFERENCE ROOM (FOR 60 #) - 1 TTNP TABLE TOP NAME

PLATE 380x80 60

13 WAITING 1-C WSP WATING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

14 CORRIDOR - C1 CSP CORRIDOR SIGN PLATE 450X200 1

15 PWD & PHE STAFF ROOM - 1b RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

16 AE STAFF ROOM - 2f, 2e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 2

17 PWD SUB ENGG ROOM - 1c RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

18 SUB ENGG ROOM - 2d RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

19 SUB ENGG STAFF ROOM - 2c RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

20 SECURITY PASSES ROOM - 2a SPNP SECURITY PASSES ROOM SIGN PLATE

600x300 1

21 ATRIUM 450X200

22 KEY ROOM - 2 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

23 TOILETS,gents/ladies/P.H TSP TOILET SIGN PLATE 500x380 15

24 OTHER SERVICES OSP EXHIBITION,AIR

WASHER,NO SMOKING etc

600x450 25

25 ALL CORRIDOR -way finding RNSP ROOM NOMBER / NAME

SIGN PLATE 450X250 30

26 LIFT & STAIRS LSSP LIFT & STAIRS SIGN

PLATE 600x450 16

27 DRINKING WATER DWSP DRINKING WATER SIGN

PLATE 450X200 8

28 RAMP RSP RAMP SIGN PLATE 500x380 4

29 EMERGENCY ESP FIRE, EXIT, RAMP, FIRST

AID etc 500x380 20

30 LOBBY ENTRY POINT outdoor ULNP OUTDOOR LOBBY NAME

PLATE 900x650 4

31 LOBBY ENTRY POINT LNP LOBBY NAME PLATE 900X650 4

32 SECURITY PASSES /CHEAK POINT SCSP SECURITY CHEAK SIGN

PLATE 600x300 8


101

33 MAINTENANCE MSP MAINTENANCE SIGN

PLATE 450X200 20

34 FLOOR DIRECTORY at all floor FDS FLOOP DIRECTORY

SIGNAGE 1800X1800 4

35 MASTER FLOOR DIRECTORY at all floor MFDS MASTER FLOOP

DIRECTORY SIGNAGE 1800X900 4

Project: Consultancy Services for Interior Design Works and Project Management Services of Secretariat Building in Capitol Complex at Naya Raipur

TENTATIVE LIST OF SIGNAGE ITEMS FOR SECRETARIES AND MINISTER BLOCK (FIRST FLOOR)

SL.NO LOCATION CODE

NO USAGES SIZE QTY

1 SECTION ROOM - 19/72 to 36/72 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 18

2 CABIN ROOM - 12/36 to 22/36 RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 11

3 ACCOUNT SECTION STAFF ROOM -3-a, & CASH COUNTER


4 CLASS ROOM 3b to 3e

5 CHIEF ACCOUNT OFFICER ROOM -4 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

6 STAFF FOR FURNITURE & COMPUTER/ELECTRONICS STORE ROOM -9-b


CABINET/STATE MINISTER

7 ANTE ROOM - 1/12-b to 3/12-b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 3

8 CABIN - 1/12-a to 3/12-b RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 3

9 PS ROOM - 1/12-e to 3/12-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 3

10 PA ROOM - 1/12-f to 3/12-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 3

11 WAITING AREA - 1/12-h to 3/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 3

12 OTHER STAFF - 1/12-g to 3/12-g RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 3

SANSAD SACHIV/ADVISORS/O.S.D.

13 ANTE ROOM - 1'/12-b to 3'/12-b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 3

14 CABIN - 1'/12-a to 3'/12-b RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 3

15 PS ROOM - 1'/12-e to 3'/12-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 3

16 PA ROOM - 1'/12-f to 3'/12-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 3

17 WAITING AREA - 1'/12-h to 3'/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600X450 3

18 OTHER STAFF - 4'/12-g to 5'/12-g RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 2

SPECIAL/JOINT/DEPUTY SEC.

19 CABIN - 9/32-a to 16/32-a RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 8

20 STAFF - 9/32-d to 16/32-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 8

21 A,C,S/P.S/SEC. RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 4


PLATE 450X200 8



25 WAITING AREA - 8/33-g to 15/33-g WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600X450 8




600x450 30

28 EMERGENCY ESP FIRE, EXIT, RAMP, FIRST 500x380 20


102

AID etc

29 ALL CORRIDOR -way finding RNSP ROOM NOMBER SIGN

PLATE 450X250 60


PLATE 600X450 16


PLATE 450X200 7


33 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SIGN

PLATE 450X200 20


SIGNAGE 1800X1800 4

TENTATIVE LIST OF SIGNAGE ITEMS FOR SECRETARIES AND MINISTER BLOCK (SECOND FLOOR)

SL.NO LOCATION CODE

NO USAGES SIZE QTY



3 CABIN ROOM - 11b RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 1

4 WAITING ROOM - 11c WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

5 LIBRARIAN - 10b RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

6 CORRIDOR - C3 RNSP ROOM NOMBER / NAME


7 CONTROL ROOM - 12 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

8 LOBBY ROOM NO-3

9 ANTE ROOM -2-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

10 CONFERENCE ROOM (FOR 40#) - 2 CFRSP CONFERENCE SIGN

PLATE 450X200 2

11 CONFERENCE ROOM (FOR 40#) - 2 TTNP TABLE TOP NAME

PLATE 380x80 40

CORRIDOR - 2-d way finding RNSP ROOM NOMBER / NAME


12 CABINET/STATE MINISTER


PLATE 450X200 3

14 CABIN - 4/12-a to 6/12-b RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 3



17 WAITING AREA - 4/12-h to 6/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 3


SANSAD SACHIV/ADVISORS/O.S.D.


PLATE 450X200 3




23 WAITING AREA - 4'/12-h to 6'/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 3






103

27 A,C,S/P.S/SEC. RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 4


PLATE 450X200 7



31 WAITING AREA - 16/33-g to 22/33-g WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 7

32 OTHER STAFF - 16/33-f to 22/33-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 7




600x450 30


AID etc 500x380 20

36 ALL CORRIDOR - RNSP WAY FINDING ROOM

NOMBER PLATE 450X250 60


PLATE 600x450 16


PLATE 450X200 7



PLATE 450X200 20


SIGNAGE 1800X1800 4

TENTATIVE LIST OF SIGNAGE ITEMS FOR SECRETARIES AND MINISTER BLOCK (THIRD FLOOR)

SL.NO LOCATION CODE

NO USAGES, ON DOOR/WALL

SIZE,mm QTY



3 LOBBY ROOM NO-4

4 CORRIDOR - C4, C-3, RNSP ROOM NOMBER / NAME


CABINET/STATE MINISTER


PLATE 450X200 3

6 CABIN - 7/12-a to 9/12-b RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 3



9 WAITING AREA - 7/12-h to 9/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 3


SANSAD SACHIV/ADVISORS/O.S.D. 450X200


PLATE 450X200 3




15 WAITING AREA - 7'/12-h to 9'/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 3





104


A,C,S/P.S/SEC. RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 4


PLATE 450X200 7



22 WAITING AREA - 23/33-g to 29/33-g WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 7

23 OTHER STAFF - 23/33-f to 29/33-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 7




600x450 30


AID etc 500x380 20


NOMBER PLATE 450X250 60


PLATE 600x450 16


PLATE 450X200 7



PLATE 450X200 20


SIGNAGE 1800X1800 4

TENTATIVE LIST OF SIGNAGE ITEMS FOR SECRETARIES AND MINISTER BLOCK (FOURTH FLOOR)

SL.NO LOCATION CODE

NO USAGES SIZE,mm QTY

1 CABIN 10/12-a,10'/12-a RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 1

2 PS ROOM 10/12-e,1O'/12-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

3 PA ROOM 10/12-f, 1O'/12-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

4 WAITING AREA 10/12-h,10'/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

5 OTHER STAFF ROOM 10/12-g. 10'/12-g RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

6 CABIN 12/12-a, 12'/12-a RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 1

7 ROOM 12/12-e PS, 12/12-f PA RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

8 OTHER STAFF ROOM NO 12'/12-g, 11'/12-g RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 2

9 WAITING AREA12'/12-h, 11'/12-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 2

10 ROOM 11/12-f PA, 11/12-e PS RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

11 CABIN 11'/12-a,11/12-a RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450X200 1

12 ANTE ROOM 10;/12-b,10'/12-b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 1

13 MEETING ROOM 5-j MRNP MEETING ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 2

14 WAITING AREA 5-I WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

15 CORRIDOR C-5 RNSP ROOM NOMBER / NAME


16 TERRACE 5-d

17 CHIEF SECRETARY;S ANTE ROOM 5-b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 1

18 CHIEF SECRETARY;S ANTE CABIN 5-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

19 PS ROOM 5-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1


105

20 PA ROOM 5-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

21 WAITING AREA 5-i WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

22 PS ROOM 33/33-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450x200 1

23 WAITING AREA 33/33-g WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

24 OTHER STAFF ROOM 33/33-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450x200 1

25 CABIN 33/33-a RNP CABIN NAME PLATE 450x200 1

26 ANTE ROOM 33/33-b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 450x200 1

27 CAFETERIA 4-a CFSP CAFETERIA SIGN PLATE 600x450 2










PLATE 450x200 1


PLATE 450x200 1







600x450 30

43 EMERGENCY ESP FIRE, EXIT, RAMP, AID

etc 500x380 20


NOMBER PLATE 450x250 60


PLATE 600x450 16


PLATE 450X200 7



PLATE 450X200 10


SIGNAGE 1800X1800 3

TENTATIVE LIST OF SIGNAGE ITEMS FOR SECRETARIES AND MINISTER BLOCK (FIFTH FLOOR)

SL.NO LOCATION CODE

NO USAGES SIZE QTY

1 ANTE ROOM-7b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 1

2 CM'S CABIN ROOM-7-a RNP CABIN ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 1

3 TERRACE NO-7-d

4 MEETING ROOM NO- 7-j MRNP MEETING ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 2


106

5 MEETING ROOM-7-k MRNP MEETING ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 2

6 VIP LOBBY, 7-m NAME PLATE 450X200 2

7 ROOM PS TO CM 7-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

8 ROOM PA TO CM 7-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

9 ROOM WAITING FOR CM 7-h WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 2

10 ROOM ACS TO CM 8-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

11 ANTE ROOM-8-b ARNP ANTE ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 1

12 ROOM PS TO ACS 8-d RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

13 ROOM PA TO ACS 8-e RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

14 WAITING AREA 8-g WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 450X200 1

15 ROOM PA TO SEC 9-d RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

16 ROOM PS TO SEC 9-c RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

17 ROOM SECRETARY TO CM 9-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

18 WAITING AREA ROOM-10 WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

19 LOBBY 10-c

20 ROOM PA TO JT.SEC 11-d RNP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

21 ROOM JT.SEC TO CM 11-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

22 ROOM DY.SEC.TO CM12-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

23 ROOM PA TO DY.SEC 12 -d RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

24 TERRACE 12-e + 12-c

25 ROOM OSD TO CM 13-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

26 ROOM OSD TO CM 15-a RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

27 ROOM SECTION OFFICER 16 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

28 UNDER SEC. TO CM ROOM 17 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

29 UNDER SEC. TO CM ROOM 18 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

30 MEETING ROOM 7-I MRNP MEETING ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 2

31 Cabinet Meeting Room 24-A MRNP MEETING ROOM NAME

PLATE 450X200 2

32 Waiting Room 24-C WSP WAITING SIGN PLATE 600x450 1

33 Press Conference Room 21 RNP PRESS CONFERENCE

SIGN PLATE 600x450 2

34 PRO Room 20 RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

35 Other Staff Room 7-g RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

36 Other Staff Room Acs to CM 8-f RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

37 Other Staff For Security 9-d RNP ROOM NAME PLATE 450X200 1

38 Security 450X200


40 OTHER SERVICES EXHIBITION,AIR


600x450 30

41 EMERGENCY FIRE, EXIT, RAMP,FIRST

AID etc 500x380 20


NOMBER PLATE 450x250 7


PLATE 600x450 16


PLATE 450X200 7


107



PLATE 450X200 5

FLOOR DIRECTORY at all floor FDS

FLOOP DIRECTORY SIGNAGE

1800X1800 2


108

Name of work: Providing & Fixing Nameplates & Signage under Annual Operation & Maintenance of Mantralaya Mahanadi

Bhawan, Naya Raipur. Reference: Work Order No: 03 / Name Plates/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/CE(E) / NRDA/ 2014-15, Naya Raipur, dated: 01 /01

/2015 CA No. 34/ Name Plates/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/CE(E) / NRDA/ 2014-15 Dtd. 29 /12/2014[. Maa Gayatri Digital, Amapara Raipur ]


109


110

Name of Work:- DESIGNING, SUPPLYING, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM OF STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING AT CAPITOL COMPLEX, NAYA RAIPUR, (CHHATTISGARH)

Work Order No: Contract Agreement No. 09/AV-SSB/ES/NRDA/2012-13 Raipur Dated 22.6.2012 Work Order 859/AV- SSB/ES/NRDA/2012 Raipur 22.6.2012. [AV Science & Technologies Pvt. Ltd.,]

STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING, NAYA RAIPUR, CHHATTISGARH NAYA RAIPUR DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY

VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR CONFERENCE ROOM S1

Note:

1 Final selected vendor shall produce workshop drawing, single line diagram before execution and get it approved from NRDA.

2 Bidder is requested to study this Technical specification along with the BOQ and related drawings.

Sr. No.

Technical Specification Approved Make

Item Feature Parameter

Display Devices A.1 Matrix Display - Video Wall (For Front wall) 92” or above Thin Bezel Matrix

display LG/Samsung/Christie/

Mitshubishi Screen Size (Diagonal): 92" or more (46" or more 2 x 2 matrix)

Panel Type LED Backlit "LCD Panel

Resolution 1920 x 1080

Aspect Ratio : 16:9

Contrast ratio 3000:1

Viewing Angle 178*178

Connectivity RGB,DVI_D ,Display port

Video : Input Component (CVBS Common),HDMI

VS A mount 600*400 mm

RGB : Input/output Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port/ DVI-D

Audio Stereo mini Jack/Stereo mini Jack

External Control RS232C (in / out) thru stereo jack, RJ45

Sync Compatibility: Separate / Composite / Digital

Bezel Width total 6 mm or less

Response Time ( G to G) 7 -10 ms or less

Brightness 600 nit (Typical)

Special Lamp Error Detection, Anti-Image Retention, Temperature Sensor, RS232C/RJ45 MDC, Plug and Play (DDC2B), PIP/PBP, Built-in Video Wall processor (10x10 or more), Portrait Orientation, Button Lock,Smart Scheduling

Safety Certification UL, CSA ,TV

Power Supply AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz


111



Note:



Sr. No.



Power Consumption (Typical/Max.) 200/220W

Power Consumption (Standby) Less than 1W

A.2 Wall Mount Bracket for Matrix Display custom

A.3 46" or above LED Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/Sony

Display Size 46" or above


Brightness 450 CD/m2 or better

Resolution (H x V) : 1,920 x 1,080 pixels

Aspect ratio 16:9

Response Time 3ms or below

Built in Speaker 10 W *2

Color Reproduction 10 bit

Connectivity PC & HDMI 1.3 Connectivity & RS232C (Control/SVC) / DiVX Compatibility Through USB/ LAN Wired/ USB/ Digital Audio Out

USB 2.0 Sould be Capable of playing HD Video contents

A.4 Mounting Bracket for 46 " or above Display Swivel Wall Mount Bracket for 46" or above Display

custom

Video Source Devices

B.1 Architectural Connectivity Extron/AMX/Crestron Ports 1 Cat RJ 45 connector

1 HDMI 1 mini stereo audio Jack 3.5 1 AC port 230 V AC 1 VGA

Furniture Mount Table Top

B.2 Gender Changer for VGA input Extron/AMX/Crestron


112



Note:



Sr. No.



Specification one 15-pin HD Female to Female Gender Changer with One 3.5 mm Stereo Mini Jack

B.3 HDMI input connector Extron/AMX/Crestron Specification One HDMI Female to One HDMI

Female on 10" Pigtail

B.4 Matrix Switcher Extron/AMX/Crestron Video Routing 16 x 8 matrix

Bandwidth 525 MHz (-3 dB), fully loaded

0 - 10 MHz No more than ±0.30 dB

0 - 130 MHz No more than ±0.50 dB

Crosstalk

-92 dB @ 1 MHz

-80 dB @ 5 MHz

-78 dB @ 10 MHz

-75 dB @ 30 MHz

-70 dB @ 100 MHz

Switching speed 200 ns (max.)

Video input Number/signal type 8, 12, or 16 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB,

RsGsBs, HDTV, component video, S-video, composite video

Connectors 16 x 5 female BNC

Video output

Number/signal type 4, 8, 12, or 16 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video, S-video, composite video

Connectors 8 x 5 female BNC

Impedance 75 ohms

Switching type Triple-Action

Sync


113



Note:



Sr. No.



Input type RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs

Output type RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs (follows input)

Polarity Positive or negative (follows input)

Audio — audio models only

Routing 16 x 8 stereo matrix

Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.05 dB

THD + Noise 0.01% @ 1 kHz at nominal level

S/N >105 dB, balanced, at maximum output (21 dBu)

Audio input — audio models only Number/signal type 8, 12, or 16 stereo,

balanced/unbalanced

Connectors (8, 12, or 16) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole

Audio output

Number/signal type 4, 8, 12, or 16 stereo, balanced/unbalanced

Connectors (4, 8, 12, or 16) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole

Control/remote — switcher Serial host control port 1 bidirectional RS-232 or RS-422, rear

panel female 9-pin D connector

1 bidirectional RS-232, front panel 2.5 mm mini stereo jack

Serial control pin configurations

RS-232 9-pin D connector: 2 = Tx, 3 = Rx, 5 = GND

Mini stereo jack: tip = Tx, ring = Rx, sleeve = GND

Ethernet control port 1 female RJ-45 connector

Ethernet data rate 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect

Ethernet protocol ARP, ICMP (ping), IP, TCP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, Telnet

Program control Compatible with windows

Microsoft Internet Explorer, Telnet


114



Note:



Sr. No.



General

Temperature/humidity Storage: -40 to +158 °F (-40 to +70 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing

Operating: +32 to +122 °F (0 to +50 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing

Mounting

Rack mount Yes

Safety CE, c-UL, UL listed

B.5 HDMI Matrix swicther Extron/AMX/Crestron video

routing 8* 4 matrix

signal type digital RGB and DVI digital Signals are supported

Digital video RGB digital video (DVI & HDMI ) or Y, Cr, Cb digital component video (HDMI) should supports all single-link DVI and HDMI

Digital audio Should support HDMI audio transmitted through the RGB and Y, Cr, Cb lines

Data rate 5.5 Gbps or higher (2 Gbps or higher per color)

Standards DVI 1.0, HDMI

Switching speed 180 ns or better

Video input Number/signal type 8 digital RGB ,HDMI or single link DVI

D

Connectors 8 female HDMI type A

Minimum/maximum level 0.5 V to 1.0 Vp-p with no offset

Video output Number/signal type 4 digital RGB


Control/remote — switcher Serial control port RS-232, 9-pin female D connector


115



Note:



Sr. No.



RS-232, front panel 2.5 mm mini stereo jack

Ethernet control port RJ-45 female connector

Ethernet protocol ARP, ICMP (ping), IP, TCP, DHCP, HTTP, Telnet

Power supply Internal

Input: 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz

Power consumption 48 watts, fully loaded 8 x 8 unit


Cooling Inbiult Fan cooling should be provided

B.6 Universal scalar Extron/AMX/Crestron Number/signal type 2 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, component

video (Y, R-Y, B-Y; progressive or HD)

1 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, component (Y, R-Y, B-Y; interlaced, progressive, HD)

S-video, composite video

1 component video (Y, R-Y, B-Y; interlaced), S-video, composite video

1 S-video, composite video

1 single link DVI-D

1 optional SDI, HD-SDI

Resolution range 640x480 to 1920x1200*, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p

VIDEO OUTPUT

Number/signal type 2 buffered scaled RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, or scaled HD component video

1 optional single link DVI-D; HD-SDI; or interlaced component video,S-video, composite video

SYNC

Input type Input type : RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RGBcvS, and component video


116



Note:



Sr. No.



Output type : RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, and component video

CONTROL/REMOTE — SIGNAL PROCESSOR Serial control port 2 RS-232/RS-422 on female 9-pin D

connectors

1 RS-232, 2.5 mm mini stereo jack


Power 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 30 watts, internal


B.7 HDMI Twisted pair TXRX Extron/Belden/Crestron

Video Maximum data rate : 6.75 Gbps (2.25 Gbps per color)

Resolution range : Up to 1920x1200 or 1080p @ 60 Hz

Formats: RGB and YCbCr digital video

Standards : DVI 1.0, HDMI 1.3

Video input — transmitter Number/signal type : 1 single link HDMI (or DVI-D*)

Connectors : 1 female HDMI type A

Interconnection between transmitter and receiver Connectors : 2 female RJ-45 per unit for 2 cables connecting the transmitter and receiver

TP1 output transmits digital video, embedded digital audio, RS-232, IR, and remote power.

Video output — receiver Number/signal type:1 single link HDMI (or DVI-D*)

Connectors :1 female HDMI type A

Audio Frequency response :20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.05 dB

S/N : >90 dB, at maximum output (15


117



Note:



Sr. No.



dBu)

Audio input Number/signal type: 1 PC level stereo, unbalanced

Connectors : 3.5 mm stereo jack

Audio output Number/signal type :1 stereo (2 channel), balanced/unbalanced

Connectors : 3.5 mm captive screw connector, 5 pole

Power supply : External Input: 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz

Output: 12 VDC, 1 A, 12 watts

B.8 HDMIPatch cord EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON

Specification HDMI cables should comply folowing specefications

HDMI cable should support signals upto 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz and 1080p/60

Data rates to 10.2 Gbps

24 AWG copper wire construction

Color depth to 48 bits - 16 bits per color

referesh rates to 120 HZ

Length Atleast 6 feet

B.9 VGA+ Audio patch cord EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON

Specification 15-pin HD male molded connector and an audio cable with a stereo mini plug on one end and a 15-pin HD male molded connector with stereo mini plug on the opposite end..

length Atleast 6 ft

B.10

VGA Patch Cord ( 6 feet) EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON


118



Note:



Sr. No.



Specification VGA male to male Mini High resolution cable with 15-pin HD connectors on each end

length Atleast 6 ft

B.11

HDMI cables PRO EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON







length Atleast 35 feet

B.12

Audio De embedder EXTRON/ATLONA/SONIFEX VIDEO

Maximum data rate 6.75 Gbps (2.25 Gbps per color)

Resolution range Up to 1920x1200 or 1080p @ 60 Hz, 12-bit color

VIDEO INPUT

Number/signal type 1 single link HDMI

Equalization Automatic for up to -12 dB of cable loss

Input cable length Upto 25 feet

VIDEO OUTPUT Number/signal type 1 single link HDMI

Output cable length Up to 15 feet

AUDIO INPUT

Number/signal type 1, combined with HDMI video input

Source formats Dolby Digital 2/0 Surround, Dolby Digital 5.1, Dolby Digital EX, DTS Digital Surround 5.1, DTS-


119



Note:



Sr. No.



ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

AUDIO OUTPUT

Number/signal type 1 combined with HDMI video output and either1 stereo balanced/unbalanced or 1 S/PDIF

Connectors 3.5 mm captive screw connector, 5 pole1 female RCA jack (tip, ring)

CONTROL/REMOTE

USB control ports 1 front panel female mini USB B

USB standards USB 2.0, low speed

GENERAL External power supply . 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz,

external; to 12 VDC, 1 A, regulated

Temperature/humidity . Storage: -40 to +158 ˚F (-40 to +70 ˚C) / 10% to

90%, noncondensing

Operating: +32 to +122 ˚F (0 to +50 ˚C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing

Regulatory compliance

Safety CE, c-UL, UL

Audio Devices

Microphones

C.1 Handheld Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG Handheld UHF wireless Microphone consisting of

reciever Diversity type

Polar pattern Cardoid

Frequency Response 50 Hz to 15 kHz

Working Range HI power mode: Atleast 70 m

LO power mode: Atleast 15 m

THD should be less than 1 %

Dynamic Range 90 dB A-weighted, typical

Transmitter

Audio lnput Level -20 dBV maximum


120



Note:



Sr. No.



RF Output HI power mode: 10 mW maximum

LO power mode: 1 mW maximum



Power Requirements 2 x AA size alkaline or rechargeable batteries

Battery Life Atleast Up to 8 hours

Reciever Audio Output Level XLR connector into 100k Ohms load: -

16 dBV

1/4” Jack connector into 100k Ohms load: -22 dBV

Output Impedance XLR connector: 600 Ohms

1/4” Jack connector: 600 Ohms

RF Sensitivity –105 dBm for 12 dB SINAD, typical

Power Requirements external power supply,12 to 18 V DC at 130 mA

C.2 Lapel Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG Professional Diversity Wireless Receiver with

Lapel Microphone







Ambient Temperature –10°C to 50°C

Body Pack Transmitter Audio lnput Level Mic setting -7 to -15 dBV, Line setting 9

to 1 dBV

Gain Adjust. Range 8 dB

RF Output 10mW Maximum


121



Note:



Sr. No.




Battery Life Atleast up to 8 hours

Reciever

Audio Output Level XLR connector into 100k Ohms load: -16 dBV





Power Requirements external power supply ,12 to 18 V DC at 130 mA

C.3 Extension Cable Assy 10 mt SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Length Atleast 10 m

Diameter 5.9 ± 0.3 mm

Material PVC

Connector material molded plastic

C.4 Base unit for delegate system SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Number of audio channels : 54 channels or more

Frequency response : 50 - 20,000 Hz

input power 250 VA

Output power 150 W

Output current ± 3 A

Output voltage ± 24 V

Output level (XLR / RCA) +6 dBu, balanced

Input level (XLR) -10 - +6 dBu, balanced

C.5 Chairman Station SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Miicrophone Fixed gooseneck with LED indication

Buttons required priority button for any interuption


122



Note:



Sr. No.



Clear button to cancel ON microphones turned off

volume control button

buttons to set maximum open delegate microphones

buttons to activate and deactivate programming mode and voice , free and request button to select operating mode

Display display to indicate timer and speech timer limit

loud Speaker Integrated loudspeaker, headphone socket 3.5 mm mini jack

wide-band, voice-equalised

Current consumption with microphone turned on 123 mA

without audio signal 81 mA

with audio signal approx. 95 mA

Loudspeaker wide-band, voice-equalised

Ambient temperature 0 °C to +40 °C (at a humidity of 90%)

C.6 Delegate Station SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG Microphone Fixed gooseneck with LED indication

Micro phone button with LED

Integrated loudspeaker, headphone socket 3.5 mm mini jack

Current consumption with microphone turned on 77 mA


with audio signal approx. 50mA



C.7 Under desk mounting set

Item Deleted


123



Note:



Sr. No.



C.8 Extension Cables and accessories for chairmen delegate

SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Specification

Cable length Atleast 10 m

Type connecting cable with 8 -pin Renk connector

Amplifiers and Speakers System

D.1 Audio DSP CLEARONE/BSS/POLYCOM

Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW

Sampling Rate 48 kHz

THD+N: should be less than 0.03%

Noise (EIN): -124 dBu, 22 kHz BW

Dynamic Range: 100 dB (non A-weighted)

Software configuration Should be compatible with Microsoft XP, Vista, and Windows 7

Auto mixer parameters First Mic priority mode, last mic mode, No of open microphone etc

MICROPHONE INPUT PARAMETERS Noise cancellation ON/OFF,Mute ON/OFF,AGC ON/OFF,Automatic Level Control ON/OFF,Chairman Override ON/OFF,Adaptive Ambient ON/OFF

USB Configuration Port Should be USB 1.1 compatible

LAN 10/100 Ethernet

RJ 45, should support Telnet ,HTTP

Control port RS 232 DB9 female

Baud Rate: 38,400, 56,700(default)

Protocol: 8-bit,1 stop, no parity

MATRIX MIXING PARAMETERS 8 Mic/Line Analog Inputs

2 Line Inputs

8 Line Outputs

MIC/lINE INPUTS 1-8

Impedance: 5 kΩ Per Leg or 10 kΩ Balanced

Maximum Level: -65 dBu to +17 dBu


124



Note:



Sr. No.



lINE INPUTS 9-10


Maximum Level: 17 dBu

lINE OUTPUTS 1-8

Impedance: 50 Ω Per Leg

Nominal Level: 0 dBu


TElEPHONE INTERfACE

Frequency Response: 250 Hz to 3.3 kHz ±1dB


Signal to noise ratio should be less than 70 dB

D.2 Ceiling Speakers TANNOY/JBL/BOSE Frequency Range 50 Hz to 16 kHz

Coverage 90° conical

Sensitivity Should be less than 100 db

Driver Power Capacity Atleast 25 W

Driver Impedance less than 10 ohms

D.3 Audio Amplifier for Ceiling Speakers BIAMP/ CROWN/ LABGRUPPEN Multi channel amplifier with eight individual channel

power amplification

Maximum Power Output

individual channel at 4 ohm Load 50 watts per channel

individual channel at 8 ohm load 30 watts/channel

bridged channels at 8 ohm load 100 watts

Signal-to-Noise Ratio should be greater than 80 db

THD + Noise should be less than 0.3 %

Power Consumption 950 watts max.

Intermodulation Distortion (SMPTE) < 0.35%

Frequency Response (20Hz~20kHz) +0/-1dB


125



Note:



Sr. No.



LED indication : Each channel should have LED indication for over temperature condition, signal presence, ouput fault and signal presence etc

Input Impedance: balanced 20k ohms unbalanced 10k ohms

Power Requirements: 115/230VAC 50/60Hz

Compliance ROHS directive

UL / C-UL listed

D.4 Audio Amplifier For FOH Speakers BIAMP/ CROWN/ LABGRUPPEN

Frequency Response (at 1 watt) 25 Hz to 19 kHz

Speaker handling capacity 100 to max 400 watts

Signal-to-Noise Ratio Rated as dBr to full rated 8 ohm power output (A-Weighted):

94 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): < 0.8%.

Intermodulation Distortion: from full rated output to –30 dB:

< 0.4%.

Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced.

Full load Impedance : 2/4 & 8 ohms

D.5 FOH Speakers TANNOY/JBL/BOSE

Frequency Range (-10 dB): 80 Hz to 18 kHz

power Capacity: 150 Watts

Sensitivity: 91 dB SPL, 1W, 1m

Nominal Impedance: 4-8 ohms

Crossover Frequency: 2 kHz

LF Driver: 6 in Polypropylene cone w/WeatherEdge

HF Driver: 25 mm (1 in) Titanium coated polycarbonate

Termination: Sepakon or push to insert & banana plug

Control Devices


126



Note:



Sr. No.



E.1 Control System Crestron/AMX/Savanth Y-Bus: 40 Mb/s parallel communications

COM ports Should accept min COM ports min 10nos DB9 male, bidirectional RS-232/422/485 ports Up to 115.2k baud,

I/O versi ports

Should accept min I/O versi ports min 8nos- 9-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block comprising (8) digital input/output or analog input ports

RELAY OUTPUT 1 - 8 8-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising (8) normally open, isolated relays

Touch panel system Touchscreen Display

Display Type: TFT Active matrix color LCD

Diagonal Size 5.7 inch diagonal or more

Aspect Ratio: 4:3

Resolution: 640 x 480 pixels or more

Brightness: 350 nits (cd/m²) or higher

Contrast: 400:1 or better

Buttons & Switches power ON /OFF ,Sleep, and reset

button

Display brightness setting button

up/Down push button

four way navigation and enter button

LED Indicators Led Indicators for bttery status and

charging mode

Processor

Memory CPU: 32-bit Microprocessor

SDRAM: 32 MB

Flash: 32 MB

RF Wireless RF Transceiver: 2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM Channel

Range: Atleast 150 feet indoor and 1000 feet outdoor

IR Wireless


127



Note:



Sr. No.



Transmitter: 38 kHz

Range: Atleast 40 feet

Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, IEEE 802.3U compliant

Wall Mount Docking Station for Touch panel

Metal Finishing vertical wall mount structure for Mounting the touch panel . Preferably of same colour of touch panel

Power requirement

43 Watts (1.8 Amps @ 24 Volts DC) with touch panel docked

Control processor Processor

CPU: 32-bit Microprocessor

Memory

SDRAM: 32 MB

NVRAM: 256 KB

Flash: 4 MB

Operating System Real-time, preemptive multi-threaded/multitasking kernel FAT32 file system should supports SIMPL, Windows and SIMPL+

Ethernet 10/100BaseT, auto-negotiating, full/half duplex, static IP or DHCP/DNS,SSL, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP, SNMP

Connectors and Expansion Slots 40 Mb/s parallel communications

Backplane for integrated control ports and Y-Bus expansion slots

Communication and external control ports DB9 male, bidirectional RS-232/422/485 ports

E.2 Wireless Router for touch panel Linksys/Crestron/Dlink

Bands 2.4 GHz


128



Note:



Sr. No.



Tx / Rx *

2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM Channels 11-26 (2400 to 2483.5MHz), IEEE 802.15.4 compliant

Antennas extendable using optional ANT-EXT

Ports Ethernet: 10BaseT/100BaseTX, auto-switching

TX/RX Speed 2400 to 2483.5 Mhz

Technology High Powered RF;2.4 GHZ

Compatibility IEEE 802.15.4 compliant

Maximum Distance 100 meters ~ 1000 feet

Services F.1 Equipment Rack Valrack/middle

atlantic/W&Q Equipment Rack for placing AV Devices

Rack size 15 U



Note:



Sr. No.



Display Devices

A.1 6000 ANSI LUMENS PROJECTOR with ceiling Mount

Panasonic/Christie/Barco

projection system DLP projection system

Brightness 6,000 lumens or more

contrast ratio 2000:1 or better

Resolution 12800*800 pixels or better


129



Note:



Sr. No.



key stone correction range Vertical: ±40°

lens F=1.17-2.0 , f25.6 -33.8 mm

Aspect ratio 16:10

optical axis shift Vertical: +60% ,horizontal: ±10%

Connectivity DVI-D IN :DVI-D 24-pin

RGB 1 / YPBPR IN :BNC x 5

RGB 2 IN /YPBPR IN : D-sub HD 15-pin

VIDEO IN :BNC

S-VIDEO IN : Mini DIN 4-pin

SERIAL IN :D-sub 9-pin (RS-232C compliant)

SERIAL OUT : D-sub 9-pin

LAN : RJ-45 for network connection, 10Base-T/100Base-TX

A2 120" Motorized screen Draper/Dalite/DNP

Diagonal Size 120"

Video format NTSC 4 : 3 Aspect ratio

Mode of operation Motorized plug and play type

Power Supply 230 V AC

Mounting Ceiling Mount/Wall Mount

Approved Makes Draper/Dalite/DNP

Model To be specified

Video Source Devices

B.1 Architectural Connectivity EXTRON/ AMX/ CHRESTRON

Ports 1 Cat RJ 45 connector 1 HDMI 1 mini stereo audio Jack 3.5 1 AC port 230 V AC 1 VGA


B.2 Gender Changer for VGA input EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON


130



Note:



Sr. No.




Approved Make EXTRON/ KRAMER/ CHRESTRON

Model No /part No to be specified

B.3 HDMI input connector EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON

Specification One HDMI Female to One HDMI Female on

10" Pigtail

B.4 Matrix Switcher EXTRON/AMX/CRESTRON

INPUTS: 4 x PC (computer graphics) on 15−pin HD connectors (VGA through UXGA);

2 x HDMI connectors;

1 x USB connector;

2 x universal Y/CV, Pb/C, Pr (composite, s−Video and component)

1 Vpp/75Ω on BNC connectors;

OUTPUTS: 1 HDMI connector

2 x PC (computer graphics) on 15−pin HD connectors

1 balanced stereo audio output on a 5−pin terminal block

1 digital S/PDIF output on an RCA connector

HDMI STANDARD compliance Should Supports HDMI and HDCP.

OUTPUT RESOLUTIONS: HDTV Output Resolutions - 720p, 1080i, and 1080p.Computer Graphics Output Resolutions - 32 plus 4 user−definable (custom) output resolutions with selectable refresh rates.

Multiple Aspect Ratio Selections 4:3 or 16 :9

Built in Amplifier 6W RMS per channel audio amplifier with speaker output connectors.

External Control: RS−232 on a 9−pin D−sub connector, IR remote control,


131



Note:



Sr. No.



Additional picture control Picture in Picture, Picture and Picture , Split Screen (side by side images0 output image scaling and aspect ratio change, text overlay, slide show etc

POWER SOURCE: 100−240V AC, 50/60Hz, 58VA automatic power supply.

B.5 HDMI Twisted pair TXRX EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON







Interconnection between transmitter and receiver

Connectors : 2 female RJ-45 per unit for 2 cables connecting the transmitter and receiver





S/N : >90 dB, at maximum output (15 dBu)







132



Note:



Sr. No.




B.6 HDMIPatch cord EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON








B.7 VGA Patch Cord EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON


length Atleast 6 ft

Audio Devices

Microphones

C.1 Handheld Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG Handheld UHF wireless Microphone consisting of reciever Diversity type







Transmitter Audio lnput Level -20 dBV maximum



133



Note:



Sr. No.








Reciever Audio Output Level XLR connector into 100k Ohms load: -16

dBV






C.2 Lapel Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Professional Diversity Wireless Receiver with Lapel Microphone Polar pattern Cardoid







Body Pack Transmitter

Audio lnput Level Mic setting -7 to -15 dBV, Line setting 9 to 1 dBV



Power Requirements 2 x AA size alkaline or rechargeable


134



Note:



Sr. No.



batteries


Reciever







Approved Makes SHURE/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Model To be specified

C.3 Base unit for delegate system SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG



input power 250 VA

Output power 150 W












135



Note:



Sr. No.







Current consumption with microphone turned on

123 mA





C.5 Delegate Station SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG Microphone Fixed gooseneck with LED indication




77 mA





C.6 Under desk mounting set

Item deleted




136



Note:



Sr. No.



Specification



Amplifiers and Speakers System D.1 Audio DSP Digital Signal processor CLEARONE/BSS/POLYCOM










LAN 10/100 Ethernet






2 Line Inputs

8 Line Outputs

MIC/lINE INPUTS 1-8



lINE INPUTS 9-10



lINE OUTPUTS 1-8


137



Note:



Sr. No.






TElEPHONE INTERfACE









D.3 Audio Amplifier for Ceiling Speakers BIAMP/ CROWN/ LABGRUPPEN Multi channel amplifier with eight

individual channel power amplification








Intermodulation Distortion (SMPTE): < 0.35%

Frequency Response (20Hz~20kHz): +0/-1dB


Input Impedance: balanced 20k ohms


138



Note:



Sr. No.



unbalanced 10k ohms



UL / C-UL listed

Control Devices E.1 Control System Crestron/AMX/Savanth

Y-Bus: 40 Mb/s parallel communications


I/O versi ports



Touch panel system

Touchscreen Display



Aspect Ratio: 4:3




Buttons & Switches

power ON /OFF ,Sleep, and reset button


up/Down push button


LED Indicators

Led Indicators for bttery status and charging mode


139



Note:



Sr. No.



Processor


SDRAM: 32 MB

Flash: 32 MB



IR Wireless

Transmitter: 38 kHz


Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto-discovery, full/

half duplex, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, DHCP, IEEE 802.3U compliant



Power requirement


Control processor

Processor


Memory SDRAM: 32 MB

NVRAM: 256 KB

Flash: 4 MB Operating System Real-time, preemptive multi-

threaded/multitasking kernel FAT32 file system should supports SIMPL, Windows and SIMPL+

Ethernet 1: 10/100BaseT, auto-negotiating, full/half duplex, static IP or DHCP/DNS,SSL, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP, SNMP

Connectors and Expansion Slots


140



Note:



Sr. No.



40 Mb/s parallel communications Backplane for integrated control ports and Y-Bus expansion slots

Communication and external control ports

DB9 male, bidirectional RS-232/422/485 ports


Bands 2.4 GHz

Tx / Rx *








Services

F.1 Equipment Rack for placing AV Devices Valrack/middle atlantic/W&Q

Rack size 12 U


141

STATE SECRETARIAT BUILDING, NAYA RAIPUR, CHHATTISGARH

NAYA RAIPUR DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY


Note: 1 Final selected vendor shall produce workshop drawing, single line diagram before execution and get it approved from

NRDA.


Sr. No. Technical Specification Approved Make Item Feature Parameter

Audio Devices Microphones

C.1 Handheld Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG Handheld UHF wireless Microphone consisting of

reciever Diversity type







Transmitter








Reciever Audio Output Level XLR connector into 100k Ohms

load: -16 dBV






142





NRDA.




C.2 Lapel Microphone Professional Diversity Wireless Receiver with Lapel Microphone

SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG














Reciever







C.3 Gooseneck delegate mics SENNHESIER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG Freq range 50 HZ to 19 KHZ


143





NRDA.



Nominal impedance less than 225 Ω

S/N ratio 69 db or better

Transducer type Electret condenser

Operating principle Pressure gradient

Load impedance Should be ≥ 1 K Ω

Amplifiers And Speakers D.1 DSP Automatic Mixer BIAMP/CROWN/EXTRON

Frequency Response (20Hz~20kHz @ +4dBu): +0/-0.4dB

THD +N (20Hz~20kHz @ +4dBu):

line level < 0.006%

mic level < 0.05%

Equivalent Input Noise (20Hz~20kHz, 66dB gain, 150 ohm): -125dBu

Dynamic Range (20Hz~20kHz, 0dB): > 105dB

Maximum Gain (mic input to line output): 66dB

Crosstalk (channel-to-channel @ 1kHz):

line level input < -80dB

mic level input < -75dB

Input Impedance (mic/line balanced): 8k ohms

Maximum Input (mic/line balanced): +24dBu

Output Impedance (balanced): 200 ohms

Maximum Output (balanced): 24dBu

Sampling Rate: 48kHz

A/D - D/A Converters: 24-bit

Phantom Power: +48 VDC (7mA/input)

Power Consumption (100~240VAC 50/60Hz): 65 watts

Compliance: CE marked

UL listed


144





NRDA.



D.2 2 Channel Amplifier Biamp/Australian

Monitor/Crown Power Output 120 Watts per channel

Maximum Load 40 Ohms on 70 Volt line setting

Frequency Response 60Hz - 23kHz (- 3dB)

Total Harmonic Distortion 0.5% at 1kHz (1 Watt - full power)

Signal To Noise Ratio -80dB at 70V -80dB at 8 Ohms -80dB at 4 Ohms

Input Sensitivity 0.5 Volt RMS - 70 Volt

D.3 Wall mount Speakers JBL/SONODYNE/BOSE

2 way compact speaker

FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) (Direct Mode)

100 Hz ~ 20 kHz P

NOMINAL IMPEDANCE (Direct Mode)

8 Ohm

CROSSOVER FREQUENCY 4.5 kHz

FREQUENCY RESPONSE (-3dB) (Direct Mode)

130 Hz ~ 20 kHz

Services

F.1 Equipment Rack Valrack/middle atlantic/W&Q Equipment Rack for placing AV Devices

Rack size 12 U


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR CABIN S5a


NRDA.



145


A.1 40" or above LED Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/Sony Screen Size (Diagonal): 40" or Above

40" or Above

Panel type LED Backlit "LCD Panel

Aspect ratio : 16:9

Resolution (H x V) : 1920 * 1080 Pixels

Dynamic Contrast Ratio: 40000:1 or Better

Brightness 400 cd/m2 or better


Audio Output 1 Inbuilt 10W*2 or above

Connectivity PC & HDMI 1.3 Connectivity & RS232C ,LAN Wired, USB,Digital Audio Out

A.2 Wall mount For 40" or above Display

custom

A.3 AV WALL PLATE

VGA + Audio Wall plate for Video and Audio connections

custom


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR CONFERENCE ROOM S5j

Note:



Sr. No.

Technical Specification Approved Make Item Feature Parameter

Display Devices A.1 Matrix Display - Video Wall (For Front

wall) 92” or above Thin Bezel Matrix display LG/Samsung/Christie/Mitshu

bishi

Screen Size (Diagonal): 92" or more (46" or more 2 x 2 matrix)


Resolution 1920 x 1080

Aspect Ratio : 16:9

Contrast ratio 3000:1

Viewing Angle 178*178

Connectivity RGB,DVI_D ,Display port


146



Note:



Sr. No.


Video : Input Component (CVBS Common),HDMI

VS A mount 600*400 mm

RGB : Input/output Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port/ DVI-D

Audio Stereo mini Jack/Stereo mini Jack

External Control RS232C (in / out) thru stereo jack, RJ45

Sync Compatibility: Separate / Composite / Digital

Bezel Width total 6 mm or less

Response Time ( G to G) 7 -10 ms or less

Brightness 600 nit (Typical)

Special Lamp Error Detection, Anti-Image Retention, Temperature Sensor, RS232C/RJ45 MDC, Plug and Play (DDC2B), PIP/PBP, Built-in Video Wall processor (10x10 or more), Portrait Orientation, Button Lock,Smart Scheduling

Safety Certification UL, CSA ,TV

Power Supply AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption (Typical/Max.) 200/220W

Power Consumption (Standby) Less than 1W

A.2 Wall Mount Bracket for Matrix Display custom

A.3 46" or above LED Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/Sony

Display Size 46" or above


Brightness 450 CD/m2 or better


Aspect ratio 16:9

Response Time 3ms or below

Built in Speaker 10 W *2


Connectivity PC & HDMI 1.3 Connectivity & RS232C (Control/SVC) / DiVX Compatibility Through USB/ LAN Wired/ USB/ Digital Audio Out


147



Note:



Sr. No.


USB 2.0 Sould be Capable of playing HD Video contents

A.4 Mounting Bracket for 46 " or above Display

Swivel Wall Mount Bracket for 46" or above Display

custom

Video Source Devices B.1 Architectural Connectivity EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON

Ports 1 Cat RJ 45 connector






Specification One HDMI Female to One HDMI Female on 10" Pigtail

B.4 Matrix Switcher EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON

Bandwidth 600 MHz (-3 dB), fully loaded

VIDEO INPUT 1 Vp-p for Y of component video and S-video, and for composite video

0.7 Vp-p for RGB and R-Y and B-Y of component video

0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video

VIDEO OUTPUT 1 Vp-p for Y of component video and S-video, and for composite video

0.7 Vp-p for RGB and R-Y and B-Y of component video


148



Note:



Sr. No.


0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video

SYNC Output type RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs

AUDIO Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.05 dB

AUDIO INPUT Nominal level +4 dBu (1.228 Vrms)

Input gain adjustment -18 dB to +24 dB (default = 0 dB), adjustable per input by RS-232/422

AUDIO OUTPUT Maximum level (Hi-Z) >+21 dBu, balanced or unbalanced at 1.0% THD+N

Maximum level (600 ohm) >+20 dBm, balanced or unbalanced at 1.0% THD+N

Output volume range 0 to 64 (-75.8 dB to 0 dB) in 1 dB

CONTROL/REMOTE — SWITCHER bidirectional RS-232 or RS-422, female 9-pin D connector

bidirectional RS-232, front panel 2.5 mm mini stereo jack

Ethernet control port female RJ-45 connector

GENERAL

Power 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz, internal, primary and redundant

B.5 HDMI Matrix swicther EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON

video

routing 8* 4 matrix

signal type digital RGB and DVI digital Signals are supported

Digital video RGB digital video (DVI & HDMI ) or Y, Cr, Cb digital component video (HDMI) should supports all single-link DVI and HDMI

Digital audio Should support HDMI audio transmitted through the RGB and Y, Cr, Cb lines

Data rate 5.5 Gbps or higher (2 Gbps or higher per color)


149



Note:



Sr. No.


Standards DVI 1.0, HDMI

Switching speed 180 ns or better

Video input

Number/signal type 8 digital RGB ,HDMI or single link DVI D


Minimum/maximum level 0.5 V to 1.0 Vp-p with no offset

Video output

Number/signal type 4 digital RGB


Control/remote — switcher

Serial control port RS-232, 9-pin female D connector

RS-232, front panel 2.5 mm mini stereo jack

Ethernet control port RJ-45 female connector

Ethernet protocol ARP, ICMP (ping), IP, TCP, DHCP, HTTP, Telnet

Power supply Internal

Input: 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz

Power consumption 48 watts, fully loaded 8 x 8 unit


Cooling Inbiult Fan cooling should be provided

B.6 Universal scalar EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON

Number/signal type 2 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, component video (Y, R-Y, B-Y; progressive or HD)

1 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, component (Y, R-Y, B-Y; interlaced, progressive, HD)

S-video, composite video

1 component video (Y, R-Y, B-Y; interlaced), S-video, composite video

1 S-video, composite video


150



Note:



Sr. No.


1 single link DVI-D

1 optional SDI, HD-SDI

Resolution range 640x480 to 1920x1200, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p

VIDEO OUTPUT Number/signal type 2 buffered scaled RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, or scaled HD component video (Y, R-Y, B-Y),S-video, composite video

SYNC Input type RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RGBcvS, and component video (tri-level or bi-level)

Output type RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, and component video (tri-level or bi-level)

CONTROL/REMOTE — SIGNAL PROCESSOR

Serial control port 2 RS-232/RS-422 on female 9-pin D connectors (rear panel)

1 RS-232, 2.5 mm mini stereo jack (front panel)


B.7 HDMI Twisted pair TXRX EXTRON/ BELDEN/ CRESTRON













151



Note:



Sr. No.










B.8 HDMI CABLES EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON Specification HDMI cables should comply folowing

specefications







B.9 VGA+ Audio patch cord EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON

Specification 15-pin HD male molded connector and an audio cable with a stereo mini plug on one end and a 15-pin HD male molded connector with stereo mini plug on the opposite end..

length Atleast 6 ft

B.10 VGA Patch Cord EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON


152



Note:



Sr. No.


Specification

VGA male to male Mini High resolution cable with 15-pin HD connectors on each end

length Atleast 6 ft

B.11 HDMI cables PRO EXTRON/

BELDEN/CRESTRON







length Atleast 35 feet

B.12 Audio De embedder EXTRON/ATLONA/SONIFEX

VIDEO

Maximum data rate 6.75 Gbps (2.25 Gbps per color)

Resolution range Up to 1920x1200 or 1080p @ 60 Hz, 12-bit color

VIDEO INPUT

Number/signal type 1 single link HDMI

Equalization Automatic for up to -12 dB of cable loss

Input cable length Upto 25 feet

VIDEO OUTPUT Number/signal type 1 single link HDMI

Output cable length Up to 15 feet

AUDIO INPUT

Number/signal type 1, combined with HDMI video input

Source formats Dolby Digital 2/0 Surround, Dolby Digital 5.1, Dolby Digital EX, DTS Digital Surround 5.1, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

AUDIO OUTPUT

Number/signal type 1 combined with HDMI video output and either1 stereo balanced/unbalanced or 1


153



Note:



Sr. No.


S/PDIF

Connectors 3.5 mm captive screw connector, 5 pole1 female RCA jack (tip, ring)

CONTROL/REMOTE

USB control ports 1 front panel female mini USB B

USB standards USB 2.0, low speed

GENERAL External power supply . 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz, external;

to 12 VDC, 1 A, regulated

Temperature/humidity . Storage: -40 to +158 ˚F (-40 to +70 ˚C) / 10% to

90%, noncondensing

Operating: +32 to +122 ˚F (0 to +50 ˚C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing

Regulatory compliance

Safety CE, c-UL, UL

Video Conferencing System C.1 Full High Defination Video Conferencing

Unit Polycom/Cisco/lifeSize

Full High defination Video conferencing codec with Multiconferencing and ISDN connectivity.

Video Standards

H.264,H.264 High Profile

• H.263++

• H.261

• H.239 / People+Content

• H.263 and H.264 Video Error Concealment

Inputs

Minimum 3 Video Inputs:

• Main HD Camera

• Aux/Doc (Composite or equivalent)

• Content (DVI-I or equivalent)


154



Note:



Sr. No.


Minimum 3 Audio Inputs:

• 1 Microphone Input (quoted system should support up to 2 mics)

• VCR/Aux

• PC Audio / Aux

Outputs

Minimum 3 Video Outputs:

• Monitor 1 (DVI-I or HD equivalent)

• Monitor 2 (DVI-I or HD equivalent)

• VCR (SVideo or equivalent)

Minimum 2 Audio Outputs:

• Main

• VCR/Aux

Network Interface

• Interface

- 2-port 10/100 auto NIC switch, RJ45 connectors

• H.323 up to 4 Mbps

• SIP up to 2Mbps

• H.320 Upto 2 Mbps

- ISDN QBRI,PRI T1 or E1

- Serial (RS449, V.35, RS 530) up to 2Mbps

• QoS

• Reconfigurable MTU size

• Auto SPID detection and line number configuration

• Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) for QoS

Camera

Minimum specifications of 1080p camera

- 1920 x 1080 CMOS imager

- 12X optical zoom

- 70° FOV min

Video Resolution

People Video Resolution

• 720p, 30 fps from 512 Kbps



155



Note:



Sr. No.



• 4SIF/4CIF, 30 fps from 128 Kbps

• 4SIF/4CIF, 60 fps from 512 Kbps

• SIF (352 x 240), CIF (352 x 288)

• QSIF (176 x 120), QCIF (176 x 144)

Content Video Resolution

• Input: WSXGASXGA, HD 720p, XGA, SVGA, VGA

• Output: 720p , 1080 , XGA , SVGA

• Content Frame Rate: 30 fps

Audio Standard

• StereoSurround

• 2 channels of 22 kHz crystal clear audio

• 14kHz bandwidth with G.722.1 Annex C

• 7 kHz bandwidth with G.722, G.722.1

• 3.4 kHz bandwidth with G.711, G.728, G.729A

• Automatic Gain Control

• Automatic Noise Suppression

• Instant Adaptation Echo Cancellation

• Audio Error Concealment

Security

• Secure Web, Secure Telnet, Embedded AES, H.235V3 and H.233/234, Secure password authentication

• Remote monitoring with video pre-view

User Interface

• Directory Services

• System Management

- Web-based

- SNMP

• CDR

• International languages (17)

Multiconferencing Capabilities


156



Note:



Sr. No.


• Can be upgraded to support up to 4 video calls in a single conference

• Conduct meetings beyond just point-to-point

• Adding sites during a call on the fly (there should be no additional setting / configuration required in the system for adding multipoint call during an on-going video call)

• System Management

- Web-based

- SNMP

• CDR

• International languages (17)

Multiconferencing Capabilities

• Can be upgraded to support up to 4 video calls in a single conference

• Conduct meetings beyond just point-to-point

• Adding sites during a call on the fly (there should be no additional setting / configuration required in the system for adding multipoint call during an on-going video call)

Audio Devices Microphones D.1 Handheld Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG Handheld UHF wireless Microphone consisting of reciever Diversity type







Transmitter


157



Note:



Sr. No.









Reciever Audio Output Level XLR connector into 100k Ohms load: -16

dBV


















Reciever



158



Note:



Sr. No.







D.3 Base unit for delegate system SENNEHEISER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG



input power 250 VA

Output power 150 W





D.4 Chairman Station SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG











123 mA


159



Note:



Sr. No.






D.5 Delegate Station SENNHESIER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG Microphone Fixed gooseneck with LED indication




77 mA





D.6 Under desk mounting set SENNHESIER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG Item deleted

D.7 Cables and accessories SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG Specification



Amplifiers and Speakers System D.8 Audio DSP CLEARONE/BSS/POLYCOM







160



Note:



Sr. No.






LAN 10/100 Ethernet






2 Line Inputs

8 Line Outputs

MIC/lINE INPUTS 1-8



lINE INPUTS 9-10



LINE OUTPUTS 1-8




TElEPHONE INTERFACE








161



Note:



Sr. No.




D.10 Audio Amplifier for Ceiling Speakers BIAMP/ CROWN/

LABGRUPPEN Multi channel amplifier with eight individual channel power amplification








Intermodulation Distortion (SMPTE) < 0.35%

Frequency Response (20Hz~20kHz) +0/-1dB


Input Impedance: balanced 20k ohms unbalanced 10k ohms



UL / C-UL listed

D.11 Audio Amplifier For FOH Speakers BIAMP/ CROWN/ LABGRUPPEN

Frequency Response (at 1 watt) 25 Hz to 19 kHz

Speaker handling capacity 100 to max 400 watts

Signal-to-Noise Ratio Rated as dBr to full rated 8 ohm power output (A-Weighted):

94 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): < 0.8%.

Intermodulation Distortion: from full rated output to –30 dB:

< 0.4%.

Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced.


162



Note:



Sr. No.


Full load Impedance : 2/4 & 8 ohms

D.12 FOH Speakers TANNOY/JBL/BOSE Frequency Range (-10 dB): 80 Hz to 18 kHz

power Capacity: 150 Watts

Sensitivity: 91 dB SPL, 1W, 1m

Nominal Impedance: 4-8 ohms

Crossover Frequency: 2 kHz

LF Driver: 6 in Polypropylene cone w/WeatherEdge

HF Driver: 25 mm (1 in) Titanium coated polycarbonate

Termination: Sepakon or push to insert & banana plug

Control Devices E.1 Control System Crestron/AMX/Savanth

Y-Bus: 40 Mb/s parallel communications


I/O versi ports



Touch panel system Touchscreen Display



Aspect Ratio: 4:3




Buttons & Switches power ON /OFF ,Sleep, and reset button


up/Down push button



163



Note:



Sr. No.


LED Indicators

Led Indicators for bttery status and charging mode

Processor


SDRAM: 32 MB

Flash: 32 MB



IR Wireless

Transmitter: 38 kHz





Power requirement


Control processor Processor


Memory SDRAM: 32 MB NVRAM: 256 KB Flash: 4 MB Operating System Real-time, preemptive multi-

threaded/multitasking kernel FAT32 file system should supports SIMPL, Windows and SIMPL+

Ethernet 10/100BaseT, auto-negotiating, full/half duplex, static IP or DHCP/DNS,SSL, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP, SNMP


164



Note:



Sr. No.


Connectors and Expansion Slots 40 Mb/s parallel communications

Backplane for integrated control ports and Y-Bus expansion slots


Bands 2.4 GHz

Tx / Rx *








Services F.1 Equipment Rack Valrack/middle atlantic/W&Q

Equipment Rack for placing AV Devices

Rack size 15U


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR SUB-COMMITTEE ROOM-M3a


NRDA.




165




NRDA.



Display Devices A.1 Commercial Display Monitor 65” Commercial Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/Sony

65” Commercial Display

Screen Size (Diagonal): 65-inch or more

Aspect ratio : 16:9


Brightness: 700 cd/m2 500 cd/m2 or more

Contrast Ratio: 5000:1 or more

Respons e time 6ms or less

viewing degree 178/178

color supported 1073.7 Million

Speaker Built in 15 w *2

Signal Input : Video Signal CVBS, Component, BNC, HDMI

Built in Features required Temperature Sensor, Fan Control,RS232C MDC, Brightness Sensor

Display Position: Portrait & Landscape

A2 Mounting Bracket Wall Mount Bracket for 65" Commercial Display

custom








166




NRDA.



B.3 HDMI input connector Extron/AMX/Crestron Specification One HDMI Female to One HDMI


B.4 Matrix Switcher/scalar EXTRON/ kRAMER/ CRESTRON

INPUTS: 4 x PC (computer graphics) on 15−pin

HD connectors (VGA through UXGA);


1 x USB connector;








OUTPUT RESOLUTIONS: HDTV Output Resolutions - 720p, 1080i, and 1080p. Computer Graphics Output Resolutions - 32 plus 4 user−definable (custom) output resolutions with selectable refresh rates.





167




NRDA.





B.5 HDMI Patch cord ( 6 feet) EXTRON/

BELDEN/CRESTRON

Specification HDMI cables should comply folowing

specefications






cable Length Atleast 6 feet

B.6 HDMI Patch cord ( 12 feet) EXTRON/

BELDEN/CRESTRON



Data rates to 10.2 Gbps 24 AWG copper wire construction


168




NRDA.






B.7 VGA+ Audio patch cord EXTRON/

BELDEN/CRESTRON

Specification

15-pin HD male molded connector and an audio cable with a stereo mini plug on one end and a 15-pin HD male molded connector with stereo mini plug on the opposite end.

length Atleast 6 ft

B.8 VGA Patch Cord ( 12 feet) EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON

Specification


length Atleast 12 ft

Control Devices

C.1 Media Controller with Hand Held Touch panel and IR emiiter probe

Crestron /AMX /Savant

Media Controller

Operating System Core 3 OS; real-time, preemptive multi-threaded/multitasking kernel;Transaction-Safe Extended FAT file system; SIMPL Windows, SIMPL+,

Memory SDRAM: 256 MB


169




NRDA.



Flash: 2 GB (expandable to 1 TB)

Wired Communications Ethernet: 10/100 Mbps; auto-switching; auto-negotiating; auto-discovery;full/half duplex; industry-standard TCP/IP stack; UDP/IP; CIP; DHCP; SSL;IPv4 or IPv6; IIS v.6.0 Web Server; SMTP e-mail client

USB Supports USB HID and USB mass storage class devices via rear panel.USB 2.0 host ports, supports computer console device port

RS-232: Supports 2-way device control and monitoring up to 115.2k baud with hardware and software handshaking

Wireless Communications

RF Transceiver: 2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM Channels 11-26 (2400 to 2483.5 MHz), default channel 15; IEEE 802.15.4 compliant

Range (Typical) 150 ft (46 m) indoor, 250 ft (76 m) outdoor

Touch Panel Display Type: TFT active matrix color LCD


Color Depth: 16-bit, 64k colors

Illumination: LED Backlit

Buttons & Indicators power button for system power control, buttons to acess media, lights , home ,room,other optional menus and info screens.



170




NRDA.



function buttons : OSM navigation, transport control, and alphanumeric entry

Button for sequential channel selection

Scroll buttons for centre select and navigating display menus and function selection , back button for returning previous pages

Wireless RF Transceiver: 2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM channels 11-26 (2400 to 2483.5 MHz); IEEE 802.15.4 compliant

Range (typcial): 75 feet (23 meters) to the gateway or nearest mesh network device

Connectors

Environmental Temperature: 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)

Infra Red Emmiter probe

Infrared emitter probe to communicate directly with IR sensor window of a television, DVD player, or any other IR controllable device with folowing specs

Connectors 3.5 mm mini-phone plug for connection to any mini-phone

port

wire Lead:Aleast 3 ft long

Cable: Atleast 7 ft long

Services F.1 Equipment

Rack Equipment Rack for placing AV Devices

Valrack/middle atlantic/W&Q


Rack size 12U


171


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR PRESS CONFERENCE ROOM M 3 B


NRDA.






Aspect ratio : 16:9






Pixel Pitch 0.744 x 0.744






A2 Mounting Bracket Wall Mount Bracket for 65" Commercial

Display custom






172




NRDA.



B.2 Gender Changer for VGA input

EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON


B.3 HDMI input connector Extron/AMX/Crestron

Specification One HDMI Female to One HDMI


B.4 VGA+ Audio patch cord

EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON

Specification 15-pin HD male molded connector and an audio cable with a stereo mini plug on one end and a 15-pin HD male molded connector with stereo mini plug on the opposite end.

length Atleast 6 ft

B.5 HDMI Patch cord ( 6 feet)









B.6 VGA Patch Cord ( 12 feet) EXTRON/


173




NRDA.




BELDEN/CRESTRON


B.7 VGA Patch Cord ( 25 feet)




B.8 HDMI Patch cord ( 25 feet)









Audio System C.1 Wall Speakers TANNOY/JBL/BOSE

Frequency Range 70Hz to 23 kHz

coverage 100° x 100°


Power Capacity continuous programe :200 watts Pink noise : 100 watts

Nominal Impedance 8Ω and 60W, 30W, & 15W, (plus 7.5W at 70V)

Sensitivity 87 dB, 1W, 1m

C.2 Audio Amplifier BIAMP/CROWN/EXTRON

Sensitivity (for full rated power at 4 ohms) 1.4 Vrms


174




NRDA.



Frequency Response +0 dB, –1 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio > 97 dB

Damping Factor > 200

Crosstalk (below rated 8Ω power) At 1kHz: > 85dB

At 20kHz: >55dB

Input Impedance (nominal) 20 kΩ balanced, 10 kΩ unbalanced

Load Impedance 2 to 8 Ω per channel in Stereo 4 to 8 Ω in Bridge Mono

AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (± 10%)

120 VAC 60 Hz 100 VAC 50/60 Hz 220 and 240 VAC 50 Hz

Input/Output Input Connectors: XLR (one per channel), 1/4-Inch (one per channel), and RCA (one per channel).

Output Connectors: Two 4-Pole Speakon Output Connectors

C.1 Handheld Microphone Professional Diversity Wireless

Receiver with Hand held Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG

Handheld UHF wireless Microphone consisting of reciever Diversity type







Transmitter









175




NRDA.



Reciever







C.2 Lapel Microphone Professional Diversity Wireless

Receiver with Lapel Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG

Professional Diversity Wireless Receiver with Lapel Microphone














Reciever





176




NRDA.






C.3 DSP Automatic mixer SENNEHEISER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG Inputs:

Mic/Line 1-4: XLR 3-pol. female

Type: balanced

Nominal level -60 dB

Max. level: +15dB

Frequency responce: 20Hz – 16kHz

AUX-Inputs 5-6: 2x Cinc

Type: unbalanced

Nominal level: ±0dB

Max. level: +15dB

Frequency responce : 20Hz – 22kHz

Impedance: >15kΩ

Outputs: Line Mono: 1x XLR 3-pol. male

Type: balanced

Nominal level: ±0dB

Max. level: +10dB

Frequency responce: 20Hz – 20kHz

Dynamic: >90dB

General: Sample frequency: 48kHz

Format: 24Bit

Operating temperature: +5 - 45°C

Max. humidity during operation: 83%

Power supply: 100 – 240V/50-60Hz

Max. power consumption: 35VA

C.4 Gooseneck delegate mics SENNHESIER/BEYER





177




NRDA.






Control Devices D.1 Media controller with Hand held LCD

touch panel and Infrared Emmiter probe Crestron /AMX /Savant

Media Controller Operating System Core 3 OS; real-time, preemptive multi-

threaded/multitasking kernel;Transaction-Safe Extended FAT file system; SIMPL Windows, SIMPL+,

Memory SDRAM: 256 MB

Flash: 2 GB (expandable to 1 TB)

Wired Communications Ethernet: 10/100 Mbps; auto-switching; auto-negotiating; auto-discovery;full/half duplex; industry-standard TCP/IP stack; UDP/IP; CIP; DHCP; SSL;IPv4 or IPv6; IIS v.6.0 Web Server; SMTP e-mail client

USB Supports USB HID and USB mass storage class devices via rear panel.USB 2.0 host ports, supports computer console device port

RS-232: Supports 2-way device control and monitoring up to 115.2k baud with hardware and software handshaking

Wireless Communications

RF Transceiver: 2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM Channels 11-26 (2400 to 2483.5 MHz), default channel 15; IEEE 802.15.4 compliant

Range (Typical) 150 ft (46 m) indoor, 250 ft (76 m) outdoor

Touch Panel

Display Type: TFT active matrix color LCD


178




NRDA.




Color Depth: 16-bit, 64k colors

Illumination: LED Backlit

Buttons & Indicators power button for system power control, buttons to acess media, lights , home ,room,other optional menus and info screens.


function buttons : OSM navigation, transport control, and alphanumeric entry

Button for sequential channel selection

Scroll buttons for centre select and navigating display menus and function selection , back button for returning previous pages

Wireless RF Transceiver: 2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM channels 11-26 (2400 to 2483.5 MHz); IEEE 802.15.4 compliant

Range (typcial): 75 feet (23 meters) to the gateway or nearest mesh network device

Connectors

Environmental Temperature: 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)

Infra Red Emitter probe Infrared emitter probe to communicate directly with IR sensor window of a television, DVD player, or any other IR controllable device with following specs

Connectors 3.5 mm mini-phone plug for connection to any mini-phone

port

wire Lead: least 3 ft long

Cable: At least 7 ft long

Services E.1 Equipment Rack Valrack/middle atlantic/W&Q


179




NRDA.




Rack size 12U


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR CM CABIN M7a


NRDA.


Sr. No. Technical Specification Approved Make


Display Devices A.1 40" or above LED Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/Sony

Screen Size (Diagonal): 40" or Above

40" or Above


Aspect ratio : 16:9








180

A.2 Wall mount For 40" or above

Display Custom

A.3 AV WALL PLATE Custom


B.1 VGA Patch Cord ( 25 feet) EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON


length At least 25 ft


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR CM SECRETARY MEETING ROOM-M 21


NRDA.


Sr. No.





Aspect ratio : 16:9











181




NRDA.


Sr. No.




A2 Mounting Bracket Wall Mount Bracket for 65" Commercial

Display custom






Specification one 15-pin HD Female to Female

Gender Changer with One 3.5 mm Stereo Mini Jack


Specification One HDMI Female to One HDMI Female

on 10" Pigtail

B.4 Matrix Switcher EXTRON/KRAMER/CRESTRON

INPUTS: 4 x PC (computer graphics) on 15−pin

HD connectors (VGA through UXGA);


1 x USB connector;





182




NRDA.


Sr. No.






OUTPUT RESOLUTIONS: HDTV Output Resolutions - 720p, 1080i, and 1080p.Computer Graphics Output Resolutions - 32 plus 4 user−definable (custom) output resolutions with selectable refresh rates.






B.5 HDMI Twisted pair TXRX EXTRON/ BELDEN/

CRESTRON Video Maximum data rate : 6.75 Gbps (2.25

Gbps per color)







183




NRDA.


Sr. No.















B.6 VGA+ Audio patch cord EXTRON/

BELDEN/CRESTRON Specification 15-pin HD male molded connector and an audio cable with a stereo mini plug on one end and a 15-pin HD male molded connector with stereo mini plug on the opposite end..

length Atleast 6 ft

B.7 HDMIPatch cord EXTRON/

BELDEN/CRESTRON Specification HDMI cables should comply folowing specefications




184




NRDA.


Sr. No.






B.8 HDMIPatch cord ( 25 feet) EXTRON/ BELDEN/CRESTRON Specification HDMI cables should comply folowing

specefications





refresh rates to 120 HZ

Length At least 25 feet

B.9 VGA Patch Cord ( 25feet) EXTRON/

BELDEN/CRESTRON VGA male to male Mini High resolution cable with 15-pin HD connectors on each end

length At least 25 ft

Audio Devices Microphones D.1 DSP Automatic mixer DSP auto mixer BIAMP/CROWN/EXTRON

Frequency Response (20Hz~20kHz @ +4dBu):

+0/-0.4dB

THD +N (20Hz~20kHz @ +4dBu):

line level < 0.006%

mic level < 0.05%

Equivalent Input Noise (20Hz~20kHz, 66dB gain, 150 ohm):

-125dBu

Dynamic Range (20Hz~20kHz, 0dB): > 105dB


185




NRDA.


Sr. No.


Maximum Gain (mic input to line output): 66dB

Crosstalk (channel-to-channel @ 1kHz):

line level input < -80dB

mic level input < -75dB

Input Impedance (mic/line balanced): 8k ohms

Maximum Input (mic/line balanced): +24dBu

Output Impedance (balanced): 200 ohms

Maximum Output (balanced): 24dBu

Sampling Rate: 48kHz

A/D - D/A Converters: 24-bit

Phantom Power: +48 VDC (7mA/input)

Power Consumption (100~240VAC 50/60Hz):

65 watts

Compliance: CE marked

UL listed D.2 Gooseneck delegate mics SENNHESIER/BEYER







D.3 Audio Amplifier BIAMP/CROWN/EXTRON

Sensitivity (for full rated power at 4 ohms) 1.4 Vrms





At 20kHz: >55dB




186




NRDA.


Sr. No.






D.4 Wall speakers TANNOY/JBL/BOSE

Frequency Range 70Hz to 23 kHz



Power Capacity continuous programme :200 watts Pink noise : 100 watts



Control Devices E.1 Control System with power Supply unit Crestron/AMX/Savant

Processor

CPU 32-bit Microprocessor

Memory SDRAM At least 32 MB

NVRAM At least 256 KB

Flash At least 4 MB

Operating System

Real-time, preemptive multi-threaded/multitasking kernel; Fat 32 supports Windows

Ethernet

10/100BaseT, full/half duplex, static IP or DHCP/DNS, SSL, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP, SNMP

Connectors

external control DB9 male, bidirectional RS-232/422/485 ports


187




NRDA.


Sr. No.


I/O 9-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block comprising digital input/output or analog input ports

Digital Output: 250mA sink from maximum 24 Volts DC

RELAY OUTPUT 8-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising normally open, isolated relays;

LAN 8-wire RJ45 with LED indicators;

10/100BaseT Ethernet port;

COMPUTER DB9 female, RS-232 computer console port

Environmental

Temperature 41° to 113°F (5° to 45°C)

Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Power Supply Unit Power Pack, Desktop, 24VDC, 2A (50 Watts), Regulated

E.2 Touch panel Crestron/AMX/Savant

Touch panel system

Touchscreen Display



Aspect Ratio: 4:3






up/Down push button


LED Indicators Led Indicators for battery status and charging mode

Processor


SDRAM: 32 MB

Flash: 32 MB


188




NRDA.


Sr. No.



Range: At least 150 feet indoor and 1000 feet outdoor

IR Wireless

Transmitter: 38 kHz

Range: At least 40 feet


Power requirement 43 Watts (1.8 Amps @ 24 Volts DC) with touch panel docked



E.3 IR Probes Crestron/AMX/Savant

Infrared emitter probe to communicate directly with IR sensor window of a television, DVD player, or any other IR controllable device with folowing specs

Connectors 2-pin detachable terminal block for connection to IR port

Cable Length wire Lead: least 3 ft long

Cable: At least 7 ft long


Bands 2.4 GHz

Tx / Rx * 2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM Channels 11-26 (2400 to 2483.5MHz), IEEE 802.15.4 compliant






189




NRDA.


Sr. No.




Services F.1 Equipment Rack Valrack/middle atlantic/W&Q


Rack size 12U


190


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR CABINET MEETING ROOM-M24a

Note:



Sr. No.


Display Devices A.1 Commercial Display Monitor 65” Commercial Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/S

ony 65” Commercial Display


Aspect ratio : 16:9










Built in Features required Temperature Sensor, ,RS232C MDC


A2 Mounting Bracket Wall Mount Bracket for 65" Commercial Display custom Video Source Devices B.1 Architectural Connectivity EXTRON/ AMX/

CRESTRON Ports 1 Cat RJ 45 connector







191



Note:



Sr. No.


Specification One HDMI Female to One HDMI Female on 10" Pigtail

B.4 Matrix Switcher Multi input digital scalar EXTRON/ AMX/ CRESTRON

INPUTS: 4 x PC (computer graphics) on 15−pin HD connectors (VGA through UXGA);


1 x USB connector;








OUTPUT RESOLUTIONS: HDTV Output Resolutions - 720p, 1080i, and 1080p. Computer Graphics Output Resolutions - 32 plus 4 user−definable (custom) output resolutions with selectable refresh rates.






B.5 HDMI Twisted pair TXRX HDMI Twisted pair TXRX Extron/Belden/Crestron


192



Note:



Sr. No.





















B.6 VGA+ Audio patch cord Extron/Belden/Crestron Specification 15-pin HD male molded connector and an

audio cable with a stereo mini plug on one end and a 15-pin HD male molded connector with stereo mini plug on the opposite end.

length Atleast 6 ft

B.7 HDMIPatch cord Extron/Belden/Crestron Specification HDMI cables should comply folowing

specefications


193



Note:



Sr. No.








B.8 HDMI patch Cord ( 12 Ft) Extron/Belden/Crestron








B.9 VGA Patch Cord ( 12 feet) Extron/Belden/Crestron



Audio Devices

Microphones C.1 Lapel Microphone SENNEHEISER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG Professional Diversity Wireless Receiver with Lapel Microphone






194



Note:



Sr. No.











Reciever







C.2 Base unit for up to 50 delegates Control System Power Supply Unit SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Base unit for delegate system



input power 250 VA

Output power 150 W









195



Note:



Sr. No.










123 mA





C.4 Delegate Station SENNHESIER/BEYER

DYNAMIC /AKG Microphone Fixed gooseneck with LED indication




77 mA





C.5 Under desk mounting set SENNHESIER/BEYER DYNAMIC /AKG

Item deleted




196



Note:



Sr. No.


Specification Cable length Atleast 10 m


Amplifiers and Speakers System D.1 Audio DSP Digital Signal processor CLEARONE/BSS/POLYCO

M Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW









LAN 10/100 Ethernet






2 Line Inputs

8 Line Outputs

MIC/lINE INPUTS 1-8



lINE INPUTS 9-10



lINE OUTPUTS 1-8





197



Note:



Sr. No.


TElEPHONE INTERfACE









D.3 Audio Amplifier BIAMP/CROWN/EXTRON Sensitivity (for full rated power at 4 ohms) 1.4 Vrms





At 20kHz: >55dB







D.4 Wall speakers Wall mount speakers TANNOY/JBL/BOSE Frequency Range 70Hz to 23 kHz



198



Note:



Sr. No.



Power Capacity continuous programe :200 watts Pink noise : 100 watts



Control Devices

E.1 Control System with power Supply unit Crestron/AMX/Savanth

Processor

CPU 32-bit Microprocessor

Memory

SDRAM Atleast 32 MB

NVRAM Atleast 256 KB

Flash Atleast 4 MB

Operating System

Real-time, preemptive multi-threaded/multitasking kernel; Fat 32 supports Windows

Ethernet

10/100BaseT, full/half duplex, static IP or DHCP/DNS, SSL, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP, SNMP

Connectors

external control DB9 male, bidirectional RS-232/422/485 ports

I/O 9-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block comprising digital input/output or analog input ports

Digital Output: 250mA sink from maximum 24 Volts DC

RELAY OUTPUT 8-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising normally open, isolated relays;

LAN 8-wire RJ45 with LED indicators;

10/100BaseT Ethernet port;

COMPUTER DB9 female, RS-232 computer console port

Environmental

Temperature 41° to 113°F (5° to 45°C)


199



Note:



Sr. No.


Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Power Supply Unit Power Pack, Desktop, 24VDC, 2A (50 Watts), Regulated

E.2 Touch panel Crestron/AMX/Savant Touch panel system

Touchscreen Display



Aspect Ratio: 4:3






up/Down push button


LED Indicators Led Indicators for battery status and charging mode

Processor


SDRAM: 32 MB

Flash: 32 MB



IR Wireless Transmitter: 38 kHz



Power requirement 43 Watts (1.8 Amps @ 24 Volts DC) with touch panel docked




200



Note:



Sr. No.


E.3 IR Probes Infrared (IR) Emitter Probe with 2-pin Mini Connector

Crestron/AMX/kramer

Infrared emitter probe to communicate directly with IR sensor window of a television, DVD player, or any other IR controllable device with following specs

Connectors 2-pin detachable terminal block for connection to IR port

Cable Length wire Lead:Aleast 3 ft long

Cable: Atleast 7 ft long


Bands 2.4 GHz

Tx / Rx * 2-way RF, 2.4 GHz ISM Channels 11-26 (2400 to 2483.5MHz), IEEE 802.15.4 compliant







Services F.1 EquipmentRack Valrack/middle

atlantic/W&Q Equipment Rack for placing AV Devices

Rack size 12U

Approved Make


201


VOLUME II, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AUDIO VISUAL REQUIREMENT FOR CABIN S1/33a-S33/33a, CABIN M1'/12a-M12'/12a, CABIN M1/12a-M12/12a, CABIN M8a,

CABIN M9a,S5b, M7b, M7k, M7e, M7f, M20a &Secretary café


NRDA.



Display Devices A.1 40" or above LED Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/Sony

Screen Size (Diagonal): 40" or Above 40" or Above


Aspect ratio : 16:9







A.2 Wall mount For 40" or above Display Custom A.3 AV WALL PLATE VGA +Audio wALL PLATE Custom


A.4 32" or above LCD Display LG/Samsung/Panasonic/Sony Screen Size (Diagonal): 32 or Above 32 or Above

Panel Type LCD

Aspect ratio : 16:9



Brightness 400 Cd/m2

Viewing angle degree 178*178



A.5 Wall mount For 32" or above Display Custom

A.6 AV WALL PLATE VGA +Audio WALL PLATE Custom



202

Subject: SITC of PA System, Annual Operation, Repairing & Maintenance of Audio-Visual System for Mantralaya

Mahanadi Bhawan Naya Raipur Reference: Work Order No: 1192 / Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2014-15, Raipur, dated: 24/ 12 /2014

Contract Agreement No. 32 /AV-AMC/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2014-15 dtd. 19/12/2014

[Surabhi Enterprises,Raipur]

***** Technical SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL: Manufacturer Specification of each items.


203


204

Sl. No. Item No. Item Unit Qty Make/Model

1

2 A.1 Matrix display (For Front wall) No. 1 LG 47WV30

3 A.2 LCD Display No. 2 LG 47LV3730

4

A.3 Mounting Bracket No. 1 OEM / OEM Certified Against Item

Number A.1

5

A.4 Mounting Bracket (For LCD (LED

Backlit) Display)

No. 2 OEM / OEM Certified Against Item

Number A.2

6

7 B.1 Switcher-cum-Scalar No. 1 Kramer VP-729

8 B.2 Matrix Switcher No. 1 Kramer VS-3232DN

9 B.3 Digital Twisted Pair Tx No. 8 Kramer PT-571

10 B.4 Digital Twisted Pair Rx No. 4 Kramer PT-572+

11 B.5 Analog Twisted Pair Transmitter No. 20 Kramer SID - VGA

12

13 B.6 Table box No. 18 Kramer TBUS-1A/X2/UNIV/220v

14 B.7 VGA + A patch cable No. 18 Kramer CGMA/GMA-3

15 B.8 HDMI Patch Cable No. 20 Kramer C-HM/HM-3

16

17 C.1 Control System No. 1 AMX NI-2100

18 C.2 Wireless Touch panel No. 1 AMX MIO-R4-CC (FG148-14K)

19 C.3 Wireless Router for Touch Panel No. 1 AMX NXA-WAP1000

20

21

22 D.1 Wireless Handheld Microphone No. 0 Beyerdynamic Opus669

23 D.2 Wireless Lapel Microphone No. 1 Beyerdynamic Opus650

24 D.3 Conference Controller No. 1 Beyerdynamic MCS 50/32

25 D.4 Chairman Microphone No. 1 Beyerdynamic MCS 523

26 D.5 Delegate Microphone No. 28 Beyerdynamic MCS 521

27 D.6 Connecting Cables-8 feets No. 29 Beyerdynamic

28

29 D.7 Audio DSP No. 1 Clearone Intract Pro

30 D.8 FOH Speaker No. 2 Tannoy i9

31 D.9 Ceiling Speakers No. 8 Tannoy CMS401e

32 D.10 Audio Amplifier No. 1 LabGruppen C10:8x

33 D.11 Audio Amplifier No. 1 LabGruppen E4:2

34

35 E.1 Equipment Rack No. 1 Custom

36

37 Sl. No. Item Unit Qty Make/Model

38

39

A.1 6000 ANSI Lumens Projector with

ceiling Mount

No. 1 Christie DWU670

40 A.2 119" Motorized screen No. 1 Da-Lite Cosmopolitan Electro

41

42 B.1 Switcher-cum-Scalar No. 1 Kramer VP-729

43 B.2 Digital Twisted Pair Tx No. 2 Kramer PT-571

44 B.3 Digital Twisted Pair Rx No. 2 Kramer PT-572+

45

46 B.4 Table box No. 3 Kramer TBUS-1A/X2/UNIV/220v

47 B.5 VGA + A patch cable No. 2 Kramer CGMA/GMA-3

48 B.6 HDMI Patch Cable No. 2 Kramer C-HM/HM-3

49

50 C.1 Control System No. 1 AMX NI-2100

51 C.2 Wireless Touch panel No. 1 AMX MIO-R4-CC (FG148-14K)

52 C.3 Wireless Router for Touch Panel No. 1 D-Link

53

54

55 D.1 Wireless Handheld Microphone No. 0 Beyerdynamic Opus669

Microphones

Audio Devices

Control System

Table Interface AND service Equipment System

Control Devices

ANNEXURE - A

LIST OF AUDIO-VISUAL ITEMS INSTALLED IN MANTRALAYA MAHANADI-BHAWAN


AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM FOR CONFERENCE ROOM S1

Display Devices

Audio Devices

Table Interface AND service Equipment System

Control Devices

Control System

Display Devices

AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM FOR CONFERENCE ROOM S2

Amplifiers and Speakers System

Services

Microphones


205


A.1 Five Conductor High

Resolution Cable

High-resolution 75? 5-mini coaxial cable

perfect for routing RGBHV signals in

commercial or residential A/V systems.

Extron / Kramer / Belden

A.2 Two Conductor High

Resolution Cable

High-resolution dual mini coaxial cable

perfect for routing s-Video signals, also

known as Y/C, in commercial A/V systems.


A.3 Speaker Cable High-quality twisted pair cable designed for

connecting speakers and amplifiers in

commercial l A/V systems.


A.4 Microphone Cable High-quality shielded pair cable designed for

routing balanced mono or unbalanced stereo

mic or line level audio signals in commercial

A/V systems.


A.5 Control Cable High-quality control cable Extron / Kramer / Belden

A.6 Shielded Twisted Pair

CAT5 cable

High-quality shielded twisted pair cable (STP)

suitable for use in environments with high

levels of EMI. It meets the CAT 5e standard

and is suitable for use in network

applications

Systimax / Extron / Kramer /

Digilink

A.7 Connectors Audio Video Conectors as per site

requirement.

Extron / Kramer / Belden /

Neutrick

Cables & Connectors

Cables & Connectors (Imported cables, RCA, VGA, Audio) and connectors

SPECIFICATIONS OF AUDIO-VISUAL ITEMS INSTALLED IN MANTRALAYA MAHANADI-BHAWAN


Sr. No. Technical Specification Approved Make

Sr. No. Particulars Model / Make1 Wireless Handheld Microphone Beyerdynamic Opus669

2 Wireless Lapel Microphone Beyerdynamic Opus650

3 Conference Controller Beyerdynamic MCS 50/32

4 Chairman Microphone Beyerdynamic MCS 523

5 Delegate Microphone Beyerdynamic MCS 521

6 Audio DSP Clearone Intract Pro

7 FOH Speaker Tannoy i9

8 Ceiling Speakers Tannoy CMS401e

9 Audio Amplifier LabGruppen C10:8x

10 Audio Amplifier LabGruppen E4:2

11 Wall Mount Speaker Tannoy Di5t

12 Mixing Amplifier BiAmp MXA 300

13 FOH Speaker Tannoy i7

14 Audio Amplifier BiAmp MCA 8150

Audio


206


The whole of the materials, employed in connection with the permanent work, shall be new and of the best of its kind. All materials shall be in accordance with these specifications and shall be as approved by the engineer’s representative.

Standards:

Except where otherwise specified or permitted by the engineer in charge, all material shall confirm to the latest edition of Indian /international Standard Specifications.

Sr. No. Particulars Model / Make

1 Matrix display (For Front wall) LG 47WV30

2 LCD Display LG 47LV3730

3 Switcher-cum-Scalar Kramer VP-729

4 Matrix Switcher Kramer VS-3232DN

5 Digital Twisted Pair Tx Kramer PT-571

6 Digital Twisted Pair Rx Kramer PT-572+

7 Analog Twisted Pair Transmitter Kramer SID - VGA

8 Table box Kramer TBUS-1A/X2/UNIV/220v

9 Control System AMX NI-2100

10 Wireless Touch panel AMX MIO-R4-CC (FG148-14K)

11 Wireless Router for Touch Panel AMX NXA-WAP1000

12 6000 ANSI Lumens Projector Christie DWU670

13 119" Motorized screen Da-Lite

14 Matrix Controller Mitsubishi DXN 3204U4

15 Control System AMX NI-3100

16 Wireless Touch panel AMX MVP-9000i

17 Wireless Router for Touch Panel AMX NXA-WAP1000

18 Lighting Control Lutron GXI 3104 / AMX

19 Commercial Display Monitor LG 65VS10

20 LCD (LED Backlit) Display LG 47LV3730



23

4300 Lumens Multimedia Data/Video

Projector Mitsubishi/Model no. WD720U

24

2800 Lumens Multimedia Data/Video

Projector Mitsubishi/Model no. 385U-EST

Video


207

Name of work: Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Multimedia Data/Video Projector in Mantralaya,

MahanadiBhawan, Naya Raipur.

Reference: NRDA Work Order No. 436 /Projector/Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16 dated: 16.7.15, CA No. 07 /Projector /Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16 Dtd.: 15/7/2015.[ Surabhi Enterprises, G.E. Road, Raipu]

*****

Name of Work: Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Multimedia Data/Video Projector in Mantralaya, MahanadiBhawan, Naya Raipur.

NIT No.: 10 /Projector/Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16 Naya Raipur, Dated: 15 /5/2015

S.No. Item Description Units Qty

1 2 3 4

1 Supply & Installation of 4300 Lumens (Make-Mitsubishi/Model no. WD720U) with Wireless capability OR EQUIVALENT Multimedia Data/Video Projector.

No. 1

2 Supply & Installation of 133" Diagonal size Motorised Screen (make Da-Lite) No. 1

3 Supply & Installation of 4000 Lumens Multimedia Data/Video Projector (Make-Hitachi /Model no. CPX 4015 CN) with Wireless capability OR EQUIVALENT Multimedia Data/Video Projector.

No. 1

4 Supply & Installation of 100" Diagonal (7ft x 5ft) size Motorised Screen (Make Draper Baronet, Liberty, Suvira Etc.)

No. 1

5 Supply & Laying of Cables to Connect the Display devices to Source Devices. HDMI-C-HM/HM/PRO-25(25’) Make: Kramer The cable is required to connect the various display devices to source devices (PC/LAPTOP/DVD/VC) Scalar, Switcher etc.

No. 2

6 VGA Cable 15 mtr Make: Kramer (Contract Item) No. 2

7 Supply & Installation of Liberty ST- 1200 make Mounting Bracket for Projector. No. 2

8 Supply & Installation of ABTUS WiPG-1000 Wireless Presentation Gateway for cable less computer/presentation device connecting to Display device. Make: Belkin, AtBus WiPG etc.

No. 2

9

Supply & Installation of power socket with metal box set, for providing power supply points at table box locations in various conference rooms, for smooth operation at independent locations, and to minimize wiring complications. Complete set with under mentioned components.Electrical Sockets & Switches (Set) : Legrand Power Socket with Metal Box - Set

Set 14

10 Supplying & Laying of Cables for Digital Transmitter & Receiver to Carry Data, Video & Audio Signals on Cat 5/6 Cable.

Rmt. 50

11

Delegate MicrophoneWith condenser gooseneck mic, illuminated ring and loudspeaker, 15-pin D-Sub Connector, Features Basic Features , Model- MCS 521

No. 10

Modern design plastic housing with non-glare, scratch-resistant Nextel finish, Features Basic Features

High-quality gooseneck microphone (including pop screen)

LED to indicate microphone is switched on or off, Features LED Indicator

Dual colour LED to indicate the microphone on / request to talk status, Features LED Indicator


208

Integrated, Wide Band Loudspeaker, Headphone Socket with 3.5 mm Mini Jack Features Loudspeaker

Buttons to set the volume Features Buttons Required

DIP switches for addressing and programming the microphone unit Features Buttons Required

Ready-to-Talk status of the microphone is indicated by the illuminated red ring and the green LED in the housing. Features Ready to Talk Status Indicator

80 Hz to 19000 Hz, Features Frequency response

Gooseneck Microphone with illuminated ring .Features Microphone Type

Cardioid, Features Polar pattern

Condenser (back electret) .Features Transducer type

0° C to +50° C Features Temperature range

12 Connecting cable with 8-pin Renk-connector, length 2.5 m (8 ft.). Modal- Krammer No. 10

13 Supply & Installation of Brass Gromments for Microphones, in conference rooms, to enable smooth movement of connecting cables from one mic to the next and conceal the opening made in the table, for the cables. (Custom Made Brass Grommet), Modal-. Brass

No. 10


209

Name of work: Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 55 Inch LED TV (Monitor) at Mantralaya, Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur.

Reference: . NRDA Work Order No. 438 / LED TV-Mantralaya-MD / EEC1/ CE (E) / 2015-16, dated: 16.7.15, CA No. 08 / LED TV-Mantralaya-MD / EEC1/ CE (E) / 2015-16 Dtd. 15/7/2015.[ Surabhi Enterprises, G.E. Road, Raipur]

*****

Sl. No. Item of work (Description of item) Unit Qty.

1 2 3 4

1

Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of approved make 55 inch LED TV (Monitor) with Embedded Media Player, Analogue & Digital Connectivity, Ethernet/ RS232 Remote Control, Auto Brightness Sensor, Smart Scheduling, Landscape or portrait mode. PANEL'S : Diagonal size 55, type 120HzLED BLU Resolution 1920X1080 (16:9), Pixel Pitch (mm) 0.21(H)X0.63(V), Active Display Area (mm) 1209.6(H)X680.4(V), Brightness (Typ.) 350nit, Contrast Ratio 5000:1. CONNECTIVITY: INPUT RGB Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, VIDEO Component, CVBS, HDMI, AUDIO Stereo Mini jack. OUTPUT AUDIO Stereo mini jack. External Control RS232C (In/Out), RJ45. POWER: type Internal, Power supply AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz, Power consumption max(W/h) 164, typical (W/h) 124, Sleep mode less than 1W, Off mode less than 1W. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION: Dimension (mm) Set 1247.7x722.9x95.2, Package 1381x838x170. Weight (Kg) Set 17.9, Package 23.7. OPERATION: VESA Mount 400x400 mm, Bezel Width (mm) 17.5 mm (bottom 21.:5mm), Operating temperature 0-40 degree Celsius, Humidity 10-80%. Equivalent or upgraded version/ features are acceptable. Approved Make: Sony, Samsung, Panasonic.

Nos 2

Total 2


210

Name of Work : Designing, Providing & Fixing Balcony / Terrace / Garden Landscaping including One year maintenance in


Reference: W.O No. 1193 / LS/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) /NRDA/2014-15, Naya Raipur, dated: 24/ 12 /2014.

Contract Agreement No. 33 /AV-AMC/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2014-15 dtd. 19/12/2014 [Vanya

Landscaping & Horticulture Solution (P) Ltd. Raipur]

S. No. Description Unit Qty.

1 2 3 4

1 Designing of Balconay / Terrace / Garden Landscaping with Draft concept plan for approval and after approval 3D concept plan complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 1000

2 Design, Providing & Fixing BAMBOO WORK Murals / PANELLING IN WALL of APPROVED DESIGN AND SIZE with necessary mounting civil work complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 100

3 Design, Providing & Fixing GFRP Murals / STATUE of APPROVED DESIGN AND SIZE with necessary mounting civil work complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Kg 40

4 Design, Providing & Fixing GRC / Siporex Murals of average size 24 Sqft complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 40

5 Providing & Fixing 3' height Sand Stone statue/Fountain OF APPROVED DESIGN complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

No. 2

6 Providing & Fixing Pedestal of Sand Stone Bollards (15” X 28”X15”) complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

No. 2

7 Providing & Fixing BONSAI up to 3 feet height complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

No. 2

8 Providing & Fixing Sand Stone / GFRP /Metal Garden Lights (1 feet) complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

No. 2

9 Providing & Fixing Sand Stone Balls (7” height) complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

No. 4

10 Providing & Fixing Water Proof Treatment with Chemical etc. complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge..

Sqft. 1000

11 Providing & Fixing Tiles Arrangements for lawn complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 1000

12 Providing & Fixing Poly Sheet for Lawn complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 1000

13 Providing & Fixing Vertical Bio-wall with MS square frame with Plants, Soil mixture, Manure etc. complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 400

14 Providing & Fixing Providing & Fixing of Talpatri for Bio Wall & Lawn complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 400

15 Providing & Fixing Haridwar Stone complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Kg 1000

16 Providing & Fixing Fertile Soil Mix Manures for Lawn complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Cuft. 1000

17 Providing & Fixing of Mexican /Saint Augstin/Paspolum/Selection 1 Grass complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 1000


211

18 Providing & Fixing Indoor Plants with Soil mixture, Manure etc. complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

No. 200

19 Providing & Fixing Indoor Plants complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

No. 400

20 Providing & Fixing Green Nylon Net for Protection of Plants complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

Sqft. 500

21 Providing & Fixing Pots complete as per direction & approval of Engineer-in-Charge-

i Planter HG 3205 (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/SILVER) Self Irrigated Pots Size: 375 mm H X 300mm L X 375mm W

No. 2

ii Planter HG-3206 (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/SILVER) Self Irrigated Pots Size: 400 mm H X 375mm L X 450mm W

No. 2

iii Planter HG-3163 (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/SILVER) Self Irrigated Pots Size: 325 mm H X 575mm L X 300mm W

No. 4

iv Planter HG-3161 (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/SILVER) Self Irrigated Pots Size: 750 mm H X 300mm L X 400mm W

No. 1

v Planter Ceremic (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/BLUE ETC.) Size: 500 mm H X 450 mm R

No. 1

vi Planter Ceremic (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/BLUE ETC.) Size: 375 mm H X 350 mm R

No. 1

vii Planter Ceremic (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/BLUE ETC.) Size: 450 mm H X 450 mm R

No. 1

viii Planter Ceremic (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/BLUE ETC.) Size: 325 mm H X 325 mm R

No. 1

ix Planter Ceremic (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/BLUE ETC.) Size: 300 mm H X 300 mm R

No. 1

x Planter Ceremic (WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/BROWN/BLUE ETC.) Size: 200 mm H X 200 mm R

No. 1

xi Planter PLASTIC POT 20" WITH TRAY No. 10

xii Planter PLASTIC POT 20" WITH TRAY No. 10

xiii Planter PLASTIC POT 18" WITH TRAY No. 10

xiv Planter PLASTIC POT BLACK COLOR(SMALL) No. 20

xv CLAY BALLS No. 20


212

Schedule-A : Bill of Quantity (BOQ) Name of Work :- Annual Maintenance Contract of Landscaping & Irrigation in Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya

Raipur.

NIT No. : 36/ Landscaping/ Mantralaya-MD/2nd Call/ NRDA/2015-16 Naya Raipur, Dated: 23/10/2015

Item No. Discription Unit Qty

1

Annual Maintenance of Landscaping & Irrigation in Mantralaya Mahanadi

Bhawan, Naya Raipur as per Scope of services, Specification and directed by

the engineer-in-charge in the following areas-

Per Month Lumpsum

a) CM Entry, L1/D-Gate, L-2/C-Gate & L3/VIP Entry (Approx. 2500 Sqm) Lumpsum 1

b) Ministry Block Front & Back , Secretary Block all around, Section Block all

around, Anci-B Block all around Landscape area (Approx. 5000 Sqm) Lumpsum 1

c) Central Courtyard, Secretary Block Courtyard, Section Block Courtyard, Anci-A

Block Courtyard Landscape area (Approx. 7500 Sqm) Lumpsum 1

d) Ministry Block Balcony (4, 3, 2 & 1Fl), Secretary Block Balcony (4, 3, 2 & 1Fl),

Section Block Balcony (4, 3, 2 & 1Fl) Landscape area (Approx. 1500 Sqm) Lumpsum 1

e) Cafeteria & Library area Terrace Garden (Approx. 700 Sqm) Lumpsum 1

f) Plants and Filtration system of Lotus-pond at Section Block-Courtyard and Water

Body of Central Courtyard (Approx. 500 Sqm) Lumpsum 1

Schedule-A


213


214

Name of work :- Supply of Plumbing & Sanitary fittings, Paints and WTP materials for Maintenance of Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur.[ Yash Construction & Suppliers]

Work Order No: 336 /P&S/Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/CE(E)/NRDA/2014-15, Naya Raipur, dated: 29 / 06 /2015 CA No. 06 /P&S/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/CE (E) /NRDA / 14-15 Dated: 25 /6/2015.

NIT No.: 01/P&S/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16 Naya Raipur, Dated: 06 /04/2015

Item No. Description of Item Unit QUANTITY Remarks

1 2 3 4 9

A PLUMBING AND SANITARY

2 Wall Hung W.C Nos 16 Hindware/Studio/White/Cat-20006

3 Under Counter Wash Basin Oval Nos 18 Hindware/Cat.-10049/490X400/White

4 Wash Basin Round Nos 14 Hindware/Cat-10065/495X395/White

5 Orissa Pan with fittings Nos 18 Hindware/Cat-2004/570X420/White

6 Stainless Steel Single Bowl Sink Nos 3 Nirali/1100X450

7 Urinal With Inbuilt Sensor Type Auto Urinal Flush Valve

Nos 18 Hindware/Cat.-60007/White

8 Brass CP Single Lever Mixer With Diverter Nos 5 Jaquar/Cat-3075/ASTRA

9 Brass CP Basin Mixer Nos 8 Jaquar/Cat-3001/ASTRA

10 CP Bottle Trap with CP Wall Flange Nos 175 Jaquar/Cat-769

11 Brass CP Waste Coupling For W.B 32mm Half Thread with 80mm Height

Nos 70 Jaquar/Cat-709/32mm

12 15mm Dia Brass CP Angle Stop Cock Nos 46 Jaquar/Cat-053

13 CP Connector With Brass Check Nut (450mm Length) Nos 176 Jaquar/Continental

14 15mm Dia Brass CP Bib Cock With Wall Flange Nos 125 Jaquar/Cat-041

15 Arm & Shower Rose With Wall Flange Nos 1 Jaquar/Cat489

16 CP Spout For Shower Nos 1 Jaquar/Cat-429

17 CP Pilar Cock Nos 160 Jaquar/Cat-021

18 Sink Mixture With J Shape Spout With Wall Flange (Wall Mountained)

Nos 3 Jaquar/Cat-357

19 CP Towel Ring Nos 7 Jaquar/Cat-1121N

20 Brass CP Robe Hook Twin Type Nos 160 Jaquar/Cat-1191N

21 CP Towel Rod, 20mm diaX600mm long Nos 7 Jaquar/Cat 1111N

22 Brass CP Toilet Paper Holder Nos 80 Jaquar/Cat-1151N

23 CP Shop Dish Nos 22 Jaquar/Cat-1131N

24 PVC Square Jali for Nanhi Trap Nos 185 Savita/150X150

25 Stainless Steel Liquid Soap Dispenser H120xW90X100mm Dia

Nos 15 Jaquar/120X90X100

26 Heavy Duty Brass CP Waste Coupling For Urinals 32mm Full Thread with 80mm height

Nos 160 Jaquar


215

27 15 Ltr Storage Type Water Heater With Thermostat Controls,Back Pressure Valve Complete.

Nos 2 Racold

28 Storage type water cooler of capacity 120ltr Nos 4 Voltas/120 Ltrs per hour,30C at inlet &

13.5 C at outlet

29 Hand Faucet with 1 Meter Long PVC Tube & Wall Hook Nos 160 Jaquar/Cat-563

30 upvc pipe RM 25 150mm/Supreme/Astral










40 Brass Ball Valve With Lever For Operation Nos 18 15mm/Zoloto/DRP

41 Brass Ball Valve With Lever For Operation Nos 18 20mm/Zoloto






47 CI Main Hole Cover of 600mm Dia For Storage Water Tank

Nos 18 600 Dia/NECO/38kg

48 Copper pipe RM 30 15mm/Maxflow

49 Copper pipe RM 30 20mm/Maxflow

50 Butterfly Valve Nos 7 150mm/Audco


52 Single Ball Acting Air Release Valve Nos 7 20mm/Zoloto



55 CI Pipe 150mm RM 35 150mm(6"dia)/Neco



58 CI Door Bend 100mm Nos 30 Neco

59 CI Door Tee 100mm Nos 30 Neco

60 CI Door Cross Tee 100mm Nos 30 Neco







67 CI Plain Bend 100mm Nos 30 Neco

68 CI Plain Tee 100mm Nos 30 Neco

69 CI Plain Cross Tee 100mm Nos 30 Neco

70 CI Collar100mm Nos 30 Neco



216



74 CI Collar75mm Nos 30 Neco




78 CI Collar 50mm Nos 30 Neco

79 PVC Pipe (10kg) 50mm RM 50 Supreme

80 PVC Pipe (10kg) 40mm RM 50 Supreme

81 600mm dia mirror for wash room Nos 14 Saint Gobain

82 900mm dia mirror for wash room Nos 4 Saint Gobain

83 Metro Flush Valve Nos 28 32mm/Jaquar

84 Metro Flush Valve Nos 21 40mm/Jaquar

85 EWC Seat Cover Nos 21 Studio/Hindware

86 65mm upvc Elbow Nos 15 65mm/Supreme

87 65mm upvc Coupler Nos 15 65mm/Supreme

88 65mm upvc Tee Nos 15 65mm/Supreme

89 65mm upvc MTA(PVC) Nos 15 65mm/Supreme

90 65mm upvc FTA(PVC) Nos 15 65mm/Supreme

91 65mm upvc elbow 45 Nos 15 65mm/Supreme






97 50mm upvc elbow 45 Nos 15 50mm/Supreme






103 40mm upvc Elbow 45 Nos 15 40mm/Supreme




















217

122 upvc Reducer Tee 65mmX50mm Nos 15 Supreme/Astral





















143 upvc Reducer Coupling 50mmX40mm Nos 15 Supreme/Astral

144 upvc Reducer Coupling 65mmX50mm Nos 15 Supreme/Astral

145 upvc Reducer Bushing 50mmX40mm Nos 15 Supreme/Astral















160 upvc solvent cement Ltr 15 Supreme/Astral

161 Copper Elbow Nos 15 15mm/Maxflow

162 Copper Elbow Thread Nos 15 15mm/Maxflow

163 Copper Coupler Nos 15 15mm/Maxflow

164 Copper Tee Thread Nos 15 15mm/Maxflow

165 Copper Tee Nos 15 15mm/Maxflow

166 Copper Upset Nos 15 15mm/Maxflow

167 Dhaga Pkts. 7 Sparrow

168 Teflon Tape Nos 100 Champion

169 Heckshaw Blade Nos 28 12"/SS

170 M Seal Kg 25 Pidilite


218

171 Aralide Kg 11 Pidilite

172 Silicone Tube Nos 35 Pidilite

173 White Cement Bag 35 Birla White

174 Gasket Kg 35 Rubber

175 Jublie Clamp Nos 50 20mm/Italian

176 Jublie Clamp Nos 50 15mm/Italian

177 Sink Waste Pipe (PVC) Nos 50 32mm/Nirali

178 Urinal Connection Pipe (One side outer thread) Nos 175 12"/Senso

179 Push Tap (For W.Cooler) Nos 18 15mm/Jaquar

180 White Grease Kg 35 Castrol/10Kg

181 Battery For Urinal Sensors Nos 700 AA 1.5V/Duracel

182 Urinal Sensor Nos 70 Senso/Hindware

183 Metro Flush Valve (Spare Parts) Set 35 32mm/Jaquar

184 Metro Flush Valve (Spare Parts) Set 35 40mm/Jaquar

185 Gland Rope Pkt 35 6 mm/Crompton

186 Gland Rope Pkt 35 8mm/Crompton

187 Hex Nipple (G.I) Nos 35 15mm/Heavy

188 Connection Pipe Washer Pkt 15 15mm/Heavy

189 Hex Nipple (C.P) Nos 35 15mm/Heavy

190 G. I Socket Nos 35 15mm/Heavy

191 Extension Piece Nos 25 15mmX25mm/Heavy



194 Dead Plug (M.S) Nos 15 15mm/Heavy

195 Dead Plug (G.I) Nos 15 15mm/Heavy

196 Dead Plug (U PVC) Nos 15 15mm/Heavy

197 G.I Nipple Nos 15 15mmX50mm/Heavy



200 G.I Nipple full thread Nos 21 15mmX100mm/Heavy


202 Safeda/White Lead Kg 10 W.Zinc

203 Bottle Trap Washer Pkt 10 32mm/Heavy

204 Bottle Trap Washer Pkt 10 40mm/Heavy

205 Pillar Cock & Bib Cock Internal fitting Nos 140 15mm/Jaquar

206 Pillar cock Filter Set Nos 80 15mm/Jaquar

207 PVC Grip With Steel Screw Pkt 28 1.5"Meena

208 Drip Seal Kg 35 Pidilite

209 Packing Rope/Jute Kg 10 25mm/Jute

210 RCC Strom Water Cover Nos 7 520X520/RCC

211 RCC Strom Water Cover Nos 7 6000X600/RCC

212 CI Rectangular Cover Nos 7 550X1000/100kg/NECO

213 CI GT Cover Nos 6 300X300/NECO

214 Mainhole Cover Nos 6 600 Dia/NECO/125kg

215 CI Grating Nos 7 600X450/16Kg/NECO





219

B PAINTS Ramark

a Acrylic emulsion paint as below-

1 Pipe Dream Ltr 140 Asian Paints/code no. L154 For Internal rooms &

Corridor

2 Coral Coast Ltr 70 Asian Paints/code no. 8016 Ministers Ante Room

3 Day Break Ltr 70 Asian Paints/code no. 0942 Special Secretary

4 Coral Rocks Ltr 70 Asian Paints/code no. 8019 Secrateries Cabin

5 Desert Ivory Ltr 70 Asian Paints/code no. 8020 Secretary Ante Room

6 Orange Frost Ltr 70 Asian Paints/code no. 7979 PS + Other Staff

b 100% acrylic exterior weatherproof Paint Apex Ultima as below-

1 Morning Glory Ltr 70 Asian Paints/code no. 0765

2 Raining Grey Ltr 70 Asian Paints/code no. 9481

3 African Plain Ltr 105 Asian Paints/code no. 8494

4 Evening Shade Ltr 140 Asian Paints/code no. 8758

5 White Paint Ltr 140 Asian Paints

c Synthetic oil paint as below-

1 Black Enamel Ltr 175 Asian Paints

2 Silver Paint Ltr 140 Asian Paints

3 Wallcare Putty Bag 70 Birla / JK

sub-total [B]

C WTP & FILTRATION SYSTEM

1 Tri Chloroiso Cyanuric Acid Kg 210

For Water Fountain

2 Hydrated Aluminium Sulphate - Alum - (Al2 So4)3] / (Ferric Chlorite/FeCl3)

Kg 210

3 Sodium Hypoclorite (NaoCl) / Bleaching Powder

Kg 280 For WTP

4 Common Salt kg 20000

5 PPC Cement Bag 140

6 Sand truck 1.4

7 20mm stone Aggregate truck 0.7

8 10mm stone Aggregate truck 0.7

sub-total [C]

Total [A+B+C]


220

Name of Work: Supply of Electrical Light Fixtures Fan & Desert Water cooler under Maintenance in Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur –

Reference: Work Order No: 1191/E&F/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2014-15, dated: 24 /12 /2014 CA No. 31 / E&F/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/CE(E)/NRDA/2014-15 Dt.:19 /12/2014[Nutendra Kumar Sahu, Raipur]

SUPPLY OF ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURES, FAN & DESERT WATER COOLER FOR ANNUAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF MANTRALAYA MAHANADI-BHAWAN, NAYA-RAIPUR

NIT No. 19/ ELF/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2014-15 Naya Raipur, Dated: 03/11/2014. Sl. / Item Nos.

.

Description Make Model /

Cat Nos..

Capacity Unit Qty. Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[A]

1 Supply of Single way 6A Switch , Havells 675901 6A Nos. 250

2 Supply of 6 A x 5 pin 230 Volt socket. Havells 673144

5 6A Nos. 50

3 Supply of 1 Nos.s 6/16A x 230 Volt 5 pin socket outlet point with 16 A switch.

Havells 675915 6/16A Nos. 100

4 Supply of RJ 11 telephone jack type socket. Molex N/A Nos. 100

5 Supply of RJ 45 computer jack (Avaya make) type socket.

Molex N/A Nos. 100

6 Supply of Television coaxial type socket. Legrand N/A Nos. 25

7 2x26 concealed type CFL fixture (Round type) Wipro WCP37226SG

AGL 26W Nos. 200

Cat No. year 2011

B LAMPS FOR BELOW LIGHT FIXTURES

1 LAMPS FOR Concealed mounted top openable type 2x36w CFL fixture

Osram N/A 36W Nos. 100 Cat No. year 2012

2 Concealed mounted botton openable type 2x36w CFL fixture Acrylic.


3 Surface mounted 1x15 W CFL fixture (In built choke spiral type)

Wipro W06-M11

15W Nos. 100 Cat No. year 2012

4 2x26 concealed type CFL fixture (Round type) Osram N/A 26W Nos. 1000 Cat No. year 2012

5 2x26 concealed type CFL fixture (Square type) Osram N/A 26W Nos. 500 Cat No. year 2012

6 Surface mounted 2X18 W CFL Fixture Osram N/A 18W Nos. 100 Cat No. year 2012

7 Surface mounted type 1x36W FTL box type fixture Osram N/A 36W Nos. 50 Cat No. year 2012

8 Surface mounted type 2x36W FTL box type fixture Osram N/A 36W Nos. 50 Cat No. year 2012

9 Surface mounted type 2x36W FTL acrylic covertype fixture


10 Surface mounted type 1X70 W MH type up and down light fixture



221

11 Brick Light 1X10 W (In built choke type) Wipro 10W Nos. 200 Cat No. year 2012

12 Concealed mounted 2X18 W CFL fixture Osram N/A 18W Nos. 100 Cat No. year 2012

13 1 X 18 W CFL Bollard light fixture Osram N/A 18W Nos. 50 Cat No. year 2012

14 2 X 36 W Recess mounted crescent range of luminaire with electronic ballast.

Osram N/A 36W Nos. 20

Cat No. year 2012

15 Wall mounted die cast aluminium down light suitable for 18 W light fixture

Osram N/A 18 W Nos. 25 Cat No. year 2012

[C] CHOKES/DRIVERS/BALAST FOR BELOW LIGHT FIXTURES

1 Concealed mounted top openable type 2x36w CFL fixture

Wipro WVP74236SG

A 2 X 36 W Nos. 15

Cat No. year 2012

2 Concealed mounted botton openable type 2x36w CFL fixture Acrylic.

Wipro WVP52236SG

A 2 X 36 W Nos. 15

Cat No. year 2012

3 2x26 concealed type CFL fixture (Round type) Wipro WCP37226SG

AGL 2 X 26 W Nos. 750

Cat No. year 2012

4 Surface mounted 2X18 W CFL Fixture Wipro 2X18 SM APF

2 X 18 W Nos. 50 Cat No. year 2012

5 Surface mounted type 1x36W FTL box type fixture Wipro WIF36140SGA

S 1 X 36 W Nos. 30

Cat No. year 2012

6 Surface mounted type 2x36W FTL box type fixture Wipro WIF36240SGA

S 2 X 36 W Nos. 30

Cat No. year 2012

7 Surface mounted type 1X70 W MH type up and down light fixture

Wipro UWH11

070B 70 W Nos. 15

Cat No. year 2012

8 Concealed mounted 2X18 W CFL fixture Wipro WCP27218SG

A 2 X 18 W Nos. 50

Cat No. year 2012

9 1 X 18 W CFL Bollard light fixture Wipro WBP26

118 18 W Nos. 25

Cat No. year 2012

10 Wall mounted die cas aluminium down light suitable for 18 W light fixture

Wipro WBP32

1118 18 W Nos. 20

Cat No. year 2012

[D]

1 Jumbo aircooler with mounting trolly,cooling area 700 Sq.ft.,auto tank capacity 50 ltr,air through distance 35 ft

Symphony

50 Ltr., 700 SqF

cooling area

Nos. 20

2 FPMCB Schinder C60H 63A Nos.. 5

3 FPMCB Schinder C60H 40A Nos.. 5

4 SPMCB Schinder C60H 25A Nos.. 5




8 DPELCB Schinder 16205 63A(100M

A) Nos.. 5


222


A) Nos.. 5


A) Nos.. 5

11 Connector jainson 10 Amp Nos.. 30





16 Exhaust Fan Crisp Air 250 mm. USHA Nos.. 20

17 15", 1400 rpm single phase Exhaust Fan Havells SR-

13024090

150W Nos. 3

18 400 mm dia Wall Mounted Fan Make - Havells Havells FHWSWPTWHT16

Nos. 5

19 400 mm dia Padestal Fan Make - Havells Havells FHSSWSTCWH16

Nos. 5

20 1.5 Sqmm cu. multi Strenth PVC wire. Polycab/Havell Mtr 300

21 2.5 Sqmm cu. multi Strenth PVC wire. Polycab/Havell Mtr 200

22 4 Sqmm cu. multi Strenth PVC wire. Polycab/Havell Mtr 200

23 CRC (Chemical) Bharat Bijlee Liter 2

24 Contactor L&T MNX

18 18Amp Nos.. 5


12 12Amp Nos.. 5


45 45Amp Nos.. 10


70 70Amp Nos.. 5


95 95Amp Nos.. 5


25 25 Amp Nos.. 5

30 Contactor Kit L&T MNX

25 25 Amp Nos.. 5


18 18Amp Nos.. 5


12 12Amp Nos.. 5


45 45Amp Nos.. 5


70 70Amp Nos.. 5


95 95Amp Nos.. 5

36 Timer L&T / BCH 800 X A 10 Amp Nos.. 5

37 MPCB 3 Pole L&T (Super Nova) A/AC-3 6.3 - 10

Amp Nos.. 2

38 MPCB 3 Pole L&T (Super Nova) A/AC-3 9 - 13 Amp Nos.. 2

39 MPCB 3 Pole L&T (Super Nova) A/AC-3 11 -16 Amp Nos.. 2

40 MPCB 3 Pole L&T (Super Nova) A/AC-3 4 -6.3 Amp Nos.. 2


223

41 MPCB 3 Pole L&T (Super Nova) A/AC-3 19-25 Amp Nos.. 2



44 BUZZER INDICATION Legrand Nos. 20

45 BUZZER for call bell Legrand 573643 Nos. 20

46 3pin Top ANCHOR 6/16Amp Nos.. 50

47 Extension Board ANCHOR 6/16Amp Nos.. 15

48 Supply of Kaju clip 10 mm ANCHOR pkt 5

49 Supply of Kaju clip Anchor 12 mm ANCHOR pkt 5

50 Supply of PVC Grip Anchor 1.5 inch ANCHOR pkt 5

51 Supply of PVC Tape steel Grip Steel Grip Nos. 50

52 Dummy Plate (Black) Standard Make Nos.. 250

53 Dummy Plate (White) Standard Make Nos.. 100

54 Supply of Steel Screw 1.5 inch Standard Make pkt 1

55 Supply of Steel Screw 3 inch Standard Make pkt 1

56 ELECTRONIC CALL BELL Standard Make Nos. 50

57 BATTERY 1.5V AA EVEREADY Nos. 2,500

58 BATTERY 1.5V AAA EVEREADY Nos. 1,000

59 BATTERY 12V ,23 A EVEREADY Nos. 1,000

60 BATERY 1.5V AA DURACEL Nos. 3,000

61 Cu. Lugs 2.5 Sqmm Joison Pin

Type Nos. 100

62 Cu. Lugs 2.5 Sqmm Joison Ring Type

Nos. 100

63 Cu. Lugs 4 Sqmm Joison Pin

Type Nos. 100

64 Cu. Lugs 4 Sqmm Joison Ring Type

Nos. 100

65 Cu. Lugs 6 Sqmm Joison Pin

Type Nos. 100

66 Cu. Lugs 6 Sqmm Joison Ring Type

Nos. 100

67 Al. Lugs 25 Sqmm Joison Ring Type

Nos. 50


Nos. 50


Nos. 50


Nos. 50


Nos. 50


Nos. 50

73 Cooler Pump ISI marked Nos. 10

74 Push button Tecnic 51 NO Nos. 10

75 Push button Tecnic 52 NC Nos. 10

76 Selecter Switch KEECEE 4639AP 10 Amp Nos. 5


224

Schedule-A ; BILL OF QUANTITY/PRICE BID

Supply of Electrical Light Fixtures, Fan & Accessories under Maintenance in Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan, Naya Raipur. NIT No.: 39 ELF/ Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16 Naya Raipur, Dated: 31/10/2015

Item No. Description Unit QUANTITY

1 2 3 4 [A] ELECTRICAL SWITCH & SOCKETS

1 Supply of Single way 6A Switch. Make:- Havells, Model / Cat Nos..:- 675901 Capacity: 6A

Nos. 5

2 Supply of 6 A x 5 pin 230 Volt socket. Make:- Havells, Model / Cat Nos..:- 6731445 Capacity: 6A

Nos. 25

3 Supply of 1 Nos.s 6/16A x 230 Volt 5 pin socket outlet point with 16 A switch. Make:- Havells, Model / Cat Nos..:- 675915 Capacity: 6/16A

Nos. 25

SUB TOTAL [A]

[B] LAMPS FOR LIGHT FIXTURES

1 LAMPS FOR Concealed mounted top openable type 2x36w CFL fixture Make:- Osram, Model / Cat Nos..:- N/A Capacity:36W

Nos. 100

2 LAMPS FOR Surface mounted 1x15 W CFL fixture (In built choke spiral type) Make:- Wipro, Model / Cat Nos..:- W06-M11 Capacity:15W

Nos. 300

3 LAMPS FOR 2x26 concealed type CFL fixture Make:- Osram, Model / Cat Nos..:- N/A Capacity:26W

Nos. 1000

4 LAMPS FOR Surface mounted 18 W CFL Fixture Make:- Osram, Model / Cat Nos..:- N/A Capacity:18W

Nos. 200

5 LAMPS FOR Surface mounted type 36W FTL box type fixture. Make:- Osram, Model / Cat Nos..:- N/A Capacity:36W

Nos. 250

SUB TOTAL [B]

[C] CHOKES FOR LIGHT FIXTURES

1 Choke for Concealed mounted top openable type 2x36w CFL fixture Make:- Wipro, Model / Cat Nos..:- WVP74236SGA Capacity:2 X 36 W

Nos. 50

2 Choke for 2x26 concealed type CFL fixture Make:- Wipro, Model / Cat Nos..:- WCP37226SGAGL Capacity:2 X 26 W

Nos. 200

3 Choke for Surface mounted type 1x36W FTL box type fixture.Make:- Wipro, Model / Cat Nos..:- WIF36140SGAS Capacity:1 X 36 W

Nos. 50

4 Choke for Surface mounted type 2x36W FTL box type fixture Make:- Wipro, Model / Cat Nos..:- WIF36240SGAS Capacity:2 X 36 W

Nos. 50

5 Choke for 1 X 18 W CFL Bollard light fixture Make:- Wipro, Model / Cat Nos..:- WBP26118 Capacity:18 W

Nos. 25

6 Choke for Wall mounted die cas aluminium down light suitable for 18 W light fixture. Make:- Wipro, Model / Cat Nos..:- WBP321118 Capacity:18 W

Nos. 10

SUB TOTAL [C]

[D] COOLER & FANS

1 Jumbo aircooler with mounting trolly,cooling area 700 Sq.ft.,auto tank capacity 50 ltr,air through distance 35 ft. Make:- Symphony, Model / Cat Nos..:- N/A Capacity:50 Ltr., 700 SqF cooling area

Nos. 6

2 Exhaust Fan Crisp Air 250 mm. Make:- USHA Model / Cat Nos..:- N/A Capacity:N/A

Nos.. 15

3 15", 1400 rpm single phase Exhaust Fan Make:- Havells Model / Cat Nos..:- SR-13024090 Capacity:150W

Nos. 10

4 400 mm dia Wall Mounted Fan Make - Havells Make:- Havells Model / Cat Nos..:- FHWSWPTWHT16 Capacity:N/A

Nos. 75

5 400 mm dia Padestal Fan Make - Havells Nos. 50


225

Make:- Havells Model / Cat Nos..:- FHSSWSTCWH16 Capacity:N/A

6 Ceiling Fan, 1200mm dia, Crompton (white color) Nos. 20

7 Industrial Fan, 24" dia, 600mm sweep, make - Almonard Nos. 10

SUB TOTAL [D]

[E] MCCB/MCB / ELCB / CONNECTORS AND ACCESERIES

1 FPMCB Make:- Schinder, Model / Cat Nos..:- C60H Capacity:63A

Nos.. 10

2 FPMCB Make:- Schneider, Model / Cat Nos..:- C60H Capacity:40A

Nos.. 10

3 SPMCB Make:- Schneider, Model / Cat Nos..:- C60H Capacity:25A

Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10

7 DPELCB Make:- Schneider, Model / Cat Nos..:-16205 Capacity:63A(100MA)

Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10

10 Connector Make:- jainson Model / Cat Nos..:- N/A Capacity: 10 Amp

Nos.. 50


Nos.. 50


Nos.. 50


Nos.. 50


Nos.. 50

15 Contactor Make:- L&T Model / Cat Nos..:-MNX 18 Capacity:18Amp

Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10

20 ContactorMake:- L&T Model / Cat Nos..:-MNX 25 Capacity:25Amp Nos.. 10

21 Contactor Kit Make:- L&T Model / Cat Nos..:-MNX 25 Capacity:25Amp

Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10


Nos.. 10

25 Contactor Kit Make:- L&T Model / Cat Nos..:-MNX70 Capacity:70Amp

Nos.. 10

26 Contactor Kit Nos.. 10


226

Make:- L&T Model / Cat Nos..:-MNX 95 Capacity:95Amp

27 Timer Make:- L&T / BCH Model / Cat Nos..:-800 X A Capacity:10 Amp

Nos.. 10

28 MPCB 3 Pole Make:- L&T (Super Nova)/ Cat Nos..:-A/AC-3 Capacity:6.3 - 10 Amp

Nos.. 10

29 MPCB 3 Pole Make:- L&T (Super Nova)/ Cat Nos..:-A/AC-3 Capacity:9 - 13 Amp

Nos.. 10

30 MPCB 3 Pole Make:- L&T (Super Nova)/ Cat Nos..:-A/AC-3 Capacity: 11-16 Amp

Nos.. 10

31 MPCB 3 Pole Make:- L&T (Super Nova)/ Cat Nos..:-A/AC-3 Capacity: 4-6.3 Amp

Nos.. 10

32 MPCB 3 Pole Make:- L&T (Super Nova)/ Cat Nos..:-A/AC-3 Capacity:19-25 Amp

Nos.. 10

33 MPCB 3 PoleMake:- L&T (Super Nova)/ Cat Nos..:-A/AC-3 Capacity: 28-40 Amp Nos.. 10

34 MPCB 3 Pole Make:- L&T (Super Nova)/ Cat Nos..:-A/AC-3 Capacity: 45-63 Amp

Nos.. 10

35 BUZZER INDICATION Make:- Legrand/ Cat Nos..:-N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 50

36 BUZZER for call bell Make:- Legrand/ Cat Nos..:-573643Capacity: N/A

Nos. 50

37 3pin Top Make:- ANCHOR/ Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: 6/16Amp

Nos.. 50

38 Extension Board Make:- ANCHOR/ Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: 6/16Amp

Nos.. 50

39 Supply of Kaju clip 10 mm Make:- ANCHOR/ Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

pkt 20

40 Supply of Kaju clip Anchor 12 mm Make:- ANCHOR/ Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

pkt 20

41 Supply of PVC Grip Anchor 1.5 inch Make:- ANCHOR/ Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

pkt 20

42 Supply of PVC Tape steel Grip Make:- Steel Grip/ Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 1000

43 Dummy Plate (Black) Make:- Standard Make Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos.. 100

44 Dummy Plate (White) Make:- Standard Make Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos.. 50

45 Supply of Steel Screw 1.5 inch Make:- Standard Make Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

pkt 10

46 Supply of Steel Screw 3 inch Make:- Standard Make Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

pkt 10

47 ELECTRONIC CALL BELL Make:- Standard Make Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 50

48 Cooler Pump Make:- ISI Marked Cat Nos..:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 20

49 Push button Make:- Tecnic Cat Nos..:RingType Capacity: 51NO

Nos. 10

50 Push button Make:- Tecnic Cat Nos..:RingType Capacity: 52NC

Nos. 10

51 Selector SwitchMake:- KEECEE Cat Nos..:4639AP Capacity: 10 AMP Nos. 10

52 Contactor, 3TF-50, make-Siemece Nos. 5

53 Contactor, 3TF-47, make-Siemece Nos. 5

54 Contactor Kit, 3TF-50, make-Siemece Nos. 5

55 Contactor Kit, 3TF-47, make-Siemece Nos. 5

56 HRC Fuse, 160 A, make Siemence Nos. 12


227

57 Relay, 1.6 A to 2.5 A, NS-2-25, CHNT Nos. 5

58 Relay, 30 A to 50 A, make- L&T Nos. 5

59 MCCB, 100 A, DM-160, make- L&T Nos. 5

60 MCCB, 100A, make- Schneider Nos. 5

61 MCCB, 125A, make- Schneider Nos. 5

62 A.C.Socket, 25A/32A, Havells Nos. 20

63 TPN, 32A/40A/63A Nos. 15

64 TP, 16A/32A/40A/63A Nos. 15

65 MCCB, DN2-250D, 250A, make- L&T Nos. 5

66 Cu. Lug (6mm to 400mm, Pin & Ring both type) Nos. 50

67 Al. Lug (25mm to 400mm, Pin & Ring both type) Nos. 50

SUB TOTAL [E]

[F] CABLES & BOXES

1 Cat 6 cable (UTP) Make:- D-link Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Rmt. 300

2 3Core Lead Wire 4 Sqmm. Make:-Anchor Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Rmt. 300

3 3Core Lead Wire 2.5 Sqmm. Make:-Anchor Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Rmt. 300

4 4Core Cable 16 Sqmm Make:-Anchor Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Rmt. 100

5 4Core Cable 4 Sqmm Make:-Anchor Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Rmt. 100

6 Casing Capping (1") Make:-ABS Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 100

7 PVC Box & Plates 6 Module Make:Roma Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 50

8 Modular Box with plate Roma make (8M, 6M, 3M) Nos. 200

SUB TOTAL [F]

[G] AHU BELTS / MOTOR TERMINALS

1 AHU Belts (SPA-1700) Make:- Pix-X-Set Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 20


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 15


Nos. 20


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10

12 AHU Belts (SPA-800) Nos. 10


228

Make:- Pix-X-Set Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10

20 AHU Belts (SPA-1900)Make:- Pix-X-Set Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 15

23 AHU Belts (BCH- A 24) Make:- Pix-X-Set Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 10

24 Motor Terminal (50 HP) Make:- Shakshi Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 10


Nos. 10

26 Motor Terminal (12.5 HP) Make:- Shakshi Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 25


Nos. 10


Nos. 10


Nos. 10

34 Motor Terminal (25 HP) Make:- Pix-X-Set Model / Cat Nos:N/A Capacity: N/A

Nos. 10

SUB TOTAL [G]

[H] NEW LIGHT FIXTURES/LAMPS (LED & OTHERS) 1 LED Strip for Cove Light with driver Wipro make RMtr. 300

2 1X36, Tube Light Set, make-Wipro Nos. 50

3 LED Fixture, make-Philips,suitable for 2X36 W (2'X2') CFL Light Fixture Nos. 80

4 150W Sodium Vapor Lamp, IP 66, including control gear box with lamp, make philips Nos. 2

5 LED Flood light 150W, make - Halonix, model no. HLFC-ML04-150CW Nos. 15

6 LED Down Lighter 30W, ZM-30, make - Teknolite. Nos. 15

7 LED Fixture, iris LED Slim RO, round slim downlighter 18 W , make-Wipro (suitable for 2X26W circular CFL Fixture replacement)

Nos. 300


229

8 LED Table Lamp, I care desk light, make- Philips Nos. 10

9 Wipro Garnet N90001 B22 9-Watt LED Bulb (Cool Day Light) Nos. 500

10 18W, CFL Lamp, ELS-M/T3, make - HPL (Spiral) Nos. 250

SUB TOTAL [H]

[I] OTHERS ELECTRICAL ITEMS 1 Float Valve Nos. 5

2 Bearing (Double ZZ) for Ceiling Fan make TATA or Equivalent Nos. 100

3 Capacitor, 2/2.5/16 Nos. 50

4 Conduit Pipe, 2mm thick, 1", make Saraswati Pcs. 100

5 Conduit 1" Band Pckt. 5

SUB TOTAL [I]

Name of work: Supplying, Installation, Testing and Commissioning (SITC) of Cooling Tower Fills With Drift Eliminator in HVAC System of Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan Naya Raipur.

Reference: NRDA Work Order No. No: 572 / CTF(2nd Call)/Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/ CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16 Dtd.: 21 / 8 /2015, CA No. 11/ CTF(2nd Call)/ /Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/ CE (E) / NRDA / 15-16 Dtd.:19/8 /2015 [Priya Enterprises, Malad (W) Mumbai ].

*****

Technical Specification of Works

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL:

Manufacturer Specification of each items.


The whole of the materials, employed in connection with the permanent work, shall be new and of the best of its kind. All materials

shall be in accordance with these specifications and shall be as approved by the engineer’s representative.

Standards:

Except where otherwise specified or permitted by the engineer in charge, all material shall confirm to the latest edition of Indian

/international Standard Specifications.


230

HVAC ITEMS : SR.NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION APPROVED MAKES/

MANUFACTURES

1 Cooling Tower - Suitable for Model no: CM-16 Mihir / Advance / Paharpur A.3 FRP COOLING TOWER

Cooling towers operating simultaneously shall be able to reject combined heat of all units.

1. CONSTRUCTION Cooling tower shall be bottle type. Structural components of the tower, including the cold water basin, structural columns,

hot water basin and fan cylinder shall be fabricated of fiberglass Reinforced Polyester. Mechanical equipment supports and

all other steel components shall be HDG steel. Tower assembly hardware shall be HDG steel, Tower assembly hardware

shall be HDG steel. Tower manufacturer must supply galvanized steel supporting grillage. Grillage must be of sufficient

strength to support the tower on piers located near the corners of the tower. Tower price quoted must include grillage price.

2. HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM An open basin above each fill bank shall receive hot water piped to each cell of the tower. Water shall enter the basin

through a removable wave-suppressor splash box and the basin shall provide adequate freeboard against overflow and

splash out. Equally sized and symmetrically spaced, removable and replaceable polypropylene nozzles installed in the floor

of the basin shall provide full coverage of the fill by gravity flow. Fiberglass reinforced polyester hot water basin covers are

required.

3. COLD WATER BASIN & ACCESSORIES The cold water basin shall include flanged suction connection, overflow and drain. A float-operated, mechanical make-up

valve shall be included. HDG steel screens shall be included to prevent entry of airborne debris into the cold water basin

outboard of the fill.

4. FILL, LOUVERS & DRIFT ELIMINATORS Fill shall be film-type of Honeycomb design, vacuum formed PVC, with louvers and drift eliminators formed as part of each

fill sheet. Fill shall be suspended from HDG steel structural tubing supported from the tower structure and shall be elevated

above the floor of the cold water basin to facilitate cleaning. Air inlet faces of the tower shall be free of water splash out.

Guaranteed drift losses shall not exceed 0.005% of the design GPM.

5. FAN & MOTOR Fan shall be adjustable pitch propeller type. Fans shall be driven through a right angle, industrial duty, oil-lubricated, geared

speed reducer, equipped with an oil level sight glass. The motor shall be located outside the moist air-stream. A full-floating

drive shaft consisting of stainless steel tube and neoprene flex elements shall couple the electric motor to the geared speed

reducer. The mechanical equipment shall be structurally supported independent of the casing. HDG steel wire mesh guard

to prevent entry of airborne objects into the fan itself is required. Motor shall be of suitable rating, TEFC, specially insulated

to withstand cooling tower duty.

TECHNICAL / OPERATING DATA OF COOLING TOWER

1. WATER FLOW RATE - 1300 USGPM

2. AMBIENT WET BULB TEMPERATURE - 26°C

3. ENT. WATER TEMPERATURE - 36°C

4. BASIN WATER TEMPERATURE - 32°C

Name of Work :- SITC of Cooling Tower Fills with Drift Eliminator in HVAC system of Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan Naya Raipur .

NIT No.: 20 /CTF/Mantralaya-MD/EEC1 / CE (E) / NRDA / 2015-16 Naya Raipur, Dated: 16/06/2015


231

Item No.

Discription Unit Qty Remarks/Make

1

SUPPLYING, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING (SITC) of Cooling Tower Fills with Drift Eliminator by removing old fills with Drift Eliminator and replacing the New Fills with Drift Eliminatoras per specification and direction of engineer-in-charge. The removed material to be properly stacked on the Terrace floor. The Inlet & Outlet temperature before and after replacement of Fills with Drift Eliminator to be shown to client as testing and commissioning.

Set 4

Suitable for Model no: CM-16. Rate inclusive all taxes, Transport & handling charges, Contractor Profit (including SD, IT, CT etc.).


232

Name of Work: Repairing & Annual Maintenance of WATER COOLER, WTP, RO & FILTRATION SYSTEM 5/10/12.5/15 HP Pumps & Pumping system of Mantralaya Mahanadi Bhawan and Rajdhani Sarovar at Naya Raipur .

NIT No. 37 / WTP / Mantralaya-MD/EEC1/CE(E)/NRDA/2015-16 (2nd Call), Naya Raipur, Dated: 31./10/2015

PART-1 : OVER-HAULING / REPAIRING OF BREAKDOWN UNITS / SYSTEMS [ONE-TIME ONLY]

Sl. No. Item No.

Discription Unit Qty Remarks/Make

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 A

OVER-HAULING / REPAIRING OF 5/10/12.5/15 HP CAPACITY SUBMERSIBLE

CENTRIFUGAL & HYDROPNUMATICE Pumps & pumping systems including NECESSARY PARTS & FITTINGS

(EXCLUDING CONSUMABLES) as per specification and direction of engineer-in-

charge.

Set 40

Grundfos / HBD / Kirlosker make.

FOR ITEMS MENTIONED IN ANNEX-

1 & 2 FOR MANTRALAYA &

RAJDHANI SAROVAR.

2 TOTAL-PART-1 40

PART-2:SUPPLYING / REPLACEMENT COST OF DEFECTIVE PARTS [DURING 12 MONTHS PERIOD AS & WHEN REQUIRED]

3 B

SUPPLYING, REPAIR & REPLACEMENT OF CONSUMABLE & DEFECTIVE PARTS OF WATER COOLER, WTP, RO & FILTRATION SYTEM including following items as per specification and direction of engineer-in-charge-

[Cost of Repairing / Replacement shall be

Reimbursed as per actual bill raised by the service provider after repairing / maintaining the agreed defective

items / materials (who is not covered in DLP /

Warranty)] FOR ITEMS

MENTIONED IN ANNEX-1 & 2 FOR

MANTRALAYA & RAJDHANI SAROVAR.

4 1 NGMF-20 (COMPLETE SET) Set 1 5 2 NGMA-20 (COMPLETE SET) Set 1 6 3 Multiport Valve Top-Mounted 20 NB No. 2 7 4 Diaphragm Valve 40 NB R/L No. 2 8 5 Butterfly Valve 100 NB No. 2 9 6 25mm dia. Ball Valve for RO No. 4

10 7 Automatic Air-releif Valve No. 4 11 8 Pressure Gauge ( 0- 7 kg) No. 12 12 9 Dosing pump No. 2 13 10 Gun-Metal Nozzle Ejector for Softener No. 2 [Cost of Repairing /

Replacement shall be Reimbursed as per

actual bill raised by the service provider after repairing / maintaining the agreed defective

items / materials (who is not covered in DLP /

Warranty)]FOR ITEMS

14 11 Multigrade Filter (2Cum/hr) No. 2 15 12 Automatice Air Releif valve No. 4 16 13 Rotameter No. 8 17 14 800 LPH UV System No. 4

18 15

Supply & installation of SS 316 grade material 200 ltr. capacity Foodgrade Water Storage Tank with complete asseseries / assembly.

No. 2


233

19 16 Supply & installation of Electric Penal complete set with complete asseseries / assembly.

Set 2

MENTIONED IN ANNEX-1 & 2 FOR

MANTRALAYA & RAJDHANI SAROVAR.

20 17 Hardness Test Kit No. 2 21 18 Online SDI (Silt Density Index) Test Kit No. 1

22 TOTAL-PART-2 57

PART-3 : ANNUAL MAINTENANCE COST INCLUDING CONSUMABLE & PARTS

23 C

SUPPLYING, FIXING AND COMMISSIONING of following items in WATER COOLER, WTP, RO & FILTRATION SYSTEM as per specification and direction of engineer-in-charge-

FOR ITEMS MENTIONED IN ANNEX-

1 & 2 FOR MANTRALAYA &

RAJDHANI SAROVAR.

24 1 Mambrane Filter 4040 For RO (Hydramen / CSM)

No. 12 For RO.

25 2 5 Micron RO Filter Cartrige size 20" x 2.5" [6TIMES X 4 = 24]

No. 24

26 3 Activated Carbon (900 IV) Kg 200 For WTP & Filter.

27 4 Antiscalant (Equivalent to INDION 8111 make)

Kg 240

28 5 Resin (Equivalent to INDION 225 Na make) Ltr. 500 For WTP.

29 6 Sodium Hypoclorite (NaoCl) / Bleaching Powder

Kg 1000 For WTP & Filter.

30 7 Filter Media [Hydrated Aluminium Sulphate - Alum - (Al2 So4)3] / (Ferric Chlorite/FeCl3)]

Kg 500

31 8 RO cleaning Chemical-A (Equivalent to SERCON 201 make)

Kg 100

For cleaning of RO membrane.

32 9 RO cleaning Chemical-B (Equivalent to SERCON 202 make)

Kg 100

33 10 RO cleaning Chemical-C (Equivalent to SERCON 203 make)

Kg 100

34 11

Charges for Regular servicing & maintenance of all WATER COOLER, WTP,

RO & FILTRATION SYSTEM AND 5/10/12.5/15 HP CAPACITY SUBMERSIBLE

CENTRIFUGAL & HYDROPNUMATICE Pumps & pumping systems including

installation, testing & commissioning of parts & materials complete. (EXCLUDING COST

OF PARTS & MATERIALS].

PER MONTH

12

For 12 Months FOR ITEMS MENTIONED IN

ANNEX-1 & 2 FOR MANTRALAYA &

RAJDHANI SAROVAR.

35 PART-3 Total Per annum (for 12 months) 2788

Necessary Tools & Plants shall be brought at

site by the service provider for O&M.

36 ANNUAL TOTAL [PART-1, 2 & 3] 2885


234

ANNEX-1 MANTRALAYA WTP, RO, WATER COOLERS, WATER SUPPLY PUMPS & FILTRATION SYSTEM

Sr. No.

Description Qty. Unit Rate (Rs.) Amount (Rs.)

Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A WATER COOLERS:

6.31

Supplying, Installation, Testing, Commisioning (Voltas Tushar or approved equivalent make) storage type water cooler of capacity 120 Ltrs. per hour, 30 C at inlet & 13.5 C at outlet point complete with inline water filter pressure reducing valve, suction cooler hermetic compressor equipped with overload protector, propeller type condencer fan, theRmtostat, non-toxic refrigerant material, 230 volts with proper earthing connection suitably modified to supply with one downtake S.S. pipe of 25 mm dia & making fix drain connection through flexible hose. 4 Nos specially designed C.P. press to pour faucet etc. complete.

43 Nos 29702.00 1277186.00

B WATER SUPPLY PUMPS & HYDRO SYSTEMS:

8.1

Supplying, Fixing, testing & commissioning HBD make horizontal multistage Single outlet centrifugal pump set (Split Casing) capable of delivering 2850 LPM at 85 M head for having cast iron casing, bronze impellers, EN-8 shaft with bronze shaft sleeves dir

1 Nos 395814.90 395814.90

8.2

Supplying, Fixing, testing & commissioning HBD make horizontal multistage Single outlet centrifugal pump set (Split Casing) capable of delivering 2850 LPM at 80 M head for having cast iron casing, bronze impellers, EN-8 shaft with bronze shaft sleeves dir

1 Nos 253371.56 253371.56

8.3

Supplying, Fixing testing & commissioning HBD make multistage horizontal centrifugal pump set capable of delivering 250 LPM at 85 M head due to all causes with TEFC squirrel cage induction motor of 2900 RPM, foundation bolts, etc. complete 12.5 HP (jockey

1 Nos 242116.16 242116.16

8.4

Supplying, Fixing testing & commissioning HBD make multistage horizontal centrifugal pump set capable of delivering 250 LPM at 80 M head due to all causes with TEFC squirrel cage induction motor of 2900 RPM, foundation bolts, etc. complete 12.5 HP (jockey

1 Nos 242116.16 242116.16

8.5

Supplying, Fixing testing & commissioning HBD make Terrace Fire Booster pump, horizontal centrifugal pump set capable of delivering 450 LPM at 35 M head due to all causes with TEFC squirrel cage induction

6 Nos 121620.85 729725.10


235

motor of 2900 RPM, foundation bolts, etc. complet

8.6 AIR CUSHION TANK

Supplying, fixing, erecting, testing & commissioning Diaphragm operated vertical Air caution tank of capacity 600 Ltrs. fabricated out of 8mm thick MS plate vessel should be suitable to operate at a maximum pressure of 15 Kg/Sqm and should be complete wi

2 Nos 52900.38 105800.76

8.7 Auto-manual control panel for all above pumps.

1 Nos 380557.58 380557.58

C Hydro-pneumatic Pumping-systems

8.8 Domestic water 1 Nos 1244972.30 1244972.30

(HBD make skid mounted Hydro pneumatic system)

a)

Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Vertical Stainless Steel inline pumps having 304 SS casing, 304 SS impellers, 304 SS shaft and driven by 15 HP 2900 RPM 415 Volts, 50 cycles, AC 3 phase TEFC motor. Each pump should be capable of delive

b)

Supplying Fixing Erecting, testing & Commissioning Vertical precharged diaphragm tank 100 Ltrs. suitable to operate at a maximum pressure of 15 Kg. and should be complete with necessary inlet & outlet connections for water, air and control. Vessel should

c)

Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Variable Speed drive Control panel with 1 No. Shnieider make Variable Speed drive controller and 1 No. Fixed speed drives for 3 X 15 HP pumps having 63 Amps incomming Isoalting switch fuse unit, Incommi

d)

The mega control should start the first pump on VFD. The pressure transmitter should provide signal to the VFD thorugh the PID controller in such a manner that as long as the consumption is within the capacity of the one Variable Speed pump a constant pre

e) all internal wiring to ensure that the entire equipments works as a composite system. 1 No.

8.9 Flushing water: 1 Nos 2011590.10 2011590.10


a)

Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Vertical Stainless Steel inline pumps having 304 SS casing, 304 SS impellers, 304 SS shaft and driven by 20 HP 2900 RPM 415 Volts, 50 cycles, AC 3 phase TEFC motor. Each pump should be capable of delive


236

b)

Supplying Fixing Erecting, testing & Commissioning Vertical precharged diaphragm tank 100 Ltrs. suitable to operate at a maximum pressure of 15 Kg. and should be complete with necessary inlet & outlet connections for water, air and control. Vessel should

c)

Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Variable Speed drive Control panel with 1 No. shnieider make Variable Speed drive controller and 2 Nos. Fixed speed drives for 3 X 20 HP pumps having 63 Amps incomming Isoalting switch fuse unit, Incom

d)

The mega control should start the first pump on VFD. The pressure transmitter should provide signal to the VFD thorugh the PID controller in such a manner that as long as the consumption is within the capacity of the one Variable Speed pump a constant pre

e) all wiring to ensure that the entire equipments works as a composite system. 1 No.

D SUMP PUMP FOR BASEMENT DRAIN:

8.1

Supplying, fixing, Testing & commissioning vertical foot mounted fully Submersible dewatering non clog sump pump of cast iron construction having bronze impeller, suitable for 1000 MM deep sump, capable of delivering 500 LPM at 15 M head 5 HP motor 2900

4 Nos 94107.65 376430.60

8.11

Supplying, Erecting, Testing Commissioning Fully automatic control panel for 2 x 5 HP storm water pumps with high and low level controls. Complete with all integral wiring using Copper PVC insulated/ Tapped and colour coded wires/flats of adequate size

1 Set 58590.61 58590.61

E WATER TREATMENT PLANT

8.12 Water treatment plant comprising of following of capacity 400CUM/DAY of Flow rate 50 CUM/HR & of 8 HRS. operation.

1 Set 1631720.35 1631720.35

1) Dual media filter of FRP shell

2) Activated carbon filter of FRP shell

3) Softener of FRP shell catering TDS of about 750 PPM

4) Dosing arrangement

5) Water quality is as follows

TDS 1000 PPM, Hardness 750 PPM, Calcium 200 PPM

6) Necessary filter feed pumps (2 nos) & panels 50 CUM/HR at 20M Head

F R O PLANT

8.13 R O plant comprising of all necessary equipment of capacity 6CUM/DAY of Flow rate 0.75 CUM/HR & of 8 HRS. operation.

4 Sets 296142.08 1184568.32

G FILTRATION SYSTEM FOR WATER BODY 1 Nos 428580.62 428580.62


237

8.14 WATER BODY PUMPS

A

Supplying, Fixing testing & commissioning horizontal fully submersible centrifugal pump set capable of delivering 1000 LPM at 25 M head due to all causes with motor of 2900 RPM, foundation bolts, etc. complete 10 HP (2 NOS.)

B Manual operated starter switch with on / off facility having low level protection capable for operations of two no. pumps (1 NO.)

C

Supplying, Fixing, Testing & commissioning Fiberglass Vertical high rate Pressure sand filter (cap. shall be 500 LPM) with 1200 mm. dia.x 1800 mm. high, Non corrosive base legs, etc. complete. with Top mounted, 6 position multiport valve - for back wash &

D Accessories :

Supplying, Fixing, Testing & commissioning Alum and Bleaching solution tanks fabricated out of PVC/FRP shall have a useful capacity of 100 Ltrs. provide removable hinged cover and tank shall be provided with hand.

Supplying, Fixing, Testing & commissioning Diaphragm operated pot type doser with PVC hose 7 injection nozzle etc.

Supplying, Fixing, & Testing All piping between balancing tank & pump, pump to filter (80 mm dia. UPVC Schedule 80 Pipes & GI fittings such as bend, Tee, socket & Approximate piping 80 meters with 16 Nos. fittings) Filter to water body and Brass CP Water

TOTAL 10563141.12


238

ANNEX-2

RAJDHANI SAROVAR WATER SUPPLY PUMPS, WATER COOLERS & FILTRATION SYSTEM

Sr.No. Description Qty. Unit Rate (Rs.) Amount (Rs.) Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5. WATER SUPPLY :

Hydro pneumatic systems

5.30 Domestic water 1.00 SETS 575,000.00 575,000.00 as per Quote


a) Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Vertical Stainless Steel inline pumps having 304 SS casing, 304 SS impellers, 304 SS shaft and driven by 2900 RPM 415 Volts, 50 cycles, AC 3 phase TEFC motor. Each pump should be capable of delivering 75 LPM at 55 M head, from all causes. Pumps should have shut off head of about 50 meters. - 3 Nos

b) Supplying Fixing Erecting, testing & Commissioning Vertical precharged diaphragm tank 100 Ltrs. suitable to operate at a maximum pressure of 15 Kg. and should be complete with necessary inlet & outlet connections for water, air and control. Vessel should be fitted with suitable rubber diaphragm to form partition between air & Water. - 1 No.

c) Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Variable Speed drive Control panel with 1 No. Shnieider make Variable Speed drive controller and 1 No. Fixed speed drives for 3 X 5 HP pumps having 63 Amps incomming Isoalting switch fuse unit, Incomming volt meter with sector Switch branch ammeter for each pump motor phase indication lamps & 32 Amps branch MCBs for each motor should be provided. The control elements should include PID controller and pressure transducers. The drive should include the following protection features which shall be built into the units. Short circuits, over voltage, under voltage, adjustable overload, phase loss, stall prevention, over temperature of heat sink, charge system protection and over current. The Control circuit should be such that out of two pumps one pump should be with variable speed drive & other Pump should be with fixed Speed drive. The panel should include DP Hollond make Mega Control device for equal load sharing of pumps such that both the pumpes are run for same No. of hours.


239

d) The mega control should start the first pump on VFD. The pressure transmitter should provide signal to the VFD thorugh the PID controller in such a manner that as long as the consumption is within the capacity of the one Variable Speed pump a constant pressure of 5 Kg/Sq. Cm should be maintained by varing the speed of the motor proportioned to damand. Should the consumption be more & the Variable Speed Pump cannot cope with the demand the mage control device will keep the first VFD pump running at its full speed and start the second pump on VFD. During peak load one pump will therefore be working on fixed speed and one pump on VFD. in case of no demand the mega device should builtup the speed of VFD pumps to its maximum RPM for a set time period to charge the diaphragm tank after which the same should be cut of and no pump should be operational in case of no consumption. The rates quoted should include all the power circuits with Switch, fuse units, DOL starters indicating lamps and


5.31 Drinking water 1.00 SETS 450,000.00 450,000.00 as per Quote


a) Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Vertical Stainless Steel inline pumps having 304 SS casing, 304 SS impellers, 304 SS shaft and driven by 2900 RPM 415 Volts, 50 cycles, AC 3 phase TEFC motor. Each pump should be capable of delivering 50 LPM at 55 M head, from all causes. Pumps should have shut off head of about 50 meters. - 3 Nos


c) Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Variable Speed drive Control panel with 1 No. Shnieider make Variable Speed drive controller and 1 No. Fixed speed drives for 3 X 5 HP pumps having 63 Amps incomming Isoalting switch fuse unit, Incomming volt meter with sector Switch branch ammeter for each pump motor phase


240

indication lamps & 32 Amps branch MCBs for each motor should be provided. The control elements should include PID controller and pressure transducers. The drive should include the following protection features which shall be built into the units. Short circuits, over voltage, under voltage, adjustable overload, phase loss, stall prevention, over temperature of heat sink, charge system protection and over current. The Control circuit should be such that out of two pumps one pump should be with variable speed drive & other Pump should be with fixed Speed drive. The panel should include DP Hollond make Mega Control device for equal load sharing of pumps such that both the pumpes are run for same No. of hours.

d) The mega control should start the first pump on VFD. The pressure transmitter should provide signal to the VFD thorugh the PID controller in such a manner that as long as the consumption is within the capacity of the one Variable Speed pump a constant pressure of 5 Kg/Sq. Cm should be maintained by varing the speed of the motor proportioned to damand. Should the consumption be more & the Variable Speed Pump cannot cope with the demand the mage control device will keep the first VFD pump running at its full speed and start the second pump on VFD. During peak load one pump will therefore be working on fixed speed and one pump on VFD. in case of no demand the mega device should builtup the speed of VFD pumps to its maximum RPM for a set time period to charge the diaphragm tank after which the same should be cut of and no pump should be operational in case of no consumption. The rates quoted should include all the power circuits with Switch, fuse units, DOL starters indicating lamps and


5.32 Flushing water:

1.00 Nos 575,000.00 575,000.00 as per Quote


a) Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Vertical Stainless Steel inline pumps having 304 SS casing, 304 SS impellers, 304 SS shaft and driven by 2900 RPM 415 Volts, 50 cycles, AC 3 phase TEFC motor. Each pump should be capable of delivering 75LPM at 50 M head, from all causes. Pumps should have shut off head


241

of about 50 meters. -3 Nos


c) Supplying, Fixing, Testing, erecting & Commissioning Variable Speed drive Control panel with 1 No. shnieider make Variable Speed drive controller and 2 Nos. Fixed speed drives for 3 X 10 HP pumps having 63 Amps incomming Isoalting switch fuse unit, Incomming volt meter with sector Switch branch ammeter for each pump motor phase indication lamps & 40 Amps branch MCBs for each motor should be provided. The control elements should include PID controller and pressure transducers. The drive should include the following protection features which shall be built into the units. Short circuits, over voltage, under voltage, adjustable overload, phase loss, stall prevention, over temperature of heat sink, charge system protection and over current. The Control circuit should be such that out of three pumps one pump should be with variable speed drive & Two Pumps should be with fixed Speed drive. The panel should include DP Hollond make Mega Control device for equal load sharing of pumps such that all pumpes are run for same No. of hours.

d) The mega control should start the first pump on VFD. The pressure transmitter should provide signal to the VFD thorugh the PID controller in such a manner that as long as the consumption is within the capacity of the one Variable Speed pump a constant pressure of 6.5 Kg/Sq. Cm should be maintained by varing the speed of the motor proportioned to damand. Should the consumption be more & the Variable Speed Pump cannot cope with the demand the mage control device will keep the first VFD pump running at its full speed and start the second pump on VFD. During peak load one pump will therefore be working on fixed speed and one pump on VFD. in case of no demand the mega device should builtup the speed of VFD pumps to its maximum RPM for a set time period to charge the diaphragm tank after which the same should be cut of and no pump should be operational in case of no consumption. The rates quoted


242

should include all the power circuits with Switch, fuse units, DOL starters indicating lamps and all internal

e) all wiring to ensure that the entire equipments works as a composite system. 1 No.

5.33 SUMP PUMP FOR PUMP ROOM DRAIN:

Supplying, fixing, Testing & commissioning vertical foot mounted fully Submersible dewatering non clog sump pump of cast iron construction having bronze impeller, suitable for 1000 MM deep sump, capable of delivering 500 LPM at 15 M head 5 HP motor 2900 RPM (for Pump Room water Drain)

2.00 Nos 70,000.00 140,000.00 as per Quote

5.34 Supplying, Erecting, Testing Commissioning Fully automatic control panel for 2 x 5 HP storm water pumps with high and low level controls. Complete with all integral wiring using Copper PVC insulated/ Tapped and colour coded wires/ flats of adequate size for all power/ control connections inclusive of necessary terminals etc. comprising.

1.00 Set 35,000.00 35,000.00 as per Quote

5.35 FILTRATION SYSTEM FOR CCIID WATER BODY

1 Set 700,000.00 700,000.00 as per Quote

A Supplying, Fixing testing & commissioning horizontal fully submersible centrifugal pump set capable of delivering 3000 LPM at 40 M head due to all causes with motor of 2900 RPM, foundation bolts, etc. complete 10 HP (2 NOS.)

B Manual operated starter switch with on/ off facility having low level protection capable for operations of two no. pumps (1 NO.)

C Supplying, Fixing, Testing & commissioning FIBERGLASS VERTICAL HIGH-RATE-PRESSURE SAND-FILTER (cap. shall be 500 LPM) with 1200 mm. dia.x 1800 mm. high, Non corrosive base legs, etc. complete. with Top mounted, 6 position multiport valve - for back wash & control filter of special lateral design, Automatic relief valve, Sight glass, Over drain. (1 NO.) FLUID-TECHNOLOGY MAKE

Accessories :


Supplying, Fixing, Testing & commissioning Diaphragm operated pot type doser with


243

PVC hose 7 injection nozzle etc.

Supplying, Fixing, & Testing All piping between balancing tank & pump, pump to filter (80 mm dia. UPVC Schedule 80 Pipes & GI fittings such as bend, Tee, socket & Approximate piping 80 meters with 16 Nos. fittings) Filter to water body and Brass CP Water body drain to balancing tank, brass CP drain overflow grate, strainer, 8 Nos. inlet nozzles as per drawing.

5.36 FILTRATION SYSTEM FOR LAKE 2 Set 700,000.00 1,400,000.00 as per

Quote

A Supplying, Fixing testing & commissioning horizontal fully submersible centrifugal pump set capable of delivering 3000 LPM at 40 M head due to all causes with motor of 2900 RPM, foundation bolts, etc. complete 10 HP (2 NOS.)

B Manual operated starter switch with on/ off facility having low level protection capable for operations of two no. pumps (1 NO.)

C Supplying, Fixing, Testing & commissioning FIBERGLASS VERTICAL HIGH-RATE-PRESSURE SAND-FILTER (cap. shall be 500 LPM) with 1200 mm. dia.x 1800 mm. high, Non corrosive base legs, etc. complete. with Top mounted, 6 position multiport valve - for back wash & control filter of special lateral design, Automatic relief valve, Sight glass, Over drain. (1 NO.) FLUID-TECHNOLOGY MAKE

Accessories :


Supplying, Fixing, Testing & commissioning Diaphragm operated pot type doser with PVC hose 7 injection nozzle etc.

Supplying, Fixing, & Testing All piping between balancing tank & pump, pump to filter (80 mm dia. UPVC Schedule 80 Pipes & GI fittings such as bend, Tee, socket & Approximate piping 80 meters with 16 Nos. fittings) Filter to water body and Brass CP Water body drain to balancing tank, brass CP drain overflow grate, strainer, 8 Nos. inlet nozzles as per drawing.

6. WATER COOLERS:


244

6.31 Supplying, Installation, Testing, Commisioning (Voltas Tushar or approved equivalent make) storage type water cooler of capacity 120 Ltrs. per hour, 30 C at inlet & 13.5 C at outlet point complete with inline water filter pressure reducing valve, suction cooler hermetic compressor equipped with overload protector, propeller type condencer fan, theRmtostat, non-toxic refrigerant material, 230 volts with proper earthing connection suitably modified to supply with one downtake S.S. pipe of 25 mm dia & making fix drain connection through flexible hose. 4 Nos specially designed C.P. press to pour faucet etc. complete.

3.00 Nos 25,000.00 75,000.00 as per Quote

TOTAL

3,950,000.00

Documents

Attechment / Appendix - Nava Raipur Atal Nagar